Citation
A Maori-English lexicon

Material Information

Title:
A Maori-English lexicon being a comprehensive dictionary of the New Zealand tongue
Alternate title:
including mythical, mythological, "taboo" or sacred, genealogical, proverbial, poetical, tropological, sacredotal, incantatory, natural-history, idiomatical, abbreviated, tribal, and other names and terms of and allusions to persons, things, acts, and places in ancient times also, showing their affinities with cognate Polynesian dialects and foreign languages; with copious pure Maori examples
Creator:
Colenso, W. (William), 1811-1899
Language:
English
Maori
Physical Description:
ix, 111, 21 pages ; 25 cm

Subjects

Subjects / Keywords:
Maori language -- Dictionaries ( lcsh )
Reo Māori
Spatial Coverage:
Oceania -- New Zealand
Ao-o-Kiwa -- Aotearoa
Coordinates:
-42 x 174

Notes

General Note:
VIAF (Name Authoity) : Colenso, W. (William), 1811-1899 : URI http://viaf.org/viaf/69861851
General Note:
In two parts: Part I. A, of the Maori-English dictionary; Part II. Specimens of A, B, and C of the English-Maori. No more was published. "Compilation of Maori lexicon by Mr. Colenso (Letters relative to)": pt. II, p. 17-21.

Record Information

Source Institution:
SOAS University of London
Rights Management:
This item is licensed with the Creative Commons Attribution Non-Commerical License. This license lets others remix, tweak, and build upon this work non-commercially, and although their new works must also acknowledge the author and be non-commercial, they don’t have to license their derivative works on the same terms.
Resource Identifier:
IE MAo 413 / 37318 ( soas classmark )
265439303 ( oclc )

Full Text
Oi' THE
NEW ZEALAND TONGUE,
BY THE
REV. W. COLENSO, F. R. S., & F. L. S.
(SPECIMEN.)






PART I.—MAORI-ENGLISH.




A
MAORI-ENGLISH LEXICON:
BEING A
COMPREHENSIVE DICTIONARY
With Author’s Compliments.
MYTHICAL, MYTHOLOGICAL. “TABOO” OR SACRED, GENEALOGICAL. PROVERBIAL, POETICAL.
ROPOLOGICAL, SACERDOTAL, INCANTATORY, NATURAL-HISTORY, IDIOMATICAL, ABBREVIATED,
TRIBAL, AND OTHER NAMES AND TERMS OF AND ALLUSIONS TO PERSONS.
THINGS, ACTS, AND PLACES IN ANCIENT TIMES ;
ALSO,
HOWING THEIR AFFINITIES WITH COGNATE POLYNESIAN DIALECTS AND FOREIGN LANGUAGES ;
WITH COPIOUS PURE MAORI EXAMPLES.
Part I-Maori-English.
BY THE
Rev. W. COLENSO, F.R.S., and F.L.S.;
Member of Wellington Philosophical Society; Honorary Member and President. Hawke’s Bay
Philosophical 'Institute (New Zealand Institute); of Penzance Natural History and Antiquarian
Society; of Australasian Association for Advancement of Science; Honorary Member
of Natural History Society, Santa Barbara, Cal.; &c., &c.
WELLINGTON.
BY AUTHORITY : JOHN MACKAY,
1898.


“ In MAGNIS ET VOLUISSE SAT EST.”
“ Est quoddam prodire tenus, si non datur ultra.”


TO THE
MEMORY
OF
SIR GEORGE GREY, K.C.B., P.O., D.C.L. Oxon.
ETC., ETC., ETC.,
FOR SEVERAL YEARS
GOVERNOR OF THIS COLONY OF NEW ZEALAND,
AND
THE MUNIFICENT PATRON
OF
SCIENCE, ART, AND LITERATURE,
UNDER WHOSE AUSPICES THIS WORK (IN ITS ENTIRETY) WAS
FIRST UNDERTAKEN,
THIS SMALL PRECURSOR SPECIMEN IS NOW DEDICATED
WITH GREAT RESPECT, BY
THE AUTHOR
Napier, January, 1898.




PREFACE.
In publishing this small portion of a long-talked-of work, a few explana-
tions are necessary.
The present is only a very small specimen of a work begun by me
more than sixty years ago; at first, and for many years, merely for private
use in my daily intercourse and work (duty) among the Maoris. When in
the House of Representatives in 1861, as member for Hawke’s Bay, I first
introduced the subject of a Maori-English Lexicon, in order to conserve
the Maori tongue in its beauty, euphony, purity, and strict grammatical
accuracy, then greatly adulterated and fast passing away ; I did not desire
nor suppose that I should ever undertake the work, because my hands,
head, and time were fully occupied with other important matters; but
when, in 1865, the House and Government (after many delays) confirmed
the original application of 1861, I was then in a great measure free from
those other duties, and so, early in 1866, I undertook the work—the heavy
task !
Let it suffice here, very briefly, to say that in March, 1870, the
Government of the day suddenly stopped the carrying on of the work (as
is clearly shown in Parliamentary Paper, G.—11, 1875) ; and although a
few spasmodic attempts have at various times since then been made—or,
rather, agreed to for a time by the Government—yet such were always
somehow frustrated, hindered, broken off ! A future generation may, very
likely, better know the reasons than I can assign them, and also more
clearly see the unfortunate consequences.
However, in 1884, the late Hon. Mr. Ballance and the Hon. Sir R.
Stout, after a personal interview with both here in Napier, induced me to
again take up the work; and for a time (say nine months) I again worked
hard at it, sending in to the Government in February, 1885, this first
portion, or letter “ A ” (contained in 249 folio foolscap pages, clean copy for
press), it having been proposed by the Government that the Lexicon should
be published in parts. Notwithstanding, the printing was again put off,
and finally, in July, 1891, set aside, (officially Ct countermanded,”) until
in September, 1895, the present Premier, the Right Hon. R. J. Seddon,
consented to this small portion being printed at the Government Press.
And now a few words respecting this inadequate sample of the original
work.
1. It is incomplete : (1.) Some words will be found inserted to which
1 have not attached an English equivalent, from not sufficiently knowing


PREFACE.
viii
them. (2.) No doubt there are other Maori words beginning with “ A,”
though not many ; for it must not be overlooked that, formerly, before
the foundation of the colony, the Maori people were separated into dis-
tinct tribes, dwelling apart, each possessing its own peculiar vernacular
dialect, which always varied largely in its nouns, and consequently also its
verbs. (3.) In later years I have often endeavoured to obtain the true
meaning of a word unknown to me (words being fossil thoughts), but have
failed, owing to it having become utterly obsolete and forgotten by the
Maoris living about me—their old men, chiefs, and tohungas (priests, tyc.)—
some, indeed, adding : “ it was very old, formerly heard, but long disused ;”
while others would shrink or abstain from considering it at all, saying it
was a tapu (“ sacred ” or “ bad ”) word or phrase, anciently used in
sorcery and witchcraft, incantation and potent malediction, and there-
fore in modern times abandoned and not again to be mentioned, &c.
(4.) No doubt, at the period when I undertook the work (more than
thirty years ago), with the old and skilled' Maoris that I then knew and
was intimate with, that at that time I should have mastered some if not
all of those words now wanting their English equivalents, and also gained
many others (this last, certain), had the Government of the day kept its
word (original official contract) with me ; or, had I then been able to
continue my work without the promised and stipulated Government aid.
(5.) My early plan, when acquiring the language, and afterwards, was to
take down every new word I should hear made use of in my extensive
travelling among the Maoris on foot throughout the whole North Island—
from Cook Strait to Cape Maria Van Diemen—and my many visits to their
villages ; and, more particularly, at their own public meetings for matters
of peace or war between themselves, then especially was the time to hear
new words and phrases, when the impassioned orators on both sides of the
question would be engaged in declaiming—using, after their manner,
proverbial and ancient pet words and popular sayings. Yet, often, I could
only barely note down the one word used, and of these, in several in-
stances (owing to opposing circumstances), their true meanings were never
afterwards fully ascertained.
2. It contains but a meagre number of words : This, also, is true, com-
paratively ; but then this is owing to the genius of the great Polynesian
language, alike found in all its many and varied island dialects through-
out its several groups; being the very opposite of what pertains to our
Western languages—viz., that in pure Maori a few words only commence
with a vowel, yet more under “ A ” than under any one of the other
vowels, and very few indeed under “E” and “I.” I would have greatly
preferred giving the words I have collected beginning with a consonant
(say, “ H,” “ K,” “ M,” “ R,” or “ T ”) as a specimen, with, of course,
their English equivalents, as then, in this case, the richness and fulness
of the Maori language would be better shown and made known.


PREFACE.
ix
3. Concerning the style of the work : It will be seen that I have con-
formed to the usual plan of the dictionaries of our Western languages
(Latin especially) in adopting the long and short marks over vowels. Yet,
while I have done this, I confess I would much rather have adhered to my
old custom (and original plan in my MS. of this work), of doubling the
vowel where its extra long pronunciation was absolutely required; this,
too, being the true Maori manner of writing them.
4. Hereafter: Should my numerous Maori MSS. (both written by
myself and by my many Maori correspondents) be preserved in their
entirety as I shall leave them, and fall into fit and proper and patient
hands, much of real linguistic service will, I believe, be obtained from
them; but the person to accomplish this must, in many respects, be a kind
of alter ego, possessing a hearty love as well as the proper knowledge for
his work, and free from inflated wild notions respecting the origin of the
Maori, or he will fail in the attempt. Moreover, generally it will be
found that the many entries and remarks throughout my MSS. were set
down by me in a shortened kind of way, to be, of course, more fully
taken up and put into regular order by myself; yet this, through the
stoppage of the work, has not been done : it is still in its rough.
5. Lastly : I would briefly mention that I have not been in the least
dependent on, or aided by, any of the Maori vocabularies and dictionaries
that have preceded me in publication, having hitherto almost religiously
abstained from even looking into them, wishing to preserve an independent
purity of rendering uninfluenced by extraneous sources. Moreover, the
publication of the last two dictionaries, Williams’s and Tregear’s, took
place after my MSS. copy for press, letter “ A” had been sent to the
Government for immediate publication.
Wm. colenso.
January, 1898.




ABBREVIATIONS AND SIGNS.
1.
P. Polynesian generally.
H. Hawaiian, or Sandwich Islands.
S. Samoan, or Navigators’ Islands.
R. Rarotongan, or Cook’s Islands.
T. Tahitian, or Society Islands.
Tng. Tongan, or Friendly Islands.
2.
(1.) Rarawa, or Northernmost.
(2.) Ngapuhi, or Bay of Islands, &c.
(3.) Waikato.
(4.) Rotorua.
(5.) Thames and Bay of Plenty.
LINGUISTIC.
1. Foreign.
Mq. Marquesan, or Marquesas Islands.
F. Fijian, or Fiji Islands.
E. Easter Island.
S.A. South American.
Mr. Malagasy, or Madagascar.
M. Malay.
Home (Maori).
(6.) EasttCape and Poverty Bay.
(7.) Hawke’s^Bay, &c.
(8.) Taranaki, &c.
(9.) Middle Island.
(10.) Chatham Islands.
II. LITERARY.
Poet. Sir G. Grey’s volume of Maori Poetry,
&c., Wellington, 1853.
Myth. Ditto, Polynesian Mythology, &c.,
London, 1854.
Prov. Ditto, Proverbial and Popular Sayings,
Cape Town, 1857.
Bible. If the new edition should be quoted,
then the Book, ch., and v.
III. GRAMMATICAL.
v., verb; p., passive verb; v.n., verbal noun; adv., adverb; part., participle; adj., adjective;
pr., pronoun; s., substantive; &c., &c.
IV. SUNDRY.
Obs. Observation.
Syn. Synonymous.
Fig. Figurative.
Prim. Primary.
Prov. Proverbial.
Eu. European.
Mod. Modern.
Freq. Frequentative.
Intens. Intensitive.
Emph. Emphatic.
Euph. Euphemism.
Proper names of gods, &c., preceded by Te, are classed alphabetically according to the name
without the prefix, which, however, follows.




A
MAORI-ENGLISH LEXICON:
BEING A
COMPREHENSIVE DICTIONARY
OF THE
NEW ZEALAND TONGUE.
A
A, the first letter of the New Zealand :
alphabet. It has two principal sounds:
(1) long, as in the English words, father,
rather; and (2) short, as in the English
words, man, mat. There is also a third i
sound, which may be termed the broad
sound resembling that of the German
a, found in our English monosyllables,
all, wall, salt, when a is pronounced as
azo in lazo. This sound, however, is
much more rare, and obtains in such
words as zvaho, mama, &c. It is, as far
as I know, generally Polynesian, and
confined to such and a few similar
words.
It-is sometimes interchanged for e,
as in kai = kei, hai = hei, taina = teina,
anei = enei, tetahi = tetehi; and some-
times for o, as in mapau==mapou,
takapau = takapou, tatau = tatou, ratau
=ratou.
Grammatically considered, the pro-
per use of this particle (not merely as
a letter, but as a word of deep meaning,
and that whether separate or prefixed)
is of the first importance in the correct
formation of words and sentences. Fh/e
the copious examples here given.
1. It is the termination, or last letter,
of all passive verbs.
2. A, short, is prefixed to the names
of persons, and to many personal pro-
nouns, when not preceded by ko, no,
1
A
mo, and to; and sometimes it is pre-
fixed to the names of things,—always
when personified or bearing a person’s
name, as a canoe, ship, &c.; and to
tribes, lands, stars ; and to names of
months and days :—
Haere koe ki a Hemi noho ai.
Kawea atu tenei ki a Tamati.
Na, a Mea, a Henare, he tangata pai ia;
a Tamati he tangata kino.
Ka rere mai a Tainui, a ka u (Tainui,
name of a canoe).
E tangi ana a Hue ki a ia, ka ripiripia k
toetoea (Hue, a gourd).
“ Ka whakaatu ake i a Kaukaumatua.--
Ka rapua a Kaukaumatua” (Kaukau-
matua, name of a stone earring) —
Myth. p. 78.
Ko te putake tenei i riro mai ai a Manga-
kaliia ki au, ko te huru (Mangakahia,
name of a district).
Kua tae mai o au tuhi, i tuhia e koe i a
Hurae, i a Akuhata, i a Hepetema ano
hoki (modern names of months).
3. A, long, is prefixed to names of
persons, to living things, and to per-
sonal pronouns,—to form the posses-
sive case plural. See O.
Nga kuri a Hoaui. Nga kai a te
poaka.
A maua patu. A ratou kai.
Haere ana ratou ki te whawhai, tenei hapu
tenei hapu o ratou ; i a ratou ano d
ratou pu, d ratou tao, a ratou rakau.
4. A, long, is also prefixed to names
of persons, to living things, and to per-
sonal pronouns, to give the substantive.


A
[2]
A
or verbal noun, following or preceding,
an active meaning.
I kite ano ahau i te patunga d Hoani i
tena kuri.
I pera hoki te ahunga iho d nga kanohi,
me ta te tahae ua hopukia.
Katahi ka patua i te tirohanga mai d nga
tangata.
E kore ahau e neke i te pehanga d te nui,
d te whakahe.
E ta, ka putake te riri d o matou nei
tipuna ki Heretaunga.
I nui te korero d te Hapuku koia ano te
riri d taua tangata !
5. A, long, is also prefixed to all
proper and common names of men and
women, and to pronouns, whenever the
noun immediately preceding is that of
any article of food, or of any implement
or utensil for obtaining and preparing
food, or of any place or thing for storing
food, or of fire and firing for cooking
food, or of any implement of war, to be
used by them. See A, prep., Of.
Ko te pu d Hoani tena.
Se patu d Mea.
Tenei te kete i ngaro d taku hoa.
Te kohua paku d te wahine tenei.
6. A, long, is prefixed to the definite
article immediately preceding the noun
and verbal noun, and also to possessive
pronouns, to give a future meaning.
Meake ano ahau tae atu ki kona d nga ra o
Tihema nei.
Ko a te tau koroi koe kite ai.
Hei d te rerenga o te kaipuke te mate ai.
See A, prep., At the time of.
7. A, long, is also prefixed to proper
and common names of men and women,
and to personal pronouns, to show the
natural relationship downwards.
Te tama d Puhara—Puhara’s own son.
Te tama d Puhara—Puhara’s foster-child ;
domestic lad.
Nga tamariki d Hoani—John’s own child-
ren.
Kahore he uri d tena tangata i toe.
I taona ai Tunui d Takaha ra i.—Poet.
p. 220.
“Ko wai koe?” “Ko au ko Tauhou.”
Ka ui atu ano ia, “Tauhou d wai?”
“ Tauhou d Ira; ” ko ia atu.
8. A, long, is also prefixed to (or
placed before) adverbs of time to give
them a future meaning, as d mua, d
muri; and to adverbs of place, denoting
of the place, as d konei, d kona, d ko, d
reira; and to prepositions of place, as
a runga, d raro, d waho, d roto, for in-
tensification and emphasis; and in a
very few instances to nouns, as d
tangata, d tinana, d uta ; possibly, in
some instances, for euphony :—
Kua mate d roto i au.
Kahore d reira riwai.
Ka taea d waho o te moan a, titiro rawa
ake ahau, kua mamao noa atu d uta.
E noho d tinana tonu ana, te wahine, te
tamariki, te tane.—Myth. p. 152.
Ka hoe matou ka hua e kore d uta e taea
atu.
Penei hoki e rere ana, ahiahi rawa ake ka
taea d uta.
Ka hoe raua ki te moana, a tawhiti noa, ka
ngaro d uta.
Ina hoki, i wehea atu te moana mo nga
ika, i wehea mai d uta mo te tangata.
A, adv. part., When [H.J :
Ano te hari o taua tangata a tana kitenga
i a ratou !
Hei karakia i to ratou waka kia tino tere
ai, a te putanga mai o te hau.
Mau ano e mau mai a to haeretanga mai.
— and then:
Meaake wera i te ahi nga parae e tupuria
ana e te toetoe ; a ka keria he awa wai
hei mea e maroke ai nga wahi e tupuria
ana e te toetoe, a ka whakatokia ano
hoki aua wahi ki nga rakau momona;
a ka ruia ano hoki ki nga tarutaru pai.
Ko tenei koi noho nga iwi, a whakarongo
ki ana patipati.
He whakatakariri noku, mona, i haere tona
ingoa mohio, a tukua anae ia tona kaha
ki raro.
E peka taua nei ki tahaki, a taukinikini, a
taurakuraku.—Poet. p. 172.
— then [H.] :
“ Kua mutu to patai ?” “ Ae.” “;l,maku
tenei patai; A, aha ana koe ?”
— afterward:
Ka ngaro, e kore e ngaro, he paku, a ka
nui.
Patua, a te kakara ki ia wahi.—Old Song.
Engari kua rongo ano, a kia rongo; kua
kite ano, a kia kite.
Tohea ano, a uia hoki.
— namely ; videlicet; that is to say :
Na wai hoki i ki, a hei tango i toku kai-
nga?
E*kore rawa e whakarere, a, ko te whaka-
pono tera o aku tupuna, no reira ka mau
tonu i au.
Na, ko tenei ingoa ko Pourerere, he rakau
na Hikarerepari . . . haere tonu
mai te ingoa a Pourerere.
Ka nui rawa te hohoro ki te whakataka
haere i te hanga whakahara nei, a te
repo (big gun).
Te mahi a te iwi pakeha ki te karo i te
hanga maro nei, a te kohatu.
I kitea hoki e matou tena pa, a Poneke.
He waka tenei maunga a Puketapu.
E ui ana matou, “ He tono pehea ?” “ A,
rapea, kitemea ka turi te tangata.”


A
[3]
A
A, irrep., Of; belonging to [P.J. See
0. (Here it may be observed that
sometimes, in a few instances, a is
synonymous with o, but generally it is
much more distinct, giving another
shade of meaning, and implying a
more close and restricted connection :
this peculiar usage is also Polynesian.)
Confined to—1. Food; 2. Utensils,
implements, &c., used in procuring,
preparing, and cooking food ; 3. Im-
plements of offence; 4. Wives and
offspring; 5. Companies and divisions
of an army; 6. Acts, deeds, words,
thoughts; 7. Passions : of the subject,
following nouns of passion; 8. Ac-
tions of elements ; 9. Actions of living
things, and the active properties of
things.
1. Te kai a te manu. Te kai a tena
tangata. Nga ika a Hoani.
2. Te umu a Mere. Te kete kawe kai a
taua wahine. Te Kupenga a Ngati-
liori.
3. Te pu a Hoani. Te waruhanga a te
mata koi tonu 1 Te maripi koi a
tena tangata. Te huata a Maui. Ko
te takoto koa a te taura raka i raro i
te raorao.
4. Nga tamahine a Hoani.
E hine a te hoa.—Poet. p. 134.
E tama rongonui a to matua.—Poet.
p. 232.
Te wahine a te Hapuku. “ Kowai
koe?” “Ko au ko Tauhou.” Ka ui
atu ano ia, “ Tauhou a wai ?” “ Tau-
hou a Ira;” ko ia atu.
5. Ka takoto te matua a tetahi, a tetahi;
ano te matua a taua tangata I Ka
titiro atu nga tangata o te ope a
Takarangi.
6. He utu kupu nana a te tangata.
Heoi ano te kupu a te hoa aroha a Te
Reremoana.
He noa iho te noho a te tangata ki
reira.
E puranga ana te mahi a te tupapaku.
Aua e tango ki te whakaaro a te tuna,
ki te whakaaro a te kiore, engari ki a
te tangata. Kua tomo te waka i te
mahi a te ika.
Te mahi a te kahuwaero, a te topuni, a
te mawhiti, a te puahi, a te kahu
taniko !
E kauwika ana te kai nei, a te keke, a
te purini, a te rohi, a te ti, a te
poaka, me etahi atu o nga kai reka.
Ka nui haere hoki te mahi a te karakia
Maori.—Myth. p. 128.
7. Me pehea i te kawenga a te pawera-
wera.—Myth. p. 144.
Na te kawenga a te mataku, koia tenei
omanga.
Ka pura tona kanohi, kihai i pura ki te
riringa a riri; a, e he ana tera note-
mea ehara tera i te tikanga a riri.—
Prov. p. 98.
8. Ko te rere a te ua. Te pupuhi a te
hau.
Te mahi a te werawera. Te ngau-
nga a te makariri. Ka pau ra i te
kainga a te ahi!
9. Te mahi a te pu ! Te rere tere a te
manu nei.
Te ngau a te kuri. Te kakati a te
tuiau.
Ako rawa ake ki te mahi a te tin.—
Poet. p. 87.
Kapikapi ana i te mahi a te kara te
rakau iringa kara.
Te kakati a te rongoa.
Te puehu a iwi.
— of, or from ; noting the place :
To mata i haea ki te toroa a tai.—Poet.
p. 69.
Heoi a matou nei, ko a uta ana kai, kaore
matou e kite ana i te kai a tai.
— that of:
Ko a te he korero. Nohea a te ware ona
mea ?
Kahore a te pakeha ona ngenge.
Papaku a ringa, hohonu a korokoro.—
Prov.
— those of, the things of:
Ka mea ratou kia hokona a ratou rakau ki
a nga pakeha.
Taku kupu mo te marama aurei, kei te
pai te takoto a te whenua.
A toku ringa i waiho ai.—Poet. p. 246.
Me he karanga a kai pea e kore e tonoa.—
Prov.
Whakareka a kai, whakareka a moenga.—
Id.
Na, ka he ta ratou mahi, nui atu hoki i a
o ratou matua i mea ai.
— the parts of :
Momona a hiku, momona a tara.
Nau, e ta, e ahu ana i a te tai ki, i nga
motu.
— the people of:
Na te mano kotahi o tera i uta i patua a
te Tumu. Ka puta te rongo o taua ope
ki nga wahi o Taupo, ka hui a Taupo,
he mano nga tangata o Taupo; katahi
ka haere mai ki te riri, haere mai a uta
me te moana.
He pai kau ano ra ki te whakarongo atu a
tawhiti nei. Kahore a reira riwai ?
He hanga whakama hoki ki a mua.
— the sayings of:
Taku kupu, ka tu i au a Meiha.
— the doings of:
He mea nui a tera i mea ai mo matou.
— the fruits of:


A
[4]
A
Ko te tangata e rapu tika ana, mona ano a
te tika: ko te tangata e rapu he ana,
mona ano a te he.
Katahi ano ka pae ki tahataha, ki te
mahue, ki te whakarere ; ka tuluki hold
ki tona tutukitanga a te kuare.
A, prep., Until; till; (time,) to the
time that [H.].
Ka whanga nga matua a ahiahi 110a.
Noho, a to noa te ra. Ko koe ano to
matou hoa, a tae noa ki tenei ra (time
past).
Ka tatau atu te tangata nei i nga ingoa a
poto katoa.—Myth. p. 201.
Ka tiakina e ahau, a ora noa ia.
Na, noho ana ahau ki a ia, a ao noa te ra
(time past).
— in the time of:
He aruhe ta ratou i kai ai, a to ratou
taenga atu.
— to the place that:
Nana ano i haere, a te wai nui ra ano.
Ko te wahi kino rawa tena o taua nga-
here, a tae noa atu ki te putanga.
— unto, even unto :
Haere i aua rohe, a te mareretanga k1
Piako nui.
Ka na te akau mai te huarahi, a Whanga-
roa.
Ka na Tarawera a Rotomahana.
Haere ana ra Hakomiti atu te ara a Pari-
tangi.
Momona ake i taku hiku a taku tonga-
hau.—Old fable, Eel to Codfish.
Arahina ana e ratou he wahi ke ; ka haere
a Maunga Powhatu.
Tahi mai ana i te ihu, a te noko atu ana ;
tahi mai ana i te noko, a te ihu atu ana.
— throughout (future time):
Ka piri tonu ahau ki a koe, a te mutunga
ra ano.
Takoto ana tera, a toru noa nga ra.
A nga takiwa e haere ake nei me tahuri ki
te ahuwhenua hei oranga mo tatou.
Tera koutou e kite i nga tamariki o tenei
kura a enei ra e haere ake nei.
— to [H.] :
Ka mea atu ia, “Haere maia arahina a
te whare ke i roto.
Moe tonu, a ka ao te ra ka hoe a nga pa
ano i nohoia ra ano e Paoa ka u ki uta.
Kia wawe au te kawe a te rae ki Horohoro
e I—Poet. p. 146.
— towards, as in direction to a place
[H.] :
Ka rere na runga i nga liiwi a Torohanga.
— (as to each other):
Engari kia pena ano tana whakarite me
ta te pakeha a ia whakapakeha, na ka
tika.
Pena tonu raua i te po, a, ao noa te ra.
— with:
I kiia, kia poua a rimurimu a maua rakau.
Ho mai kia kai avvau ; me haere a toenga
korua ki to korua kainga.
— by:
(noting the cause, or instrument,)
Mau e korero a mangai atu.
I rongo a korero ahau.
Ka kiia a ngutu atu, ka kiia a ngutu mai.
E haere a waka ana.
Haere a waewae etalii, haere a wakaetahi.
Kia aha hoki te ara a waka ?
Kia aba hoki te ara a tangata ?
(as to barter or sell by,)
Ko te hoko o te whenua i mua, ehara i te
mea utu a eka.
(as by time,)
Ki te tuku a po, na te awa poreterete.—
Poet. p. 227.
(as by land,)
Haere te moana, haere a uta.
(as singly—to call, count,)
He mea karangaranga a ingoa tenei
huinga.
Ko tana tatau he tatau a po.
(as to go by,)
Ka timata ki te Waipuna, ka rere atu a te
huarahi kua oti te ruri i mua, a tae noa
ki te awaawa, ka piki a te Puriri, ka tae
ki te nehenehe.
A, prep., On ; at:
Me haere a waewae atu ahau.
Rere a waewae ana nga morehu !
Ina hoki a te Wenerei ka haere ki tua.
Ko a taua ra koe kite ai.
— at:
Titi tonu te pari o reira, he papa kohatu a
tatahi.
A te tuponotanga ki tetabi wahi pai.
— at the time of (future) :
(1.) Prefixed to adverbial particles, as
amua, amuri, uianei, ako, awhea,
&c.
(2.) A te tau koroi.—Prov.
I te atea a te waru.
Tena pea e ua a te awatea.
Me tiaki e au enei mea mo a te ngahuru.
Ko a te po ratou haere mai ai.
— in : (in the time of; in, denoting the
place :)
Nana ! Whakaaroa ano a to mariretanga.
Tawharu ana a waenganui.
Tapore ana a waenganui o te tahu nei!
A, adv., As; even as; like, like as; in
the same manner as ; according to :
Rere a manu tonu ki te hopu matangohi.—
Old Song.
Ka tupu a rangatira, he mea mohio a nga-
kau tangata.


A
A
Ko aku wheua i paiherea mai, tae a wairua
ki whakarongotaua.— Poet. p. 249.
Me whakapono a tangata ahau ?
Ekore to matou wabi [whenual e hoatu a
kete taewa ki a koe.
Me hoehoe a waka.
Tupu a hue te kai.
E haere a kaka ana te tangata.
Ka ngaro a Moa te iwi nei.—Prov.
I pupuke a wai te roiinata i aku kaino.—
Poet. p. 73.
Ka pakaru a waka e taea te raupine mai?
Ka korero a reo tangata mai taua manu ra
ki a ia.
He ua a nehu.
I korerotia te kupu ki a ratou a ratou hoki
i ahei ai te whakarongo.
Mau tonu e biki te tamaiti nei, homai a
tamaiti ana kei kino; me rahi kei moe
tane ke.
I te po ka nohoia a wharetia, ara ka runa-
ngatia.
Ko nga rangatira i noho i runga i te ata-
mira, ko nga tangata katoa atu i noho a
hapu i tahaki atu.
Notemea kua wbakatangata tana paru o te
wlienua, a kua ora a tangata.
He pou i whakairohia a tangatatia te ahua
bei toliu tuahu.
And, conj., joining sentences, not
words. See Me.
Haere ana matou ki uta, a hoki ana mai
ki Nepia.
Ae, tana tama hoki ; a ko Hoani tona
ingoa.
Haere atu ana tera ki raro, a mate atu ana.
Ko mea ra tona papa, a tokorua ana
wahine.
I wabia iho e ia taua pa, a patua ana nga
tangata.
But; notwithstanding ; yet; how-
ever :
Kia tohe tao ki te hoki; a, e boa, ko ahau
ki mua.
Ka nobo iho kia ao ra ano te ra; a te mea
e ngenge ana raua ka moe.
He nui to matou pouri, ara mo te taba ki
te tinana kia nobo tonu mai; a he nui
te hari o o matou ngakau i haere pai ia.
Tenei te haere nei kia kite ; kua kite ano a
kia kite ; kua rongo ano, a kia rongo.
Kabore he rangatira o tenei whenua, a ko
taku matua anake.
— wherefore : such being the case : very
well: since it is so: (rebus sic stan-
tibus ;)
“ A, tenei to ara.” A, waiho ra.
E ui ana matou, “He tono pehea?” A
rapea, ki te mea ka turi te tangata.
— consequently : therefore :
Kua he noa tona ngakau, a ngau ke anaia.
Mebemea ko te kura te mabi pai, a tena
me mahi tatou i taua mea.
Nau i ki, “Ekore e pai.” A, i mea atu
abau, “ Heoi.”
— and if:
Ahakoa nui te moana, me aha ? engari me
wliakamatau, a mana ka totohu, he
ahakoa; a mana e u, e pai ana.
A, part., with various meanings; as in
the sense of : gone with, swallowed up,
destroyed, eaten (elliptically); singled
or marked out for capture, death, &c.
Ka tokomaha nga tangata a taua awa
(moana, wai, pari, &c.).
He umutao a wahi e.—Poet. p. 105.
Ka whaia nei te kiwi a te kuri ra, mau
rawa atu i roto i te wai.
— meaning the same as; one with;
instead of:
Ko ahau a Ngapuhi, ara no taku matua no
Ripa.
— denoting food (elliptically):
Ma koutou ano a koutou, kia kaha ai te
haere.
Pau ana a nga hoa, katikati tonu a tama.
Kua maha a nga hoa, kaore ano ana.
(Fish.)
— used before the word singled out for
inquiry, comment, &c.;—as, that of :
No konei tenei kupu, he mahi haereere
tonu hoki, koi a a Tourerere.
Koia tena kupu a te putiki, me te ruku--
ruku, e rua hoki nga kupu.
— used sometimes, for the definite
article, te :
Tera ano tera putake mate, tona taunga
kei a katoa kei nga tane kei nga wahine.
— conjoined with names of places,
means named by, or after, the dis-
coverer, &c. :
Roto-a-Kiwa (Kiwa’s Lake); Roto-a-Tara
(Tara’s Lake); Te Matau-a-Maui (Maui’s
Fishhook = Cape Kidnapper’s); Te Atua-
a-Mahuru (Mahuru’s difficult or disagree-
able pass or hateful peak, a culminating
point of Ruahine Range, which I have
several times crossed) ; it was subse-
quently named by the old Maori chiefs
Te Taumata-a-Neho (Colenso’s moun-
tain brow).
— emphatic, intensitive :
Ko a tenei ra ahau puta ai ki a ia.
Ko ahau kua whanau i mua, kuakaumatua
ahau, kua whanau a ia.
Ka mea mai ano raua, “A wai, e ta?”
Ka mea atu ia, “ A Horo ra.”
Kihai hoki i hamumu atu a te wahine ra.
A, intj., of command; silence; stop:
Ara hoki ko taua hunga, “ A ! . kati te
turi turi.”
“ A koutou, e moe nei, e ara ! ”
— of calling attention ; there ! here !
look!


A
[6]
A
Ka kite nga tangata ka karanga, “ A ! he
manu, he manu.”
A! Kohea? Kohea?—Poet. p. 135.
— of surprise, of sudden discovery :
A, tenei!
— intj., of sudden indignation (real or
feigned), or disappointment (but pro-
nounced differently from the last,
broader, graver). [H.]
— of calling to come on ; as we some-
times say, “ Come ! ”
Ka mea te wahine, 11 A, haere iho ki te
whakaruku i a matou.”
— as a significant threat:
Akuanei koe, a ! ’’—(But only from a mas-
ter, superior, &c.)
A, part., used for ka in passionate ex-
clamation :
“ A tae te hoi o tenei taurekareka ! ”
— used for aha (poetical):
Ko te a, e Hura ?
— used for ka (poetical) :
’A roharoha e, aku parirau iti.—Old Song.
See Poetry, 109, 182, 401, &c.
— used for kia (poetical), Poet. p. 272.
— used for Nga (poetical) :
Herea mai e koe i a ’Apuhi taniwha rau-
—Poet. p. 42.
A is omitted in very emphatic narra-
tion, anger, incantations, &c. :
Ka mea nei Ngapuhi.
Ka whakatika ano Ngapuhi.
Ho ! ka kai Tu, ka kai RoDgo, ka kai te
Whakaariki.
A is used in poetry, at the end of a
line, meaning “ Yes, truly so,” followed
by the prolonged i, expressive of deep
regret at the remembrance:
He waka utanga nui taku waka, ko Toro-
haki uaua ko whakamere te ika, a, i.—
Old Song.
A is also used in poetry, chaunts, songs,
&c., as a chorus or refrain—Poet. p. 91.
A, $•» the collar-bone (6):
He a no te kaki. Syn. Paeivae.
— the temples (7) :
Nga a o nga kanohi. [T. the jaw.]
Ka pau te a waiho e koe i te whare.—
Poet. p. 130.
A, adv., Yes : common term of colloquial
assent.
A, or Aa, v. p. -ia : v.n. -inga. [T.]
1. To drive wild animals by a long
reach or sweep, in order to surround
or catch ; to impel; to urge forwards,
as fish into a net or trap in the water;
to drive away ; to drive singly or in a
flock, as domestic animals. [O&s. The
ancient primary meaning of this verb is
nearly lost J
Patua te wai ki te hoe, kia dia ai nga ika
ki roto.
Maku e aa atu nga poaka. See Arahi
E aa ana a Hoani i nga kuri ki waho.
Aia nga manu ra kia rere atu ai.
2. To urge ; to expel; as inhabitants
by the foe :
Kua kore a Ngatihotu i Taupo, kua aia e
te patu a Tuwharetoa.
Nana i aa te tangata ki waho.
3. To drive, to carry away; as smoke,
dust, insects, &c., by the wind. See
Aahaere.
I dia atu e te hau te hanga namu nei.
Aia atu, kia peratia me te paowa alii e dia
ana e te hau.
Te ai he hau ki tenei wahi hei aa atu i te
inati waeroa !
4. To be driven on shore, by the
sea:
Na te tai i d ki uta; a ka haere nga ta-
ngata ki te kohi.
5. As the waves of the sea, by winds.
(Is. lvii. 20.)
6. To be driven away ; as man by
stench, &c.; impelled by fear, &c.:
Haere ana aua pakeha i te aainga a te piro,
no taua kuri mate.
Ka rumaki tonu te pane ki raro ki te hoe i
te aainga hoki a te wehi.
7. To thrust aside; as brambles,
&c.:
Aia atu ena nga tataramoa ki to rakau na.
8. To throw or pitch forward with
both the hands, as shrubs, sticks, sea-
weed, &c. :
Ka tihi ki uta ka dia e te tangata ki uta ;
ko ta te tangata dinga ki uta, ko te
maunga atu ki uta i ta te tai dinga.
9. (Fig.) To be driven away by ill-
treatment, neglect, &c.:
Ka pena mai koe ki au, he aa ano tena
moku.
He d mai i au ki tawhiti mau ai.—Poet.
p. 103.
Ka tu ra a Hurakau, ka hoka i tana patu
me d ki tona uma.—Poet. p. 126.
Tenei tonu hoki enei nga tangata a koutou
e d nei 1 te moni ki te poho.
A, Kai-,s. a driver: one who drives
animals.


Ae
m
Aea
A, or Aa, 5., manner or act of driving,
in order to surround, to impel forward,
or catch; or to drive away, or expel;
or to drive before one :
Ka kino te aa manu a te tamaiti nei.
Ko tau aa poaka tena ?
Aa, part., denoting time; signifying
.the extension, continuation, or dura-
tion of the action or purpose expressed
or implied in the verb which it closely
follows : very much used in narration:
Haere tika tonu atu aa tae noa ki te awa.
Kei konei tonu au e noho ana, aa kia oti
ra ano te taewa ka hoki ai.
Heoti ano, ka whakaaro, “ Me aha ra e mate
ai te iwi nei ?” Na wai aa ka kitea te
whakaaro.—Myth. p. 166.
Ko kino tonu ano ia, aa noho iho, aa wha-
nake.
Me penei ano te whakarite i nga he aa ta-
koto ake nei.
Ka nunui te tai, aa ka tapoko te waka.'
Ka kawe, ka kawe, aa waenganui po noa!
— prep., throughout :
Kia tiakina aa e toru nga ra.
Used in beginning of sentences and
narrations ; meaning, And it came to
pass.
— intj. Used by a party in dragging
canoes, &c. :
Tena, tena, aa! Tena, tena, uawaa!—Pull
away, pull together.
— used in wailing, as over the dead, and
at funerals :
A tenei au e, e tama nei, nei, aa, aa.—
Poet., p. 140.
Ka mate au ki taku tangata, aa.—Poet.
p. 302.
Aai, intj., Used in a charm for expel-
ling a fetus from the womb. (From
verb.) Poet. p. 361.
Aataenoa, adv., Until.
Haere, tika tonu atu, aataenoa ki te awa.
Ps. lvii. 10.
Aatutukinoa, adv., Unto ; until.
Ae, adv., Yes; even so; certainly;
common term of assent, consent, agree-
ment, &c., to an affirmative question.—
Is. xl. 24 ; xli. 26 ; Matt. v. 37 ; Acts
xxii. 27; Jas. v. 12.
Ae, v. p. -tia ; V.n. -TANGA. [H. T.]
To consent, to agree to; to yield to the
request or importunity of another; to
permit; to grant permission ; to allow;
to approve ; to answer affirmatively ;
to say “ Yes ” to a request ;
Ka ae ano a hau ki tena.
E wha nga mea i aetia, e rua nga mea i
kapea.
Ka patai atu a More, “ He pono to kupu? ”
Ka ae mai, “ Ae.”
Kaore i whakaaetia e nga tipuna, heoi ano
te mea i aetia, ko au anake.
Ka rongo te Kai-aru, “ Ae” ana. . . .
“Ae” ana te katoa.—Myth. p. 64. See
Whakaatc.
Ae, s. 1. Consent, agreement, ap-
proval, approbation, permission, allow-
ance :
E pai ana, “ Ae.” He tino Ae tena.
Mea ai te tangata kia Matutaera, “ Ae, he
mana tona.”
E taku hoa, “ Ko wai ranei koe ? kauaka
a hau e hengia, ae, he Hokioi ahau ;
ehara a hau i te Hokioi, hore rawa.”
Ka awangawanga i konei etahi, ka huri-
huri; “ ae ranei, he tika te karakia
tawhito ? he he ranei? ”
— sometimes repeated, showing great
willingness:
“ Tainui e I utaina, hoea; ae, ae, ae, ko-
kiri, whakahoro ki te puna i Pakowhai.”
2. Calm ; calm at sea :
“ Koia kau te pai o te moana, he ae
anake! ”
Ae, ]intj. Eh! indeed! express-
Aeranei,) ing slight surprise or doubt;
sometimes used ironically; a polite
mode of dissent :
“Ehara i a koe ena mokopuna ! ” “Ae?
tena i rere mai i a wai ? ”
Aeanohokira, adv., And because;
and this also:
Aeanohokira ko ia to ratou kai-arahi.
Ae, with ano, adv., Even as; like :
Ko ia hoki i whakaorangia, ae ano he manu
i whakaorangia i te mangai o te kuri.
— with pea, adv., A quiet, easy, polite
way of assenting, when full belief or
acquiescence is withheld :
Ae pea.
Aea, v- 1. To rise up out of water, as
a shag, &c. :
Ka ruku ka aea.
2. To emerge, to be raised, as land
from the sea:
“ Ka taia te matau a Tonganui, . . . ka
aea te whenua nui, ka aea.” — Old
Legend.
3. To assent to :
I aea ano ki tena.
Aea e tama ki’ noho mai koe.—Poet,
p. 323.


Aei
[8]
Aha
— with ailO, Even as, or like :
Aea ano he pari taua puke.
Aea ano he manu e rere.—Poet. p. 35.
Aea ano ra, i ako ai ki te mahi.—Poet. p.
403.
Ko wai te tangata? Aea ano koe.—Poet.
p. 34.
Aea, adv., Verily ; truly :
Aea, e te iwi, ka tu au i te tapu.—Poet. p.
206.
He whakaaro nona, Aea, ka whai tupato
marie ia.
— much as Why? emphatically, with
negative following:
Aea, noho marie raua, kia kotahi tonu
to tatou haeretanga.
Aea, td kite hold koe.
Aea, td whakaaro koe, kua timata te mahi
ka tohe tonu.
Aea, intj., expressive of regret at
something done or said that had better
not have happened; or at something
omitted that had better been done.
Aea! atahaere marie ahau i runga i te
huanui!
Aea ! te kite hoki koe.
Aeaaea,) v., to pant for breath; to be
Aeaea, J exhausted, breathless; [T.J
generally used with causative parti-
ciple, whaka. See Poet. p. 314. See
WHAKA AEAAEA.
Aeaoiarangi (Poet. p. 121), a Wai-
kato w7ord, or phrase.
Aeha, intj. 1- Of wonder :
“ Katahi ka rere taua autaia nei. Aeha !
me te aha ? me te uira !”
Te taenga atu ki Waikato, aeha ! he hapai
ra i te patu.
2. Of acknowledgment :
Ko te aeha ki te Kuini kua oti tena ; ka
tika koia ano tena.
3. Of gladness at requital: Serve
him right! Served out!
“ Ina te tikanga ki te Maori o tenei kupu,
‘ Aeha,' he whakakaitoa, he miharo.”
4. Of surprise, with vexation :
“ Te taenga atu, Aeha! He aha i penei-
tia ai ?”
Aei, intj. Of anger, disappointment,
&c. :*
“ Ko te tai, ko te ata, mahue iho aei."—
Old song.
“’Oatu koe i mua ra; hei muri aei au,
hul”
♦ “Kupu riri ki to matou i eo i mua; ktipu iita o
m^a niho, ii." (Rotoiua in lit.)
Aeiana, adv., a term of assent to
something said, or done.
“ Heoi, kua kite koe i nga korero o taku
nei pukapuka aeiana."
Aera, adv., a strong assent in support
of, or reply to, something said.
Aera, ehoa, ka tika tau kupu.
Aewa, 5., sudden giddiness on rising
up ; rambling, wandering in speech.
“ He takarangi, he awhio, ina tu ki runga
te tangata.”
“ Maru i te aeiva."
Aetanga, the act or time of saying
Ae = Yes ; of consent, agreement, &c.
Z\Ee kii ake ahau, “ Ae ” ; otira he aetanga
kautanga ake na toku ngakau.
Aha, pron., inter. [H. T.; S. R. aa.},
much used in asking questions; takes
both definite and indefinite articles.
1. What?
He aha tau korero ?
He aha ia ? = What else ?
He aha tana ki konei ?
2. (a.) What sort or kind, meaning,
or matter:
He tangata aha koe ?
He aha ma wai tau mea ?
He rakau aha tena ?
He mahi aha tana mahi?
He pukapuka aha tena pukapuka ? (as to
contents.)
(b.) Also, as a further inquiry, seek-
ing clearer definition of a person, as :
Ko Tamati aha ? (much like, which.)
3. Often elliptically :
Me &7ia? = Who cares ? or, What of that?
Ahakoa nui te moana, me aha ? Engari,
me whakamatau.—Myth. p. 164.
Hei matua-tane aha ? hei matua-wahine
aha ?—Id. p. 13.
4. Denoting cause : through, or by :
Na te aha ranei ?
— to what purpose ? good, benefit, ad-
vantage :
I taia to moko ki te aha?—Prov.
Mo te aha ? Ki te aha ? Hei aha ?
Hei aha mau enei kupu ?
He aha ma wai tau mea ?
Kia mohio hoki te wahine ki te aha ?
— consequence :
Hei aha te aha ? hei aha te aha ?—Of what
account is anything else ?
Me i noho ko te aha ? ko te haere tonu ko
te pikau !
Amuri kia mau ki te whakapono ki te
arolia ; hei aha te aha, hei aha te aha ?


Aha
[9]
Ahae
— time:
A, kihai i aha ka haere atu ahau.
Ekore e aha kua kore ! (As we say, “In
no time.”)—Ps. xciv. 17; Luke xiii. 13.
Heoi ano, kihai i aha kua u matou.
5. Absolutely :
Aha? Katahi ra.—Poet. p. 172.
Aha? Mouti, mouti, &c.—Id. p. 175.
Aha? Kei taku ate e hahae nei.—Id. p.
419.
6. Why?
He aha koutou te haere ai ?
He aha a hau e riri ai ?
He aha koia, he aha?—Why, indeed,
what’s the matter?—Is. i. 5; Nehcm.
vi. 3; 2 Chron. xxv. 16.
7. How (sometimes, equivalent to) :
E taea hoki te aha?—How should it be
otherwise ?
Aha, 5., anything, any kind, description,
sort.
No hea hoki te whai aha ?—Prov.
Na wai hoki te whai aha?—Id.
Ko wai te aha i a ia ? (A common term of
defiance.)
Heoi ra, ekore au e aha wawe.
Nga whare-kura hei ako mo nga tangata
Maori, kia moliio ai ki nga ritenga mo te
aha, mo te aha.
— used in the plural, meaning particu-
lars, details, all manner of things : fre-
quently closely followed by noct, as an
intensitive, and further by atu.
I tino ui mai taua tangata ki a matou aha
noa.
Ona aha atu = some other things. (Lit.,
His, her, or its other things.)
Nana! tena e pakia koe, he ngenge, he
mamae, he pouri, he mate, a he aha noa
atu.
— sometimes repeated, twice, thrice :
denoting totality.
Korerotia katoatia mai ra, ko nga aha, ko
nga aha.
Tena ano pea te roanga atu ona aha, ona
aha.
Nga kai o wliea whenua mana anake te
aha te aha.—Myth. p. 145.
Kahore hoki he wahi i mahue me he aha
me he aha.
Tou whenua, aha, aha, ina taku toa na.—
Poet. 411; 2 Kings xxv. 15 ; Jer. lii. 19;
John v. 4, 31.
— meaning nothing whatever, with
negative preceding:
Kaua koe e aha !
Kahore he aha i riro mai i a matou.
T6 ai he aha hei whakaohooho mai.— Myth.
p. 117.
Kore rawa atu, kore he riri, kore he aha.
Kahore nei hoki ona aha.
Aha, V. p. -TIA ; V.n. -TANGA. [H.] To
do, or to be doing,—what, or anything ;
to be, or become, what; to say what,
or anything; to suffer what; to what
purpose:
Kia hiahia noho korua ki konei ki te aha ?
Kia haere a hau ki te aha ?
Kia aha he mahi maku ?
E aha ana koe i konei ?
E aha ana nga kai-mahi ?
Kihai hoki i aha atu te nuinga.—Myth. p.
182.
Ma til tera ka aha ai ?
Ka patukituki, ano e aha ana ranei.
Ho mai te korero e aha mai nei.—Poet. p.
256.
Kia aha, ka aha ? Heoi, ka aha ?
I aha tenei iwi ki a koe ?
Mana e korero ki a koe, ka aha ranei, ka
aha ranei, te tamaiti nei.
I ahatia koutou e ia ?
Kia ahatia hoki ?
Hoki mai ano koe ki a hau, a e kore koe e
ahatia.
Me i ahatia koe i pakaru mai ai?—Poet.
p. 237.
Aha, ) s., a sharp cutting instrument
Ahaha,) or saw made of sharks’ teeth
(tatere), firmly fixed laterally into a pre-
pared piece of wood, formerly used by
Maoris in cutting off a large shark’s
head (Mako) when hooked at sea and
bj ought alongside their canoe ; also, in
cutting up whales, human flesh, &c.,
and taken by them to battle.
“ Whatoro tonu te ringa ki te ahaha hei
tapahi, kua motu.”
Aha, or Ahaa, intj., of triumph:
“ Caught at last!”
Ka whakatotoria ake e te wheke, ka mau
tonu i nga niao o te waka; ahaa 1 mau
kita.
Ahaaha, 5., all things; everything be-
sides not mentioned or alluded to.
“ Nga mea katoa ki roto ki tenei kupu»
ahaaha.”
Kawautia, ko ahaaha te riri.—Old charm.
Ahaaka, adj-, bpen, bent in a large
curve (applied to the bend of a fish-
hook).
Ahaere, f-, to drive along the ground ;
to urge forward; to impel, the object
driven moving.
— to drive before one, as a flock of
sheep, &c. (Mod.)
Ko etahi kua riro ki te dhaere i nga liipi ;
ko etahi ki te dhaere i nga okiha.


Ahata
[10]
Ahau
— to impel, to blow along, as dry sea-
weeds on sandy beaches, light sub-
stances on the roads, &c., by the
wTinds.
Ahaere, adj., driving; urging; impel-
ling.
He hau dhaere tenei.
Ahaere, Kai-, 5., a driver of sheep,
oxen, geese, &c.
Tenei te kai-ahaere bipi, me ana kuri e rua.
Ah ah a, intj., exultation; reproach.
E takakau ana ei, ka hau te tai i, ahaha!
“ — a, a, a, i ahahaI (Haka, song.)
A, ka kokiri lioki te kaheru, e kanga lioki
au ki a Manihi, ahaha !
Ahakoa, conj., although, yet, notwith-
standing, nevertheless, howbeit, how-
ever, though; sometimes used with
indefinite article as a kind of substan-
tive.
Ka whati katoa nga matua a nga tuakana,
ahakoa kotalii mano.—Myth, p. 101.
A, mana ka totohu he ahakoa; a, mana
e u e pai ana.—Id. p. 164.
— whether:
Ko nga ingoa tonu ena o nga kete, ahakoa
korari, ahakoa nikau, ahakoa kiekie.
Ahakoa haere, ahakoa nolio.—Ex. xix. 3;
2 Sam. xiii. 22; 2 Chron. xiv. 11.
— either; as a distributive,—either this
or that:
Ahakoa ko tenei, ahakoa ko tena, e pai ana.
— if:
Ahakoa takiri noa ia, kia ahatia atu ?—“ If
he should act defiantly,” &c.
Ahakoia, interrog., What is it? to or
for what purpose ? why ? (Perhaps
better separate, Aha koia ?)
Ahaku. pron., pl. poss., My, mine.
(6, 7.)
“E hine, ahaku.” (Sometimes as an in-
tensitive to a single person or thing.)
Ahanoa, 5., fruitless attempt, &c.,—all
other things besides.
Ahanoa, -TIA; v.n. -tanga, to use,
ill-use ; to neglect; to waste; to be
neglected.
Kua ahanoatia e koe ?—What hast thou
done with (it) ?
He pai nga tukunga iho o tenei tau, he
kino ranei ? kua whakatupuria nuitia
ana hua, kua ahanoatia ranei ?
Ahatanga, «•> what thing, event, sub-
ject, &c.; doings, sayings.
He ahatanga ta taua, e te tangata nei ?
Koia ia te ahatanga ?
Ka po, ka ao, i te ahatanga i te kimihanga.
—Poet. p. 107.
Ho atu rawa ana riri, td ngaueue to aha,
hei ahatanga ma Tu.—Myth. p. 6.
Hei ahatanga ma taua taniwha?—Id. p.
110.
Ko konei te tangata ata whakaaro marie
ai ki tana ahatanga.
— denoting any manner of hurt:
Tatou ka haere kia kitea tona ahatanga.
Kihai i kitea tetahi ahatanga ki a ia.—
Dan. vi. 23.
— denoting (with negative) sitting at
ease, idle, doing nothing; indifference,
no part in any matter; often used for
tranquillity, peace, quiet.
Hore he ahatanga!
Kahore he ahatanga atu ki era nga kino.
Kahore aku ahatanga inaianei.
Kahore a matou nei ahatanga atu ki nga
ritenga kohuru a Ngatiawa.
Ko taku tenei i titiro ai, hore he ahatanga
o te kainga ra i tona haerenga ai, hore
he aha.
Ehara i te pakeha te take o tenei he,
kahore a te pakeha ahatanga.
Kahore he ahatanga ma ratou ki nga hoia
i muri.
Na, ka riri atu ahau, kihai rawa tera i
ahatanga i taku riri.
Ahau, pron., 1st p. sing. [S. a’u]. 1.
I, myself, me. Frequently abbreviated
in conversation, &c., to aau by dropping
the h; also to au, which is that of the
other Polynesian dialects. See Au,
Aw AU.
Ho mai ki ahau.
Ahau ra, ahau ra, tikina mai!
Na wai i mea ma Taupuhi ahazi e kau-
whau? he mohio nei hoki ahau ki toku
tupuna ake ano.
2. Myself and party, army, tribe.
Ka tupu te he i waenga i ahau, ma te ture
e kimi.
Ehara ahau nga tangata o te upoko o te
motu nei i te tangata kino.
Ka whakaekea e ahau te pa nui, kihai i
taro kua horo.
Ahau, pron., poss., 2nd p. plural, thy,
thine; of thee (6, 7). Syn. Au.
Ahau, See noun.
Ko te huarahi e ahau mai ana i Whanga-
nui. (Perhaps for ^47iu.)
Ahau, s. A temporary breakwind or
screen in a food cultivation :
“ He takitaki te ahau, he mea mahi na te
tangata ki nga paenga mara, hai arai atu
mo te hau kai kino te tupu o te kumara,
o te taro, o te uhi.”
Ko te ahau o te mara kai.


Ahei
[11]
Ahi
Ahauokai, s., proper name.
“ Kia hohoro te tahu, keiwha puta Ahauo-
kai.”— Prov. (More properly Hauolcai,
which see.)
Ahauru, s., a mild, genial night
breeze.
“ He hau i te po he hau whakatupu kai; he
mauru ki etahi reo; he ahauru ki
etahi.”
Ahawere.
“ Ahawere atu ana te panga, te pana, te
pei atu, te whiu atu.”
Ahe, to signify, mean, express;
bespeak, indicate, devote.
“ He kupu taunaha tenei kia mate rawa
te hoariri.”
Ahe, aclv. [H.J, Yes. (Peculiar form.
vide examples.)
Na, kua riro i tenei te tautohe he tika ;
“ ko tau te mea tika?”. “ Ae.” “ Ahe,
ahe.”
“ Ahe taua, ahe taua, kei whea? Kei
moe nui kei moe roa kei nga moe-
rangi.”— Old song. (But possibly should
be written, A, he taua /)
Ahea, adv. [H. T. ; afe, Tng.J, when
(future); at what future time ; when-
ever.
Ahea ia tae mai ai ?
Ahea koe haere atu ai ki tena wahi ?
Ka kapi te whenua ahea ahea i te kai ?
Aheahea, s., 1- Term used for a
vanishing rainbow (probably from
Maheahea, which see).
“ Na, ko’ Kahukura ” ( = Rainbow) “ e ti-
whanaana i te rangi, ka mdheahea; tena,
katahi ano ka wbakarere te whatu,
anana ! kaore i taro kua mao.”
Also; for the finer particles of dust
raised high by the wind and shining m
the sunbeams.
“ Tutu ana te puehu, rere ana te kanapa ki
te rangi I he aheahea tenei.”
2. Name of an inferior god.
3. Deafness. (2.)
Aheatanga, «•> the time when,—re-
ferring to future time spoken of.
“ Tona dheatanga; tona peheatanga.”
Ahei, P- -Ha, to be able; to have
it in one’s power or capacity; to can :
often contracted to Hei, which see.
(This word is more properly applicable
in the moral than in the physical sense
of ability, for which taea should be
used.)
Kaore au e ahei ki te hoatu, kai riria ahau.
“ Ekore koe e ahei ?” “ E ahei ano i au ”
—I can do it.
Engari kaliore ahau e ahei.
Mo te whai rawa ake i a tatou ekore e ahei.
Kua oti te whakarite kia ahei te puru i te
taonga, kia kaua e utaina.
Ekore e ahei kia mau tonu nga waewae o
te Uriroroi ki runga ake o Kawanui.
— in the passive (though seldom used),
to be allowed ; to be tolerated; to be
permitted:
E boa, ki te aheitia e koe tenei reta mo te
“ Waka Maori,” utaina atu.
Ko tenei tu mahi ekore e aheitia.
Engari e aheitia ano enei i mahia.
Ahei, adj., able; possible; capable;
competent.
Ahei, 5., 1. The collar-bone.
“ Ka werobia a Te Purewa, tu tonu ki te
ahei.”
2. A snare for taking birds.—(Syn,
Mahanga, Tahere.)
Aheia, adv., truly; even so.
He haka na te Maori, ara he mutunga
haka, “ Aheia, a.”
Aheiha, adv., just so; verily, it is so,
or done.
He whakaaetanga atu, “ Ka pai na: e ki
na koe, ‘ Kaore e taea, e koe ’: ana ! ka
taea ha!” a, he wa ano ka mea iho,
“ Aheiha!”
Aheihei, s., the rainbow. (Also, Syn.
for aheahea.) Syn. Aniwaniwa.
Ahere, s. [H.], a snare for catching
birds, rats, pigs, &c.—(Amos iii. 5.)
Ahere, Kai-, s., a bird-snarer, fowler.
—(Hos. ix. 8.)
Aherekuri, s., a snare for taking the
ancient Maori dog.
Aheu, 5., a changeable wind from the
south-west. Syn. Kotieu.
Aheu, v. p. -k. To put away, throw
back, or turn aside the long leaves of
sedges, cutting-grasses, &c., obstructing
the pathway.
Aheua ake nga maheu e hinga mai na, ko te
ara tena.
Ahi, [H. T. ; R. ai', S. Tng. afi].
1. Fire.
2. Artificial firelight; lamp, torch,
candle (general name) :
Homai, e hine, te ahi kia piua ko te rama
iti.—Poet. p. 403.
Ka tahuna te ahi hei rama ma ratou.—
Myth. p. 180.


Ahia
[12]
Ahima
3. Firearms :
Kei peliia koe te ahi a te tupua.—Poet. p.
197.
A rangia koe te ahi a te tupua.—Id. p. 346.
Tenei, e hine, ko te ahi na te atua.—Id. p.
212.
4. [T.J. A gun-flint.
•5. The collar-bone.
6. (Fig.) Anger.
Ka toro ra i te whenua te ahi a te wahine
maru kore.—Poet. p. 412.
Kei whea Mohopoto, a Te Tatu, nga tanga-
ta tinetinei ahi ki nga whenua?—Id. p.
429.
Ahi, adj., fiery; producing or causing
fire, (Deitt. xxxiii. 2 ; Dan. vii. 9.)
Ahi, v. [T.] v.n. -nga, to beget; to
copulate (ancient term). See Ai.
Ahi, 5., copulation.
Ahiahi, 5. [H. T. ; 'R.aiai; S. afiafi.]
Early evening. Syn. Aiai. (6.)
— another meaning of this word is, I
think, to be found in old spells and
charms, e.g.—
“ Ka tui tenei ahiahi, ko te ahiahi o tenei
puke, ko te ahialii o enei nga atua.”—
Myth. p. 85.
“ Kuparu ki tonganui te ahiahi, ka moe te
tu i a te ahiahi.”—Part of Maui’s spell
_ in Kumara plantation.
Ahiahi, aclj., pertaining to evening.
Te kupenga whakapae ahiahi o Tiere.
He mahi ahiahi te ta ta kupenga.
He mahi ahiahi tenei. Karakia ahiahi.
Ahiahi, v.n. -tanga, to be late in
the day ; to be evening. ,
Ta te mate kai hanga, ka ahiahi te ra i te
nohoanga.—Poet. p. 310.
Taku taokete, tau marire ake i kona, kua
ahiahi.—Myth. p. 92.
Ka ahiahi te ra, a ekore matou e hei te mea
kia haere toriu akuanei.
Ahiahipa, s., nearly sunset.
“ No te ahiahipa ka tu te tiima ki te
waapu.”—Meiha Rapata in lit.
Ahiahipouri, s., twilight.
“ He pekapeka; ko te ahiahipouri ka rerere
tenei manu.”
Ahiahitanga, s., time of evening.
I haere nei i te ahiahitanga o te ra, ki te
rapu kai mana.
Kia tangi atu au i te ahiahitanga.—Poet.
p. 252.
Ahiaruhe, s., a fire made on the spot
where fern-root is first dug, for testing
its qualities.
Ahiateao, s-, a term for a cooking-
fire.
E peka mai ki te kainga nei, kia maoka te
ahi puwha a te ao.
Ahiatua, a burn. Syn. JFcra.
Kia tineia, mate te ahiatua i Hawaiki.—
Poet. p. 430. (Part of a charm for a
burn.)
Ahihuhu, s., fire by friction of matches.
Ahiinaina, s., a fire for warming one’s
self by.
Ahikaea, $-> name of first month of
spring (September).
“ Ka timata te kai a te ahi i nga tarutaru ;
ka timata hold te mahi a te tangata.”
Ahikai, $•, a common fire for cooking
purposes.
AhikaiataJs., a fire made unusually
Ahikaiota, J early in the morning for
cooking—in hurry or haste; hence the
second word means (literally) the fire
of (or for) raw food—i.e., after all pre-
paration, eaten raw through hurry.
Ahikeke, v., a fire for roasting, or
broiling, hctlceke; a large fungus (agari-
cin!), growing on trees, logs, &c. :
“ Ka tunua ano te hakeke ki te ahi, ka
kinakitia ano ki ana kai.”
Ahiki, S., footstep. (2.)
Ahiki, . \v. p. -tia; v.n. -tanga.,
Ahikihiki,) To make haste.
Ahikouka, s., a fire for roasting the
blanched bases of young leaves of the
Tii, Cabbage-tree (Cordyline austra-
lis) .
Ahikuku, s., a fire made on the beach
for roasting mussels.
Ahimana, 15
Ahimano,)
a sacred fire.
Ahimanuka, s., a fire made of ma-
nuka (Leptospermum scoparium) for
ceremonial purposes at the beginning
of harvesting crops—sweet potatoes :
“ Ko tenei ahi e whakapakia ai te kiri o te
kumara ki te ahi ina tae ki te ngahuru,
kia oti re pena, katahi ano ka pa te
kumara ki nga ahi katoa, ka kai hold te
tini o te tangata. He mahi no nga
ritenga Maori o mua.”
To kiri piataata kia whakapokia ki te ahi-
manuka i ! ”—Poet. p. 401.
AhimangO, s., a fire made for broiling
dried shark at time of harvest.


Ahira
[13]
Ahita
Ahimaru, s., name of second month of
spring (October) :
“ Ko Ahimaru te marama e tu al te tini o
te tangata ki te mahi.’’
Ahine, s., contraction (poetical) for
wahine.
Ahine, adv., to-day. Syn. Aland.
Ahinui, -$• 1- Name for third spring
month (November) :
“ Ko Noema te marama ka tino whakapaua
te purapura ki te whenua.”
Ka rere nga purapura i te ngawhatanga
(Kowhai) tae noa atu ki te ahinui.
2. A public cooking-place in a village.
Ahipaipa, 5., fire for tobacco-pipes.
(Zlfod.)
Ahipao, s. 1. Fire obtained by flint
and steel. 2. A tinder-box.
Ahipatiki, fires, or torches, by
night, used in spearing flounders,
plaice, &c.
Ahipaua, s., fire made for roasting
sea-ears (Haliotis iris).
Ahipinonohua, 5. 1. A very small
fire.
2. A term given to a fire made for
cooking, and a lazy fellow, or loafer,
comes up :
“ Mo te tangata mangere, kia ka te ahi kai
a nga tangata mahi, ka tae ki reira
pinono ai.”
Ahipora, s., a large earth cooking-
oven.
“He umu, hanginui te ahipora.”
Ahipora liau o Hineteiwaiwa.
Ahipukahu, s. 1. Fire burning and
smouldering in peaty beds, old dried
bogs, &c.
2. A name for a large cooking-fire,
when provisions to be cooked are few
or little.
Ko te ahi i nui, ko nga kai i iti noa iho
Moumou tahu noa i te ahi i kona ptbkaku
ai, kaore he taewa i mauria mai ki talia
o te ahi.
Ahirar a, s., a clear fire made under a
slender stage of small rods, to gradually
dry fresh-water fish—tuna (eels), ina-
nga (white-bait), &c.—for keeping.
Ahiranginga, 5., a fire carefully made
for the curing and drying of tattooed
human heads.
Upoko tangata, pakipakitanga, kia maro
ai.
Ahiri, v.
Ahiria ana i te tangihanga.
Ahiri taonga, wahine, waka, kahu, ranei.
Ahirore,
“ Ka hoatu ana kumara ana taro, ana uhi
ranei ki runga ki te ahi, ka haere atu
ano te rakau ki te rore kia pai ai te maoa-
tanga.”
Ahirorekiore, s., a fire to snare or
trap rats. (2.)
Ahitahi, 5., a single fire only ; a term
sometimes used in derision.
Kotalii tonu te ahikai ? Kaore te hanga
nei e ora.
He ahitahi hoki ; kia rahi nga kai kia ora
ai.
Ahitahu, 1 s., fires made pur-
Ahitahutahu, J posely in several
places to burn up fern, rushes, and
other weeds.
Ahitakeke, S., a clear fire to broil
takeke (guardfish).
Ahitakekekupenga, a fire by
which the Maoris formerly made their
peculiar nets to take guardfish. (2.)
Ahitapii, s. See Ahitapu.
“ He umu te tapii, he mea tahu i nga
kohatu ki te alii, tauuhiuhia ki te wai;
ko ia te ahitapii.”
Ahitapu, s., a sacred, hallowed fire.
Ahitaua, 5. 1. A fire made by a war
party.
2. Name of a certain karakia, or
spell.
Ahitawa, «•> a fire made by a hungry
travelling party in the woods for cook-
ing tawa berries :
He tawa te kai a te ope ka taha nei, ina
hoki he ahitawa tenei.
Anana ! he ahitaioa ki uta, he kumu tara-
kihi ki te moana ; te tere o ona ngutu ki
te korero !
Ahitangata, s., a fire purposely made
for sitting by, &c., but not for cooking
or common purposes.
Ahitangutu, S«, a charcoal fire for
tattooing lips, chin, &c.
“ He mea aki nui tonu i nga wahieki runga
ki te ahi, ko ia te ahitdngutu."
Tikina, e hika, ki te ahitdngutiL hei rangi-
rangi ake mo tenei hanga e raraku puku
nei.—Old Song^


Aho
[14]
Ahote
Ahitere, 5., name for a person causing
discord ; also, for a woman.
He mokai ahitere koe !
He wahine ahitere.—Prov. p. 29. (Lit.
A quickly wandering fire.)
Ahiterenga,
Ahitieke,
“ Ko nga manu tera i whiua tuatahitia e
Maui ki runga ahi; lie tieke te tahi, he
tihewera tetahi.”
Ahitoro, s- 1. A fire creeping along
on the ground, consuming as it goes.
2. (Fig.) Inflamed desires.
Kaore te whakama, kei te ahitoro au, e tahu
ana.—Poet. p. 202.
Ahitumatangarera, 5., a term for a
large fire.
Ahituna, s., a fire made by night to
attract eels.
Ahitunumanawa, s., a tabooed or
sacred fire, made with ceremonies, for
roasting the heart of a person killed.
Ko te ahitunumanawa tena ka tuhi ki te
rangi.—Poet. p. 388.
(See “ Transactions N.Z. Institute,” vol.
xiv. pp. 7 and 16, for two instances, fully
related.)
Ahiwahiwa, v. p. -tia, to cut or chop
up into small pieces. Also, Ahikahi-
wahiwa.
Ahiwahiwatia, kaua e whakamakeretia;
tapatapahia kia takarepa rawa.
Tapahia mai taua wahi ra, ahiioahiwatia
ra, kotikotia.
“Ko nga mea nunui o nga taro, o nga
kumara, wawawahia: ki tetahi reo ke,
ahiwahiwa.”
Ahinga, s., act, time, place, &c., of
copulating; copulation. Syn. Ainga.
(Word almost obsolete.)
Ahingatapu, same as preceding,
but with ceremonial observances.
Aho,[H. T.; S. Tng. afo.] 1. String,
cord,' fishing - line, kite - string; but
always manufactured of dressed fibre.
2. The cross-threads of the finer
Maori dress-mats. [N.B.—The warp
was always made of a different variety
of flax (Phormiuvi) from that of the
woof.]
Ko te tapoto hei aho tena hei whatu, ko te
waranui hei wenu.
He whitau pai, he aho wliatunga.
3. Cords of various kinds, used in
the manufacture of ropes, as: Tawai
(two strands), whiripapa (3), whiripitkit
(4), rauru (6); tu, bound round again,
as a violin-string.
4. Genealogical direct descent of
chiefs.
Hapainga te aho o to tupuna tamawahine,
i ariki ai ki te taniwha.—Poet. p. 413.
See Ahoariki.
Aho, v., v.n. -nga. [Tng., day.], to be
clear, bright moonlight.
Te putanga ake ano i te pae, kua aho noa
te marama. See Ahoaho.
Ahoaho, v., v.n. -NGA [Tng.], to be
bright, shining, as the moon.
Ahoaho ana te marama o te ahiahi nei; na
te haeata ra hoki.
“ Te ngaro mai te atarau i te ahoaho o toku
whare.”— Song.
Ahoaho ana te ahi ahi nei.
Ahoahooterangi,) s., brightness,
Ahooterangi, I clearness of sky
at evening.
Koia kau te ahoahooterangi nei !
Ahoariki, s., genealogical descent of
highest chiefs.
Ekore koe e tau hei whai ake mo te taki
ahoariki.—Poet. p. 412.
Ahohi, \
. )• s., fishing-line.
Ahohmgohi, f s
Ahoika, )
Ahokira, adv., Yes.
Ahonui, s., a strong, stout fishing-line,
made purposely for taking the fierce
shark ztruroa; sometimes called Aho-
ururoa.
Ahore, adv., not; no. (Contraction
of Kahore, which see.)
Ahoroa, S., 1. Deep-sea fishing-line.
“ Mo te moan a hohonu tonu tenei ahoroa.”
2. Clear, bright moonlight.
Ahotea, s., 1. A very white kind of
cord, made and kept for particular
purposes.
“ He aho koma tenei tu aho, ehara i te aho
tuku ki te paruparu.”
2. An edible tuber, formerly culti-
vated.
“ He uhi te ahotea, penei ano i te kumara
te ahua: ki etahi reo, he uhitea”


Ahu
[15]
Ahua
3. A name for a forest tree, Phyllo-
cladus trichomanoides. Syn. Tane-
kaha.
4. The enlightenment, knowledge,
or deep thoughts of the mind. (2.)
Te ahotea o te ngakau.
“ To ratou manawapanui me te ahotea o
te ngakau mo te maumau o tenei
wahine.”
[N.B.—This word in Tongan means
morning light: note the connexion.]
Ahonga, 5., brightness, clearness; as
of moonlight.
Ahotoro, first, or trial, line let
down in deep-sea fishing, to ascertain
state of currents below. See Aupou-
aru.
Ahotu, s., the moon when seven nights
old.
Ahu, v. p. -a. v.n. -nga, to move on,
to proceed, to pass from one place to
another ; to lead to ; to tend towards ;
to be in the direction of; to be in
motion to, or from (with its proper ‘
directive particles : see examples) ; to
direct or address words.
E ahu atu ana te kaipuke.
E ahu ki te tonga.—Poet. p. 203.
Ahua mai ai te korero ki te tau.—Id. p.
369.
I ahu mai tena manu i hea ?
Ko nga ture kino me hinga ena; ko nga
ture ano e ahu mai ana ki te whakaora
i a tatou me tu ena.
Ka ahiL atu te haere ki te tatau o te pa.
Kua ahu mai aku whakaaro ki te kainga.
Ka kite atu hoki i nga mano o Ngatoro e
putu mai ana i te one, te ahu ki nga
tuahu, ahu ke ki nga mano ra.
Ko etahi o nga awa tuawhenua ake i te ru,
ahu ke atu ana te wai he takere ke.
Ka rere ki roto ahu, ka rere ki mua ahu.- —
(Ancient charm.)—Poet. p. 422; Myth.
p. 86.
Ahu atu, ahu mai.—To and fro.
Ahu iho, ahu ake.—Up and down.
Ahu iho, ahu ake, me te ngaru moana.—
Up and down, like the waves of the sea.
—Prov.
Ahua ake.—Turn (it) up. Ahua iho.—
Turn (it) down.
Ahua atu.—Turn (it) that way (from).
Ahua mai.—Turn (it) this way (towards,
hither).
Ahu, adj., leading, tending, direct;
towards.
Ahu, v. p. -a, -ria; v.n. -ranga.
1. To hoe or dibble ; to loosen and
heap up the soil about the stems of
cultivated edible plants, as kumara
(sweet potatoes), potatoes, maize, &c.
— to mould earth with the hands in
forming kumara hillocks.
Kei te ahu a Noa i ana taewa.
He mea e tupu noa ana, ehara i te mea
ahu, te mahi tupuke ranei, me te riwai.
2. To make little hillocks of earth,
sand, &c., by the priest for ceremonial
observances.
“ He mea ahu ano nga onepu e nga ringa-
ringa o te tohunga.”—Poet. p. lxxxiii.
3. To be collected or assembled to-
gether : {a) as a party or body of work-
men ; (6) as edible roots in the harvest
season; [H.] (c) as words, &c.
Mo to ratou ahu nui ki te hanga i te waka.
Waiho ki nga nui mana e ahu mai te kura
a Maui.—Fruits of cultivation, kumara.
Ahua te papa i Kuratau.—Poet. p. 276.
Kia ahuria o iwi Matariki e te rau e pae.—
Id. p. 22.
Na te ngutu i ahu kia puranga ai nga
mahara.
Na te pupuke i ahu ka hua te mahara.—
Poet. p. 152.
Ahu, s. [Aha, H.] 1. A company , of
workmen. Syn. Ohu.
Ina hoki te pepeha a Rangi, “ Ko te ahu a
Rangi ” ; kei Maungatipa tena ahu.
Na te rau o te iwi me i ona ahu ka rarua
koe.
2. A heap [H.]
3. A garment:
“ Ekore au e mate i te ahu, o Kuranui.” —
Prov. p. 64 (contracted from Kahu).
[A fine mat, H.J
4. A resort of taniioha.
Ahua, p> -tia; v.n. -tanga. 1. To
be like, to resemble, to correspond to
or with, to appear as; to wear, have,
or possess the appearance of; to be
made like ; to be something like; to
seem.
Ahua riri tonu mai.
A kite iho au, to kiri i ahua ki te wai nga-
rahu.—Poet. p. 28.
Kia maia ki nga hara taumaha, kia kaha
te hopu i nga ahua tangata.
2. To show ; to manifest:
Ehoa, te ahua o taku reta ki a koe, he
whenua noku. (6)
3. To approach :
E ahuatia mai nei nga ihu waka ia Para-
raki.—Song.
Ka ahua mai ki te matakitaki.—Myth.
p. 180.


Ahua
[16]
Ahua
4. To hasten :
E to, e te ra, ahua te whakangaro.—Poet.
p. 396.
Ahua, e te iwi, te rangahau o te hoe.—Id.
p. 161.
Ahuatia, koia, te marama, e i.—Id. p. 106.
Ahuatia mai ko te one potaka.—Id. p. 323.
I ahua, e te po, e arumia mai te moenga.—
Id. p. 389.
E ah/ua ! (imp.)—Make haste. [To rush
at random, Tng.l
Kai wawewawe atu e te ra te haere, kia
ahua te po.— Poet. p. cvii.
5. To try to pronounce :
Taria, kia alvuatia to ingoa.
6. To form, to build :
Ahua te whare.—Myth. p. 113.
Ka ahua te whenua, me te karakia atu
ano.—Legend of Tune.
Na Tuparimaewaewa nana i ahu mai, ka
ki ia he tangata. — Myth. p. 17.
— further ; of the land :
He hiahia noa iho naku, kia kite ahau i
te ahua o Taupo, no reira au i haere mai
ai.
1 timata i Mangatea, ka rere ki Taiha ahua
katoa, ka rere ki Puketutu.
— of length:
Kei Akerana ki Poneke e ahua pera ana
ano te roa.
— of width:
He awa ah/ua whanui era.
— of shadows—ideas, images—not sub-
stance :
Ka tangohia e te Patupaiarehe te ahua o
nga wliakakai, ko te ahua hoki o nga
taonga i riro i a ratou.—Myth. p. 181.
Ko te ahua kau o te moni e whakaaria mai
ana kia matou, ko te tino moni kali ore e
tukua mai.
Ko te ahua kau o te Ture kei au.
— of meaning :
Tena, whakaaturia mai te ahua o to Ma-
tihe e ki nei koe.
— of sound ; voice, language, cry :
Ina te ahua o tana tangi (said of a cock).
Ka rongo ake au i te tangi, ka mohio ake
au ki te ahua o tona tangi.
— of scent, smell:
Bongo kau ano te tupua ra i te haunga
ahzza tangata, i te piro ahua tangata.—
Myth. pp. 150, 151.
Me he merengi te ahua liaunga o te mea
nei.
— of colour :
Homai he pepa (paper) ahua pungapunga.
— of winds:
Te ahua o te hau ka rite.—Myth. p. 154.
— of length of time; stopping, waiting :
Ko te ahua o te noho, ano kei te tatari
ratou ki te tai.
— of pain:
Ko taku tamaiti ekore pea e puta ora ki
waho, ina hoki te ahua kino o roto i a
au (labour pains).—Myth. p. 127.
— of disease:
Ka ahua taka powhatu te takapu.
Kua pii ano hoki ra he kino ki a koe, i na
te ahzia.
Koinei, koa, i pouritia ai e au, ko tona
ahua.
Ahua, -$•, 1. Form, shape, likeness,
appearance, fashion, image, counten-
ance, person. (Is. xl. 18; Gen. i. 2.)
A, rawe noa iho te ahua o te kainga!
Ko te ahua ia, i rite ki te ahua tuatete.—
Myth. p. 152.
Tona ahua he ahua tangata.
Kahore i a ratou i whakakino ki taku ahua
(person).
Ko te ahua, he ahua tangata, penei me te
ahua pakeha.
Ko te ahua o taua wai nei e ahua whaka-
mataku ana ; ano ! kahiwahiwa kau ana,
me te ahua wai pounamu nei ano.—
Myth. p. 158.
2. Sort, kind, species.
E toru tekau nga tangata ahua taitamariki
i whakaritea hai ropu.—1 Sam. xxviii.
14 ; Dan. iii. 25.
3. Demeanour, bearing, manner;
particular way.
Ka whakaaro ahau ki toku ahua whaka-
hihi i runga i nga tohenga a te runanga.
Kia ahzta tuakana ai, kia ahua teina ai.
Ka kite ia i to matou ahua hiahia ki te
whakaara.
A, ahua pai tonu ki to tetehi ngakau, ki
to tetahi ngakau.—Myth. p. 131.
4. Outline; shadow, not substance ;
picture, drawing, representation.
E rima nga eka, kei te mapi te ahua o nga
rolie (outlines).
Kia kore i te kite tinana, ko tetahi reta nei
pea, kia kite atu au i tou ahua, pehea
ranei, aroha ranei, kore ranei.
I ahua tokoiti o te Ingirihi i mate (few).
5. Representative ; deputy.
Tuarua : ko nga Maori e noho ana i uta, ko
ahau te ahua mo enei.
Haere mai, e te ahua o te mana o te Ka-
wanatanga.—Keepa, welcome address to
Hon. Sir W. Fox.
Korero ana ratou ki a te Kawana, ara ki to
te Kuini ahua.
6. The matter or subject, drift, or
intention of a speech or letter; opinion,


Ahua
[17]
Ahua
way of thinking; mind towards a
person or thing.
Ahakoa ahua horihori tenei korero, he
pono ano.
Kia kaua e ahua whawhai tana tikanga,
noho marie ana.
E pena ana hold te ahua o o korero.
Ahua, v., to be pregnant by; to be
conceived by.
Kihai koe i ahua e to matua, i mahia pori-
rotia e au.—Poe£/’p. 115.
Ahua, adv., Truly.
Ahua, part., prefixed to adjectives to
lessen their meaning (corresponding to
the suffix ish, English : e.g., whitish,
blackish, &c.) ; somewhat, in some
degree ; something like ; sub, semi, &c.
JJiua-pouri. Ahua-paA. Ahua-rin, &c.
He Toroa tataki, i a/iwa-mangu tenei—
Blackish.
He Matukutuku, he a/ma-kotingotingo—
Somewhat speckled.
Ahua, intj. Truly !
Ahuaatua, s. 1. Discourtesy, bad
manners, rudeness, incivility, inhospi-
tality. Syn. Rupahu ; Atuaahua.
2. Ugliness, hideousness, deformity.
Ahuahu, v.p. -ngia ; v.n. -nga.
1. To shape, to form—like a human
being, according to the intention of the
former, or, what it should become. See
Whakawhaiahua.
Eliara i te mea i wlianau tangata mai,
engari he maro; no te haerenga o Apa-
kura ki tatahi, ka whiua tona maro
ki te moana, ahuahungia mai e Rongo-
takawiu, ka tupu ko Whakatau, ka akona
e tona jtupuna e Rongotakawiu ki nga
karakia, mohio katoa i a ia. — Myth.
p. 56.
Na enei nga atua i ahuahu nga hapu
whakatahe o nga wahine. — Grey, p.
lxxvii.
Haere tonu, ka ahuahuatia te whenua, koia
a ahuahu.
2. To earth up smoothly, and with
much patting, around the stalks of
cultivated edible plants ; to make up
little hillocks for planting. Syn. Tu-
puke.
Ahziahungia mai kia wawe te tupuke.
3. To become low, to descend, as
the sun at evening.
4. To be diminished in size, as a pile
of edible roots.
2
Ahuahu, S- A small pile, hillock, or
mound of earth in a plantation, pre-
pared for planting of roots.
—nga kumara, kotahi ki ia ahuahu, ki ia
ahuahu.
Ahuahu, adj. Well - proportioned ;
plump; fat (used for animals only).
Ka nui te momona, ara te ahuahu o te
hoiho.
Ahuahua, v.p., -tia; v.n., -TANGA. To
resemble slightly, to be somewhat like,
&c. See Ahuahu, verb.
Ahuahua, adv. Somewhat,, something
like, resembling in a small degree.
Ahuahua, adj. Near, something like,
resembling.
Ahuahuatanga, 5. 1. Formation;
shape.
2. Relating to the raising the small
hillocks in which the kumara are
planted.
3. The act of making the same.
4. Comparison ; relation to, or with.
See Ahungaoneone.
“ Ka tangi wbaikopekapeka te wahine ki
tana tamaiti, ma koutou e titiro, hei
ahuahuatanga mai ki te whakapono.”
Ahuahutanga, s. Small hillocks in
cultivations for tohungas = priests, set
apart for seed.
“ He puke na nga tohunga ; ko nga puke i
tiria ai he purapura.”
Ahuake, V.p., -tia; v.n., -tanga. To
be unlike, to differ, to vary, to alter.
Ahuake, adj. Abnormal, irregular,
different, unlike, contrary in appear-
ance to what is commonly known,
mentioned, or understood.
Ahuaketanga, 5. Irregularity, differ-
ence, contrariety.
Ahuakino, v. 1. To have an ugly,
disagreeable, or displeasing appearance
—persons, things, words, or feelings.
2. To be discontented.
E ahuakino ana te ngakau ki tena utu.
Ahuakino, adj. Disagreeable, ugly,
repulsive, nasty.
Ahuakino, Ugliness; unpleasant-
ness.


Ahua
[18]
Ahua
Ahuamahue, v. To be unregarded.
“ A tenei pea te ki nei, na to ratou iti i
ahztamahzie ai.”
Ahuanoa, v.p., -tia; v.n., -tanga. To
be unusual; to be out of order. See
example, next verb.
Ahuaotepuhara, 5. Swelled abdo-
men ; irregular, preternatural projec-
tion.
Ahuanoatia taku puku, ehara i te hanga!
ara, tetere o taku puku te ahuaotepuhara.
Ahuapai, To be of pleasing appear-
ance.
Ahuapai, adj. Pleasant, agreeable;
skilful, clever.
Ahuapaihaere, v. To mend in sick-
ness ; to improve in health, or in ap-
pearance.
Tenei kua ahuapaihaere a Heni; kua ma-
ranga ki runga noho ai.
Ahuapaitanga, s- Ability, cleverness,
skill, dexterity.
Kia kitea te ahuapaitanga ki te haka.—
Myth. p. 145.
Ahuapohewa, adj. 1. Doubtful, un-
settled.
2. Unfruitful, as kumara hillocks.
“ E ngau ki te whara, ki nga puke ahua-
pohewa.”—Old kumara song, MS.
Ahuareka, v.p., -tia; v.n., -tanga.
To be pleased with; to relish; to
like; to be pleasant; to be charmed
with ; to be delighted in hearing.
(Mark xii. 37.)
E ahuareka ana ahau, e koro ki te korero.
I whakahuatia ano hoki e ia te haka, a nui
atu te ahuai eka.
Ka ahuareka noa iho a raua nei korero ki
a raua nei.—Myth. p. 169.
Titiro ana koutou ki te pai o nga korero,
ahuareka tia ana.
Na, e nga tangata o te motu nei, kei noho
koe ah/uareka noa iho.
Ahuareka, adj. Pleasing, pleasant
(Gen. xlix. 15) ; agreeable, handsome,
beautiful, desirable (Psalm cvi. 24;
Is. xliv. 9.).
Ahuareka, Pleasantness, agreeable-
ness.
Ahuarekareka, 5. Pleasant agree-
able things, diversions, play.
Ko nga ahuarekareka o taua ra he moari.
Ahuarekatanga, s. Advantage; de-
sire ; gains.
Me te ata korero hoki i nga ahuarekatanga
mona, ana whai ratou i nga tikanga o te
pakeha.
Puta tonu te ahuarekatanga o te ngakau
ki anei korero.
Ahuarite,^. To be alike; to be nearly
settled; to be approaching completion,
agreement, &c.
No muri iho ka ahuarite te rohe i waenga-
nui i a raua.
Nga pakeha anake e ahuarite ana ki te
300,000.
Ahuarupahu, s. Incivility, disre-
spect, coarseness of manners.
Ahuatahi, To be alike; to agree
with; to conform.
Ahuatahi, adv. Alike.
Ahuatanga, 1. Form, appearance.
E ora ana tona ahuatanga no te kakari-
tanga o Tu raua ko Bongo.
“ Ka mahue i au te ahua tangata, ka
whakaahuatia hoki ahau ki to te manu
ahuatanga, a i rite ahau ki ia manu,—
a hoki noa mai ahau ki to te tangata
ahuatanga.'1—Myth. p. 18.
2. Peculiar or specific manner; pain,
feeling, meaning, tenor.
No konei au i mahara ai, he whanau ano
teuei ahuatanqa (peculiar feelings).—
Myth. p. 128.
Kia korerotia atu e koe ki a Te Ora te
ahuatanga o taku reta.
Ahuawaimarie, adj. Quiet, peace-
able.
Ahuawhakakakaka, s. and adj.
1. Indistinct wavy appearance, as of
fibres of the flax-leaf (Phormium) on
being freshly scraped with a shell in
dressing.
2. The sharp shoots from creeping
stems of plants, as couch-grass (Triti-
cum repens'), and sometimes from po-
tato tubers, and entering or found
within them.
Ahuawhakapae, s. Imputation, im-
plication, charge.
Mo te korero i rangona e ia, me he ahua-
whakapae nei te ahua.
Ahuawhekewheke, adj. Rumpled,
creased ; ugly. (Lit. Like an ugly
cuttle-fish.)


Ahum
[19]
Ahur
Ahuangaro, V- To be scarcely dis-
cernible ; to be indistinctly seen in the
distance.
Alvuangaro ana te ahua o te whenua i te
pamamao.
Ahuangawari, v. 1. To be soft to
the feel, as fine fur, velvet, &c.
2. To lessen in violence ; to decrease,
as the wind.
Katahi ka ahuangawari te hau.
3. To be easy in doing, &c., as
work.
Ahuhaere, v. To keep moving about
together in a cluster, or body, like
children at play, &c., not sitting down,
nor stopping.
Ahukahuka, v. 1. To be faintly or
indistinctly seen, or surmised.
Ahukahuka ana ki a mea, ehara i te titiro
tuturu mohio maku.
Ahukahuka kau ana, kahore i tino rite
rawa.
2. To slightly correspond, tally, or
agree ; to resemble slightly ; to be
something like.
Ko te parera pakeha i ralii ake etahi, i
ahukahuka ki te parera Maori.
He take ano lioki e ahukahuka ana ki te
tika.
3. To attempt; to distantly imitate;
to be slightly conversant with.
—nga tangata ano ia kua ahukahuka ki
nga mahi a te pakeha, ko ratou ano e
matau.
Ahukahuka, adv. Indistinctly.
I kite ahukahuka kau atu ahau.
Ahukaramu.
Ahukawa.
Ahumehume, v. 1. To be suitable,
becoming, as good clothing.
Ahumehume tahi te kahu a te Tipua.
2. To have a pleasing appearance,
as the curly hair of a dog; also, its
hair raised up in anger. See Amenge-
menge.
Ahumehzime ana nga huruhuru o te kuri.
3. To be drawn upwards ; to have
the edges of a garment incurved, as
those of a female.
“ He kahu rapaki, ka humea ake ma roto
i nga kuha.”
Ahumehume, $• 1. A female garment
reaching from waist to knees. Syn.
Rapaki, Kopeke, Papaki, Pongoi.
2. A wriggling tail, or posterior.
Ahunoa, ad/. Unstable, uncertain,
wavering, shifty, changing.
Ahunu.
Ahunui, v. 1. To go straight for-
ward at or for anything, or to any
place ; to be direct.
2. To appear clearly in the distance,
as the tops of hills.
Maku e whakamau nga puke ahumii i
runga o Tauhara.—Poet. p. 333.
Ahunui, a. Working, laborious. See
Ahu whenua, Syn.
Ahunuku, 5. Incantation for kumara
planting, &c.
Ko te whiti e tapu te ngau te tao, tiua
nga ahunuku te turanga ahurangi.—Old
charm.
Ahunukutaimaroro,s. As Ahunuku.
See Auenukutaimaroro.
Ahuoturanga, s. Proverbial saying.
See example.
Ka tae ki te Apiti, ka ahu tona aroaro ki
te wa ki tona kainga, ka puta mai te
hau ; ka mea ia, “ A, te hau i ahu mai i
taku kainga i Turanga! ” Koia te Ahu-
oturanga.
Ahura, vp-, -hia. To take out, or up,
the cooked food from an earth-oven.
Ahurahia te umu; hukea te umu.
Ahurangi, v. To look back on, or over
place left, times past (objectively or
subjectively) ; to gaze, or think feel-
ingly ; to yearn.
Ahurangi ana taku nei titiro ki Ahuahu i
raro.
See * Ahunuku.
Ahurei, v. To plant kumara. See
W HAKATOPATOPA.
Ahureka, 5. Pleasing things ; pleasant
imaginations, hopes ; temptations ;
things desired, sought after.
Ma wai e pupuri nga ahureka o te Wai-
tere ? i te kahupu, i te kahukoti, i ana
tarau.
Ahurewa, A kind of altar; a place
formed or built for sacred purposes.
Syn. Titaalvu.


Ahuwh
[20]
Ahunga
Kia noho mai te tohunga’i mua i te ahu-
rewa.—Poet. p. 250.
E Rona, te tae ki mua te ahurewa.—Id. p.
324 ; 1 Kings vi. 5, 16 ; Ps. xxviii. 2.
Ahuriri, S- 1. A close fence, or kind
of dam, set up in a plantation to ward
off or lessen force of a flood ; a heap of
stones placed for same purpose.
2. A strong current, or tideway, or
race, between two islands, or an island
and the mainland; hence the name
of Ahuriri (Napier), and of the strait
between Portland Island and Table
Cape.
Ahuroa, s. Term used in planting
kitmara.
Ka ranga te one ko te ahuroa.—Myth.
p. 114.
AhurongO, s- As above, Ahuroa.
Ahuru, V.p., -tia; v.n., -tanga. To
be warm, snug, cosy, comfortable; to
cherish. See Wh aka ahuru.
Ko te whare kia taka te ahuru.—Poet. p.
396.
Ahuru, adj. Warm, snug, comfortable ;
warm and snugly fitting, as a warm
garment, a bird in its nest, a child
enwrapped in a warm mat, &c.
Kia moe atu au i te moenga ahuru.—Poet.
p. 21.
Ahuru, s. Snugness, cosiness; warmth,
in a dwelling or thick garment.
Ka whakapiri noa te kora a Mahuika ka
taka te ahuru.—Poet. p. 46.
—a fish.
—a wind.
Ahuru, Kai-, s- One who watches
over, cares for, an infant, &c.; a nurse;
a cherisher.
Ahuruhuru, A fish (Calloptilum
pitnctatzim, Hutton).
Ahuta, See Mahuta.
Ahutoatoa, 5. An incantation used in
planting kumara, &c.
Ahuwhenua, v.p., ; v.n., tanga.
1. To work at, or be occupied in,
proper manly out-door works : as culti-
vation of edible roots; enclosing, pre-
paring, or improving land.—2 Ghron.
xxvi. 10.
Kia mamahi te tangata kia ahuwhenua,
ka whai rawa ia.
Kua kite ratou i te ara e ora ai te tangata,
ara, ko te ahuiuhenua, ko te mahi kai.
2. To labour, so as to earn one’s
living fairly.
He aha te take i whakarere rukaruka ai te
tokomahai nga tohu rangatira a nehe ra,
ara te ahuwhenua ?
E ! kihai te poti [cat], i ahuwhenua ki te
hopu kiore mana, 1 ho mai tona ahu-
whenuatanga ki nga kai ma te tangata
—“preys upon the industry of others.”
Ahuwhenua, adj. Diligent; indus-
trious ; primarily at cultivation of crops
and farming.
Ahuwhenua, Industry, diligence,
energy at work ; labour; agricultural
pursuits.
Ki taku noho ko te rangimarie ko te ahu-
whenua.
I iti te ahuwhenua i mua, i iti te pai.
Ahuwhenuatanga, s. Fruits of the
earth from cultivation; industry.
Titiro ki nga mahi ahuwheniiatanga o
Opotiki, he whakaatu mai kia pera hoki
tatou te ahuwhenuatanga.
Ahuwhen.ua, Tangata-, «• A culti-
vator, husbandman, worker in fields,
&c.—2 Chron. xxvi. 10.
Ahunga, 5. 1. Act or time of moving,
or going; proceeding ; turning.
Kahore he ahunga o te pare o taku potae
kei tua o taku matenga.
2. Direction ; course.
Ka rere—puta noa ki Oporae, rere noa te
ahunga whakatetonga.
3. The inclination of eyes, hands, &c.,
towards anything; tendency, disposi-
tion, bent, bias.
I pera hoki te ahunga a nga kanohi me to
te tahae ua hopukia.
4. Procession.
5. Entrance, beginning of way ;
“head of way.”—Is. li. 20; Lam. ii.
19; iv. 1.
Erua nga ahunga atu o te whanaunga.
Ka tu ki te ahunga i uta, ka tu ki te
aponga i tai, ka tu ki te ahunga i
Hawaiki.—Myth. p. 85.
Ki te ahunga i tai, ki te aponga i tai.—
Poet. p. 329, 353, 414.
Ahunga-oneone.
“Ko te ahuahutanga pea a Tanenuiarangi
i te one i kurawaka.” . (Syn. Aponga,
Apoaponga).—Poet. p. 127.


Ai
[21]
Ai
Ahunga-tangata, s. A body of men
going, proceeding for a specified pur-
pose.
I riro katoa ano a Maketu—a no tenei
ahunga-tangata katahi a Maketu ka tino
mau.—Poet. p. lxxi.
At-awhaia ki tenei ahimga-tangata, eh ar a !
ka hokia atu ano.—Id.
Ai, rel. part. [H., S.; ei, R.] Com-
monly used in place of the relative
pronouns, who, which, that, what,
&c.; also, in relative clauses where in
English the relative adverbs, when,
where, &c., would be used; having
reference generally to a preceding verb
active or passive, noun, or adverb,—
expressing cause, reason, consequence,
place, time, manner, or instrument;
and always closely following the verb,
&c. Mostly confined to the past and
future tenses, and almost always
omitted in the present tense, when
the particles nei, ra, or ana, are used
in its stead. A highly significant and
useful word in Maori, but without a
corresponding one in English. Its use
is peculiar, though almost generally
Polynesian; and must be learned more
by practice than by definition or rule.
The following are examples :—
— Which ; who; by whom. (Prov. i.
2, 3 ; Luke xix. 2, 7.)
Tohou waka na, e hoe ai i te wai.
Maku e whaki tana i mea ai moku.
Kua tae mai te teina, kaore te hoiho i
haere ai ia.
Tenei te mea e mate ai nga tangata.
Hore he mea e hei ai raua te titiro nui atu.
E riri ai koe, e nguha ai koe, e toa ai koe, e
karo ai koe.
Te tangata i hopukia ai koe ko Hoani.
Mana e ora ai te tangata.
Tohou apa na e haere ai nga pikitanga.
— that is; that is to say; that (Exod.
x. 1, 2) :
Kei rongo rawa a Ngaitekura, te iwi mona
ai tena korero.
— what; for what; denoting purpose:
He aha tau mea i haere mai ai ?
He aha koe i haere ai 1
Ma kona ka aha? Ka mohio ai koia te
tokomaha ?
— denoting reason, or cause :
I korerotia ai tenei kia kite koutou.
A, i mutu ai, he mea karanganui na Mohi
kia whakamutua.
Kia mana ai te kai.
Kia hoki mai ra ano a Hawea, ka hoki
katoa mai ai.
Mei kai a ranei te marama ? i mate aii
Mei kaia ranei te pari ? i horo ai.
Nga huri nei ? i pirau ai.— Poet. p. 9.
— denoting time : at the time of:
I to rongonga ai. I tona kitenga ai.
I te wa i whai mutunga ai.
Kua hapu ia i tona puhinga ai.
Kua whawhai raia ahau i mua ai.
— denoting place :
Ko tona tinana ka waiho ki te wahi i
hinga ai.
E rangi ki a ia kia mate ia i taua wahi i
tu ai.
A, ngaua noatia e te maeke, haere tahanga
ai etahi.
— denoting both time and place :
I whakaaturia ano e au i reira ai, tana
korero.
Ka mutu ai ranei ?
Ka ata ki atu au, “ Ekore e ho atu he
utu,” i reira ai.
I te kuaretanga i reira ai o tenei motu.
— denoting a consequence ; in order
that; in order to :
I utua ai ia kia wehi ai ahau.
Ka haere ki etahi kainga, noho ai, tangi ai.
Engari pea, kia tutaki he kanohi he kanohi
ka pai ai.
— denoting taken together ; totality ;
completeness:
Kotahi o matou kua mate, tokotoru matou
kei te ora, ka tokowha ai matou.
Ka tokorua aku tamariki hou, ka tokorua
tamariki tawhito, ka tokowha ai.
Ka anga mai te kaumatua, tokorua nga
hoa, ka tokotoru ai ratou.
Ahakoa tini a ratou hara i mua ai, ekore e
peia atu.
Ko nga kai-whakaako mo nga tamariki mo
nga kaumatua ai hoki.
— sometimes, but rarely, used in the
present tense instead of ana ; denoting
continuance, repetition. See ex-
amples :
E kainga ai ano.
Kokoti ai nga wahine i o ratou makawe
kia poto rawa.
Tu tonu ai ki runga era tangata ki te ho§
waka.
Ai, def. 1. To have ; to possess ; to
abound :
Ma te ai patu ka pai.
Ka ai aroha ka haere mai taua, ka tangi.
Mei ai he waka mo matou kua tae ke mai
matou.
Ka ai hoki he kai ma ratou ki uta.
Kei ai he titiro i te ra e tu iho nei.—Poet.
p. 9.


Ai
[22]
Aihe
Te ai he aha hei whakaohooho mai.—
Myth. p. 117.
Ma te ai tikanga, ma te ai patu, ka kakaro
ai te tangata.
2. To be for a purpose; to serve a
purpose:
Ka ai he tumanakohanga mana.
Kua ai enei mea he patu maku.
Ka ai he mea ki a ratou, na, ka haere mai.
Kei ai e toru o aku.
Ka ai he oneone mahi kai.
Kia ai enei hei tiaki i a koe.—Gen. xxi. 30 ;
Luke xvi. 4, 9.
Ai rawa he korero, te runanga taua, nau
na, e Tuiri.—Poet. p. 85.
A ka ai ia hei oranga ngakau.
Ka ai ano ia ahau hei whakaora mo ratou.
— used ironically :
E ai nei hoki i te toka rurenga tai e neneke
i te ngaru.—Poet. p. 101.
1. Often used with the negative par-
ticle Te and the proper noun for the
being wholly without it; and fre-
quently indicating an optative mean-
ing: Oh, for! Oh, that! (Is. xxiv. 10;
Jer. xxxiii. 10.)
Te ai he wai moku I
Te ai he tangata pai hei inoi I
II. Sometimes with the negative par-
ticle and the contrary noun or verb, to
convey the very opposite meaning:
Te ai he wehi.—To dwell safely.
Te ai he mate kai ki tena kainga.—To
abound in food.
Ai, v. def. 1. To say (i.e., according
to; saying) ; always in present tense
with E preceding:
E ai ta wai ? E ai tau. E aiTe Hapuku.
E ai taku whakatau kii.
E ai ta mea.—Is. xl. 25.
E ai ki te ritenga o tau waiata.
E ai ko Rapata. E ai ki ta te Atua kupu.
Ara, e ai ra ki ta te korero i rangona ake e
o matou taringa.
Ka mea nga Kawana, hei iwi kotahi te
Maori te Pakeha; e ai ki te hamumu
mai a o ratou waha.
2. (Fig.) E ai te aorewa.—Old Song,
MS.:
E kaka tonu ana, E ai te aorere.—Poet.
p. 82.
Ka mangi noa au, e ai te aorere. — Id.
p. 240.
Kotia te kauru, waiho i kona, e ai ra ko te
umutuhi.—Id. p. 355.
Ai, pron. inter. 1. Contraction for
wai—who, in common colloquial lan-
guage. [R.J
Katahi ka karanga, “ Ko ai koe ? ”
Ko ai koe, e patoto mai nei ?
Ko ai koe, e whakahua mai ki taku ingoa
nei?
2. Poetical for wai—who.
Ko ai e haere mai i Omoho ra e ?—Old
Song, MS.
Ai, intj., O! 1. Indicating vexation:
first word in sentence.
Ai taukiri e !—Myth. p. 63.
Ai, taurekareka, e! i huna iho koe.—Poet.
p. vi.
2. Wail of lament (pronounced differ-
ently, long); last word in stanza.
Kei to tuahine ra ai.—Poet. p. 49.
I te tara o te whare ra ai.—Id.; again p. 50.
Kaore te aroha ki taku potiki, tuhana tonu
ake, i te ahiahi ka tomo ki te whare taku
ate kau ai!—Poet. p. 235.
Ai, V.p., -TIA ; V.n., -TANGA, -NGA.
[H. T.] Syn. Ahi.
1. To copulate, applied to both sexes,
man, and animals.
2. To beget, used of the man.
Na wai i ai tenei tamaiti ?
Nana i ai atu Kaitawhara, ka puta kei
waho Korouaputa.—Poet. p. 208.
Aia, [H.J 1. Behold ! Io !
(Expressive of admiration ; surprise ;
triumph; contempt.)
Aia hoki! Aia ano 1
2. There ! near by, generally accom-
panied with a suitable gesture.
Ai! ai!
“ Ai ! ai! awatea ake ana.”—Old Song,
MS.
Aiai, term of greeting, used at Taranaki.
Aiai, 5. Evening. (6.) (almost obsolete.)
Syn. Ahiahi, which see.
Aiana, adv. (See Aeiana.)
Aianei, adv. [H.] To-day (Jut.)-, soon,
directly, now, this day.
Aiha, intj. Expressive of astonishment,
with dislike. Forbid it! Be it far
from me!
Aihe, 5. A sea animal, a species of
dolphin (?), black, smooth, 18ft. to 20ft.
long, having a small head and teeth
like a porpoise, and a large transverse
tail. (?) Syn. Rarihi.
Aihe, 5. A pile of drift-wood stranded
in rivers, and on rivers’ banks.


Aioho
[23]
Aita
Kei te kapi te araawaka i te aihe: he
putaita rakau i ro wai.
Aihu, 5. A parting friendly salutation
by rubbing noses, after the ancient
Maori custom.
Tena te honi aihu, tena te maimai aroha.—
Old Song.
Kai te tuku atu i a Mea ma, honi aihu
rawa ratou. (Hongi-a-ihu.)
(N.B. Note, honi is here used for
hongi; the former being in use among
the Ngatiawa and Urewera tribes;
honi is also the common Hawaiian term
for this action.)
Aihumoana, s. A sea-monster, or
“taniwha.” Certain imaginary and
mythical beings (atua) residing in the
sea, said to be five in number; one, a
female, being named Hinekakamaurea,
she is armed with a stout branch of
tutumoko (a sea-side shrub): they are
all betrayers of man. — See “Legend
of Paikea,” Trans. N.Z. Inst., vol. xiv.,
pp. 20, 32.
Aio, V. ; V.n. -TANGA.
1. To be calm, serene, quiet,—ap-
plied to the elements, but mostly to
the sea ; also to the sky after a storm.
Ka aio te moana o Heretaunga.
Ko te waka tena no Aiorangi, haere i te
aio.—Poet. p. 265.
Kia aio te moana, kia whiti ai nga waka.
2. (Fig.} To be peaceful, tranquil;
free from war, fighting, or great dis-
turbance.
Takoto aio ana inaianei te nuinga o nga
wahi o te motu.
Tona kitenga, no tera atu iwi ano tenei
oneone, na whakamutua ana, takoto ana
i te aio.
3. Often used in charms, spells,
karakias, &c. Example:
“ Ka keri ki raro Aio, oi,
Ko raro Aio o te po.”—Myth. p. 86.
Aio, 5. 1. Calm; calmness, serenity,
stillness, quietness (of elements) ; and
time of peace.
2. Name for the moon when eight
days old.
Aio, adj. Quiet, serene, calm, tranquil,
peaceful.
Aiohoutaketake, s. Long quiet, tran-
quillity; time of peace.
Aionuku, 5. Calm space around, per-
sonified.
“ Ei! tena te au ka rere.
Ka rere ki a Aionuku.
Ka rere ki a Xio-Rangi,
Ka rere ki a Aio-Papa,
Ka rere ki a ;4w-Take,
Ko Manatu.”— Poet. p. 422, and p. 210.
Aiopapa, 5. Calm peaceful earth;
inhabited land. See Aionuku.
Aiopipi, 5. A very great calm.
Aiorangi, 5. Calm sky above ; per-
sonified. See Aionuku.
Aioriri, s. Quietness; pacification, after
fighting.
Aiotake, v. Root, or cause, of calm-
ness ; peace personified. See Aionuku.
Aiotanga, $• Time or state of being
calm, as the sea. (See verb.)
No te aiotanga o te moana i hoki ai.
Aiotaketake, $• A settled calm. Syn.
Aiopipi.
Aika, Common term for sea-fish (2.);
perhaps a corruption by Europeans of
he ikct.
Aikake. (Tama aikake).
Aipara.
Airo, 5. 1. Name of the Parrot’s cry,
or song, “ Kia iro,” meaning, remember
(tauntingly).—See “ Trans. N.Z. Insti-
tute,” vol. xi., p. 102, for the fable of
the great battle between the land- and
sea-birds.
2. A shallow pit made (but rarely),
or, more often threatened, for unruly
children—to bring them to remember.
He rua airo: mo te tini o te tamariki i
whakatauatia ai tenei whakataukii, “ te
rua airo.”
Aitanga, S. 1. Time, act, manner, or
place of copulating; copulation; coition.
2. Begetting.
Katahi ka auraki mai ki te whanau a te
mangumangu kikino, i te aitanga a
Punga i a au, e!—Prov. p. 44 ; Poet. p.
289.
3. Offspring, issue, progeny, descend-
ants.
Kia mohio koutou ki nga aitanga a Tu-
wharetoa ; tana, ko Rakeihopukia ; tana,
ko Taringa; tana, ko Tutetawha, &o.—
Poet. p. 88.


Aitu
[24]'
Aitua
(a.) Men:
Ehara i te aitanga a Tiki!—Prov.
p. 3. See Tiki.
Kia rangona hoki tona ingoa, e te
motu katoa nei, no te mea he uri
no te aitanga a Tiki.
(&.) Fishes, reptiles:
Te aitanga a Punga. See Punga.
(c.) Trees, plants:
Te aitanga a Tane. See Tane.
Ko te aitanga a Tane, e tuohu i uta ra.—
Poet. p. 9.
Aiti.
Ko te hau aiti. Puanga-o-te-ai^ (n. pl.).
Aiti mai ! Call or cry of welcome.
Aitu, S- [S.] Inferior malevolent gods,
demons, spirits, or supernatural powers
of mischief, revenge, vengeance, &c.,
much dreaded and hated (infra). [A
god or goddess, T.].
A general term or appellative, much
used in ancient karakias, — spells,
threatenings, invocations, dedications,
&c.,—and in laments and dirges; rarely
in colloquial language, where, more
generally, aitua is used (derived from
it), which see.
“ Aitu, Aitu, ai,
Maitiiti, Marekareka te tupua
I karokaroa te mata o Hawaiki.—Poet.
p. 374.
Te kawa i a Aitu, te katva i a Maru, i to
atua ra.—Id. p. 83.
Tukua te wananga, houhia to aitu.- — Id.
p. 318.
Ka whiwhi ringa o Aitu.—Id. p. 139.
Te tautiaki mai ai te ika a te Aitu.—Id.
p. 223.
Ki to mataniho, E Haware-^u, E Ha-
ware-Tangaroa.—Id. p. 326.
“ Ka’ te turaki taua e hine,
Ki te turanga o Aitua,
O Aitu whakatina,
Ko Aitu whakatoka,
Kia toka te whenua,
Kia toka nga tangata.”—Id. p. 16.
Sometimes used, especially in poetry,
for aitua (infra), as in the last example.
“ Tenei te po whanatu na, ko te po o
J.i^kino, o Aitua, te tuku atu ki a koe,
te tatau atu te kohu i a koe.”—Id. p.
428.
Here the aitib is evidently invoked,
or spoken well of, in the same spell
or charm in which it was just before
abused, and its malevolence given over
to the foe. The whole of this fine piece
of Maori poetry, abounding in rude,
unique, and highly curious imagery, is
well worthy of deep study; as is also
the much longer one preceding it.—
Poet. p. 420, et seq. See Aituhau,
Aitupawa, &c.
[O6s.—This is a very ancient and
highly peculiar word; formerly always
accompanied with some amount of un-
definable superstitious or mysterious
fear and dread. Etymologically, it is
worthy of a brief extra notice, as the
same word in Samoan has exactly the
same meaning ; and a similar Hawaiian
word, — aiku = aitu, — has much of the
same root-meaning, i.e., to eat standing,
or in an improper manner; to do a thing
contrary to rule or ceremony ; to break
a tapu (anything sacred) ; hence an
offence against the gods. That Ha-
waiian word is derived from ai to eat
(kai, Maori), and tib to stand—i.e., to
eat standing (alike an offence to both
peoples). The root-meaning of this
Maori word, — aitu, aitiba, — was no
doubt originally the same as the pre-
ceding words, aitib (Samoan), and aiku
(Hawaiian), through dropping the k
in kai and adding the a to tu; and
then it might well have been derived
from kai tua = to eat behind, secretly,
stealthily, out of sight; always a great
offence, and often a serious crime and’
punished accordingly, even to' loss of
life.]
Aitu, adj. 1. Haunted [v. To be
haunted, S.]
Tenei te taka i te whare aitu e I—Poet. p.
334, 408.
2. Malevolent, baneful; powerful for
evil.
Tatara te hono, he hono aitu.—Id. p. 210.
Harahara aitu, harahara atai.—Id. p. 114.
Aitua, s- 1. An ill-omen; a portent,
presage, prognostic; a preternatural
or uncommon sign of warning (of
which there were many, and always
evil); e.g.:
(a.) Natural things unexpectedly seen
or heard ; as certain birds and fishes;
the position of the moon and stars;
the appearance of the stars ; a falling
star, meteor, &c. ; aurora australis ;
fiery clouds; ignis fatibus; eddy winds;
heavy rains ; floods in rivers ; a bounc-


Aitua
[25]'
Ainga
ing spark, and the emission of gaseous
flame from burning wood in the private
warming fires in their dwelling-houses,
&c.
(b.) Sudden fears, strong feelings,
presentiments, apprehensions ; deep
impressions of mind ; forebodings ;
dreams ; a word wrongly used, or an
unwelcome or unlucky subject or name,
suddenly arising in conversation.
(c.) Slight impediments, hindrances,
delays, hurts ; frequently some trifling
thing unexpectedly happening on be-
ginning a journey, a foray, a work, &c.,
such as the catching of one’s toe in
a tuft of grass (Maoris always tra-
velled with naked feet).—See Poet. p.
lxxix. for a long list.
Katahi ia ka tuhi i tona atua, ara ka
matakite, hei titiro i tona aitua.— Muth.
p. 175.
Ka kitea taua wheke (cuttle-fish), he
aitua he mate; ko te tangata tonu nana
i kite, ko tona whanaunga ranei.
Tera te uira (lightning) kowhera i te taha
rangi, he tohu aitua no te nui matua ka
whakahemo.—Poet. p. 398.
Ngaro noa ana te whenua i te xvaipuke
(flood), pouri ana te ngakau ki nga
korero o tenei aitua.
Kei runga, no tera, ko Te Tapihana, “ Mo
aitua i mua ” ; kihai i roa kua wahi ki
te hoari.
Ki te peke mai ano a Wi, ki te aitua hoki;
heoi, nana ano i kimi i te he mona.
2. Sudden death, destruction, catas-
trophe, calamity; accident, mischance,
casualty; chance. (1 Sam. n. 9, 11;
Nehem. li. 17 ; Job vi. 2 ; Jer. xviii.
17 ; Luke xxii. 23.)
Ina, mate tuku tata tetahi tangata, mate
aitua ranei.
Ka’ te turaki taua e hine ki tou tini i te
po, ko te turanga o aitua, ko aitua te
parea, ko aitua whakatoka. — Ancient
dirge, MS.
Ka kitea te aitua ra (shipwreck).
3. Misfortune, distress, trouble, evil,
danger. (Prov. i. 26, 27.)
He whakaatu tonu i o matou aitua, i o te
paripari nei.
Ka tatata mai ki te tinana te mate, katahi
ka tino kaha te tohunga ki te whaka-
hoki i te aitua.
4. Some undefinable yet dreaded
evil, mischief, retaliation, vengeance,
&c., mostly ascribed to some malignant
supernatural power. (Gen. xlii. 4, 38 ;
xliv. 29.)
5. (Fig.) Disease ; fear, dread; pre-
sage of evil personified.
Te kiri ra ka pau te tikaro e aitua, i hua
mai ai nga he ki a taua.—Poet. p. 275.
Ko nga mea kikino, nga aitua, no te po
era.—Id. p. lxxxi.
Ma Aitua e peke mai, katahi ka kopana
ake te ngakau.
I whakaaro hoki ia, kia whaia mai ia e te
aitua ki Rotorua.
6. (Fig.) Death, personified.
Ka hapainga ake o ratou reo, ka mea,
“ Haere atu ra, e Pa ! i te ringaringa o
Aitua te tangata nui! ”
Ka mea, “ Haere atu, e tama, i te ringa o
Aitua : E taea hoki te aha ? ”
“Haere mai, kia kite koutou, tenei ka riro
i te ringaringa o AituaI ”
Aitua, v/p., -tia ; v.n., -tanga. (See
noun.)
1. To foretoken, portend, signify, &c.
2. To come upon one,—as calamity,
accident, death, &c.
3. To occur; to befall (evil only) ;
to happen.
Ki te mea ka tapepa te kupu kotahi o ta
maua karakia, ka aitna te taua, te patu,
te waka.
Ehara i te tiima anake i mate ki Waitara,
kua aituatia hoki te Kune.
No tona korowheketanga ka tahi ka rite
tana i whakaaro ai, kua aitua nei ano ia
ki Rotorua.
Aituhau, ) 5. Names of malevolent
AitupawaJ demons or spirits; these
two are generally named together in
charms and spells.
Werohia ki te tao na Aituhau, na Aitu-
pawa.—Poet. p. 326.
Ka hinga, ka mate, ka hinga te rakau.
Na Aituhau na Aitupawa.—Id. p. 356.
See Ituhau and Itupawa, the names
of two famed oracular idols ; between
those and these there is some very close
connection, if they are not really the
same under alterations of names, &c.
AitukinOj Name only—perhaps an
appellative for the others. (See Poet,
p. 428.)
Aitumarorohau, s.
Ka nuha, ka neketia, ko Aiticmarorohau
matawha ki te rangi.
Aiwara.
Ainga, 5. Time, act, manner, or place
of copulation, &c. Syn. Aitanga.
{Ainga, family; beginning a family, S.]


Akaa
[26]
Akao
Ainga, or Aainga, s. Act, time, man-
ner, or place of driving, urging, thrust-
ing out, expelling by force, &c. (See
verb A.)
Ka whati pu te riri i te dinga a te uma-
uma tangata.—Poet. p. 111.
Ka tumaki tonu te pane ki raro ki te hoe i
te dinga hoki a te wehi.
Aingahaeretanga, s. 1. Act, time,
manner, or place of being driven, or
carried, along by the wind; of the
driving of sheep, &c.
2. A drift-heap, as of snow, sand,
rubbish, &c.
Aka, s. 1. The common term for
woody creeping and climbing-plants.
2. For long, slender roots. [Tng.]
(Whence Pataka, Pakiaka, for forests ;
te Aka-o- te-whenua, for edible fern-
roots.)
Te ruruku, koi te pu, koi te weu, koi te
aka, koi tamore, koi te awbituria.
3. Name of a creeping plant which
climbs and adheres to lofty trees (Me-
trosideros scandens), formerly used
largely by the Maoris in binding their
fences.
4. A knee-timber for a boat, made
from the larger stems of those creepers.
5. A name for the Kohia, the New
Zealand passion-flower (Passiflora te-
trandra). See Kohia.
6. (Fig.) A genealogical line.
Rarau, he aka matua-iwi.—Poet. p. 274.
Akaaka, 5. [Tng. H. a-a.} 1. Small
fibrous roots springing from tubers, as
of potatoes, kumara, &c. Syn. Wen,
Weu.
Kua tamoea mai e te potipoti e te akaaka.
—Poet. p. 199.
2. Forest.
E noho ana i tona wbare i te akaaka tapn
o Tane.
3. Name erroneously given to the
Akeake (Dodonaa spathulata).by Euro-
peans.
Ko nga pua (hops) e rite ana ki te pua o te
akaaka. (Akaaka, Mod. Eu.)
Akaaka, 1. To produce many small
fibrous roots.
2. To show prominently, expose to
view, the sinews; to appear wiry,
ridgy, as the hands and arms of some
people.
Rii akaaka ana te uaua o tangata nei!
Akakaiku, )s. Name of a climbing
Akakaikuku, J woody creeper in the
forests, very probably the New Zea-
land passion - flower (same as the
following plant), as its seeds are said
to be eaten by pigeons (kuku).
Akakaimanu, 5. Name of a large
creeping climbing-plant, probably the
Passiflora tetrandra (New Zealand
passion-flower), bearing oily seeds.
Akakaipuke, s. A ship’s or boat’s
timber, or knee; portion from the
crooked part of the thick, woody
stems of several kinds of Aka (Metro-
sideros species).
Akakarena, “Akakowhai.”
Akakiore, S. A woody, creeping, climb-
ing-plant.
Akakohia, s- Name of a creeper—
Passiflora tetrandra. Syn. Akakai-
manu.
Akakopuka, Su Akapuka.
“ Ara, puhau noa.”
Akakowhai,
Akakongehe, s 1- A climbing-plant;
soft, supple, kind.
2. (Fig.) For weakly children.
“ Mo te tamariki kaha kore tenei kupu.”
Akakongohe, s. A creeping, climbing-
plant. Syn. Akakohia.
Akakura, S- A red-flowering kind of
Aka (Metrosideros species).
“ ’Ai he akakura hei kokiri.”—Poet. p. 196.
Akamapuhia, S-. (Fig.) Sighing, cry-
ing over root or origin.
Akamatua, s- The trunk, or main
stem, of a climbing aka, which adheres
closely (like ivy) to tall trees.
Myth., pp. 48, 49.
Akamatuaiwi, «• (M^.)-The main stem
of ancestry in genealogical descent.
Rarau he akamatuaiwi.—Poet. p. 274.
Akaotewhen.ua, s. An old name for
the edible fern-root (Pteris esculenta).
Akaotuwhenua, s. Id. With a
slight difference in meaning, as from
interior, inland—i.e., superior.


Akat
[27]
Ake
He aruhe, ko te akaotuwhenua, ko te kai
e ora ai te tangata.—Poet. p. 141.
Akapanahi, 5. As the next following.
Akapirinoa, S. 1. Name for a weak
climbing-plant, only slightly adhering
to tall, robust trees.
2. (Fig.) For a chief, or sub-tribe,
having but very slight connection in
genealogical descent.
Akapita, 5. Supplejack (Bhipogomm
scandens). Syn. Pirita, Pareioao, Tai-
ora, Kareao.
Akapohue, $• Trailing stems of a sea-
side plant, Pohue (Convolvulus sepium).
Akapohuehue, 5. Name for stems of
several weak plants, and low and climb-
ing shrubs, having entangled branches.
Akapuka, s. “ A small parasitical
vine.”
“ Turihunga.”
Akarewa, 5. A kind of taro, with
darkish flesh. See Taro.
Akari, s. For feast, large or esteemed
gift, roe of fish, &c. (Mod. Eu.)
“ Ke noa atu ki wahi ke.”
Akataepa, S. Loosely hanging down,
as a long rope, fastened at one end.
(Myth. pp. 48, 49.) A common term
for stems of several species of woody
climbing-plants, used in binding stakes
of fences.
Akataparenga, A soft (or softened)
stem of an aka, used for muzzling a
native dog.
Akatarere, 5. A loose stem of a climb-
ing aka, to lay hold of and swing by.
Akatarewa, s. 1. A loose hanging stem
of a climbing aka.
E tuku e te tau i te akatarewa.—Old Song.
2. (Fig.) As Akapirinoa.
Akatea, S. Name of a white-flowering
species of Metrosideros.
Rangitihi upoko i takaia ki te akatea.—
Prov. pp. 55, 81.
“ Tenei hoki tetahi tipuna ingoa nui, ko
Rangiti, i takaia te upoko ki te akatea;
tupu iho nei ki tona uri taua whakatau
kii, ‘ Te upoko i takaia ki te akatea.' ”—
(MS. Maori History.)
Akatokai, $• Syn. Akatorotoro.
Akatorotoro, $• {Names of a creep-
Akatoropapa, s.) ing and climbing
shrub, a species of Metrosideros, and
very likely M. scandens, formerly
largely used in binding the pales of
fences to their cross-rails. Syn. Toro-
toro.
Akau, 1- The coast, sea-side, cliff,
narrow sea-beach.
Mau rawa atu i te akau o te moana.—
Myth. p. 64.
2. Beach by side of a lake.
Ka haere i te akau o Rotorua.—Id. pp.
84, 96.
3. Edge of a stream.
Ka haere raua ki te taha o te wai, . . .
ka tu nga puke, he mea ahu ano nga
onepu, ki te akau o te wai.—Poet. p.
lxxxiii.
4. A border.
Akauroa, s. A long, open sea-beach.
Nana (na Tawhaki) te torea i noho ra ia te
akau,roa.
Akawhero, A red-flowering, woody,
climbing creeper. Syn. Akakura.
Ake, part, verbal directive. [H.] Also
used after nouns and adjectives. (One
of the four principal ones in Maori—
viz., ake, iho, atu, and mai, forming
two antithetical pairs.) As some of
its many common uses are peculiar,
though all relevant and of very great
service in forming a correct, expressive,
terse, and elegant sentence, copious
examples are here given. Primary
meaning, Up, including oblique direc-
tion or sideways.
1. Up. [Tng.J 1. Upwards from the
ground, sitting, reclining, &c. :
Whakatika ake. E noho ake. Ka karanga
ake, . . . ka titiro ake, . . . ka
ki ake.— (Prov. p. 101; ter : bon.)
2. Inclining upwards from below
towards the person, men, and things :
Ka mea ia, “ Titiro atuki raro.” Ka titiro
raua a ka kite i nga iwi e takoto ake.
“ Koia ra enei e kite nei korua e takoto
ake ra.”
Ka rongo a Ngatoro, a kua kite atu ia ko te
ope a Manaia tenei te tau ake i tatahi
nei, katahi tera ka karanga atu, “ Taku
taokete, tau marire ake i kona, kua
ahiahi.”—Myth. p. 92.


Ake
[28]
Ake
Noho ana i runga i te tihi o taua rakau e
nohoia ake ra e taua rangapu (= lie
perched upon the top of the tree, under
which—on the ground—the people were
sitting.)—Myth. p. 16.
Tu ana te wahine i runga i te tekoteko o
te whare : . . . ka karanga kau ake a
Tawhaki, “E whae, hoki iho.”—Myth.
p. 48.
Piki tonu atu ki runga ki te tuanui o te
whare, ka pakarna iho, te wahi i rite ake
ai tona iringa ake; katalii ia ka patai
iho, “ Kua mate koe ? ” Ka mea ake ia,
“ Kaore, kei te ora ano au.” Ka mea
iho te tuakana, “ E pai ana ranei ta
tena iwi tana haka e haka ake na ? ”
Ka mea ake ia, “Kao, e kino ana.”—
Myth. pp. 64, 65 (passim).
3. As on a beach rising from the sea :
Ko tona waka toia ake ki uta, tawharautia
ake.—Myth. p. 56.
4. As in growing, vegetables, &c.:
Ka pai te tupu ake o te kai nei I
Ka haere i te ara ka ngawari ake ki o raua
waewae te tarutaru.—Is. xix. 6.
5. As part of body from below
towards head:
Ka kukuate ringaringa ka motokia ake ki
tana ihu.— Myth. p. 21.
He kai ianei ta te tou e ho ake ?—Prov.
Momona ake i taku hiku a taku tongahau.
(Fable : Eel to Codfish.)
6. Above, from below, to where
the person is:
Haere ake ki a matou.
Ka hutia e Maui, ka eke ake i runga i te
waka.—Myth. p. 26.
7. As of daybreak, sunrise,—the next
morning:
Moe iho, ao ake te ra.
Huaki rawa ake te ata e patu ana.
8. As fire, smoke, &c.:
Ka ake nga ahi o roto.—Myth. p. 61.
Me whakairi ki runga ki te whare, ma te
pawa e ngau ake ka mate.—Id. p. 64.
9. As thoughts, feelings, &c. :
Ka mea ake taku ngakau i roto i a au.
E korero ana ahau inaianei i nga korero o
nga Maori mo tenei ritenga ; eliara i oku
ake.
Tohu ake au, e, Kei te ora tonu! (on
awaking from a dream.)
10. As from inferiors against their
superiors—e.g., sons against parents ;
slaves, workmen, &c., against chiefs :
Kei pera tatou me nga tama a Rangi raua
ko Papa, tahuri ake ano, kei te whaka-
aro patu, &c.—Myth. p. 12.
11. Forwards ; onwards ; in time, or
space ; soon, shortly (paulo post fu-
turum):
Mea ake ; taro ake ; tenei ake; ho ake—
(this last meaning, also, “ Go on ; I will
follow.”)
III. A litble further on, beyond
present place, &c.:
Neke ake koe.
Haere ake.
Kei runga ake i au.
Tae atu ki uta ake o Hauke, tokowhitu i
mate.
IV. Advanced in prosperity :
Katahi ka tino koni ake te iwi.
V. As a comparative affixed to
adjectives in the ascending and in-
creasing scale :
Nui—kia nui ake ; roa—kia roa ake ; rahi
—kia rahi ake; maha—kia mahaa/ce;
&c.
VI. As a superlative, with negative
particle preceding:
1. Better, best:
Kaore he witi o te ao e pai ake ana;
ekore ranei e pai ake ki a koe ?
Ka pai tena hoiho ; pai ake pea tenei te
mea whero ?
2. Greater, greatest :
Kaore nei he mana i puta ake i to te Kuini
o Ingarani.
VII. A little more or longer :
Ka mea mai ia, “ Kia moe ake ra ahau.”
1. A little while (future). (Job x. 20;
Ps. xxxvii. 10; John xvi. 16-19).
VIII. More ; besides ; else ; also:
Tenei ake.
Tetahi ake.
Ko te aha ake ?
K ah ore ake aku.
Kahore ake he mea ora i kitea, ko te kuri
anake.—Job xl. 5 ; Is. v. 4.
IX. Implying nearness :
1. Place:
I waho ake o te awa.
Me nga wahi o waho ake o aua pa.—
1 Chron. xiii. 2.
2. Time (past) :
I waiho ake e au i konei na.—Myth. p. 26.
3. Persons :
Ma enei ake e korero.—Acts xxiv. 20.
X. Henceforth; hereafter. (Ex.
xi. 6) :
Ko tenei, e te whanau, ko te tangata e
hiahia ana ki toku turanga haere ake,
ka uru nei au ki a Kawana.
He mahi pai rawa ta era iwi mo a ratou
nei tamariki, kai waiho he ake i te ao
nei.


Ake
[29]
Ake
Ko nga kura Maori nei hei whakamanawa-
tanga atu mo nga tau e haere ake nei.
— denoting successive future :
Ao ake te ra ka haere : and so on, in narra-
tion.
Po iho, ao ake : ditto.
Me te tuku ano i ana tamariki ki te kura,
a, tau ake, tau ake, kia toru tau, kia
wha, kia rima, kia maha noa atu.
XI. Own ; one’s own :
Haere ana matou ; a, i te ara, ka mate taku
hoiho haunga toku ake; no Ribara te
hoiho i au.
Me te maipi, hei rakau ake maku.— Myth.
p. 65.
Maku ake ano.
Tona ake potae.
I tona whare ake.
Tou ake matua wahine.
Tona tuakana ake a Haimona.—(John i.
41.)
Mo te pa tuna i kiia e Ngatiwhauroa, i a
ia ake taua mea ; i mea te Kingi, i a ia
ake.
XII. Implying volition — of one’s
own accord:
Ka patu ano tetahi i a ia ake, nui noa atu
te he.
Notemea na taua iwi i tiki ake i patu oku
tangata o Ngaitahu, no kona hold matou
i patu ai i o ratou hei utu.—Job xli. 8.
XIII. Inherent :
Nona ake.
No tona ngakau ake.
E ta, kahore ou ake kaha ; no te Atua te
kaha.
E wawata puku ana tetehi me tetebi ki a
raua ake.
XIV. Independent of anything ex-
ternal :
Erangi tena, he toka tu ake.
XV. Denoting totality; together ;
amounting to (in number), summed
up ; about.—Commonly with haere ;
sometimes with ntpeke, or tauia (p. of
tatail), preceding:
Rupeke ake ki runga ki taua waka nei
hokorua.—Myth. p. 36.
— a, rupeke ake hokowhitu.
Katahi ka rewa te taua a Whakatau,
haere ake kotahi te mano o nga waka.—
Myth. p. 41.
Haere ake nga kupenga a te tangata nei,
he mano tini noa iho.—Myth. p. 141.
I te 10 o nga ra o Maehe, tuturia ana he
ope, haere ake e rua rau.
Ka haere atu la, haere ake e ono rau.
Haere ake nga arawhata o tenei huarahi
tekau ma wha.
Haere ake nga tangata i ora mai i nga poti
i taua mate e rua tekau ma rima.
XVI. Another—thing or person :
Tenei ake.
Ka kicea iho e te Hokowhiti, e Houtake-
take, e mea ake, e mea ake.
XVII. No other (with negative) :
[H. a-e.}
Kore ake he tangata i kite.
XVIII. The place to which one is
going:
Maku e haere ake.
Mau e haere ake.
Ka mea mai nga wahine ra, “ Ae, haere
ake."—Myth. p. 138.
XIX. The place just left—house, &c.:
I haere ake ahau ki te kainga.
He aha koe te tae ake ki au ?—1 Sam,
xxviii. 19.
Tae ake ana nga rongo o Ngatiruanui, a
puhare ana ahau ki nga kino i mahia
nei e te tangata Maori.
XX. 1. The time just past, lately;
time past, with nei, or ra. (Numb.
xxiv. 12) :
Kua ngaro ake nei.
Ka maoa hoki nga hua o nga rakau kua
korerotia ake nei.
I whakaaro ahau ki tena i te tau kamahue
ake nei.
2. The time already mentioned;
the same:
Ae ra, i taua po ake.
XXI. The point of time when; at
the time of:
Haere ana a Wahieroa, patua ana e Tipu-
akinui ka mate; mate rawa ake a
Wahieroa kua puta tana tama a Rata ki
te ao.
No nga ra o toku kaumatuatanga ake,
taea noatia tenei wahi.—(2 Sam. xix. 7 ;
Ps. cxxix. 1, 2 ; Is. xlvii. 15.)
[N.B.—A Maori correctly speaking
of anything having happened long ago,
in the time of his childhood, &c.,
would use ake (as here); but if he
should say the same was done in the
time of his father or grandfather
(though possibly the same time, or
even later), he would use iho: as
downwards from them — upwards
(growing) of him.]
XXII. Shortly ; presently ; soon ;
soon after; anon :
Kitea rawatia ake e rere ana he kaipuke ;
kitea noatia ake he tiima ! heoi, rangona
rawatia ake e rere ana i uta, he Reriwe I
XXIII. Again :
Korerotia ake, kia rongo ai ahau.


Ake
[30]
Ake
XXIV. To go on with regularly,
successionally; gradation:
Ekore koe e tau hei wliai ake mo te taki
aho ariki.—Poet. p. 412.
XXV. Constantly, from that time,
or act:
Noho rawa ake a Maui ki reira.—Myth.
p. 140.
XXVI. Offhand; without premedi-
tation. {Jonah ii. 4 ; Matt. xiv. 30.)
XXVII. Implying suddenness, quick-
ness; instantly; “ there and then,” as
we say.
Ehara ! hopukanga ake e Papa.—Myth.
p. 6.
He iti te wahi i whakaakona ai, mohio
rawa ake.
Koia tona he o tera, ko te tino mea whiua
ake hopu ke ki te ata 1 (Ps. xxx. 2;
Nahum i. 4 ; 2 Kings iv. 41; Rev. i. 12.)
Me whakamarama ake taku, kahore he
taiawhiotanga.
Ka rupeke, ka tu te kaumatua nei, ka
karanga, “ Kia rongo ake.”
Ko nga maunga e ngawha ana, ko etahi o
nga awa tuawhenua ake i te ru.
— including also totality :
Haere waka tonu ki roto ki te puku, ko
nga tangata ko te waka pau ake.—Myth.
p. 161.
Ka haehaea taua ika nei, ka kainga, pau
ake te kai ki te puku.—Id.
— often with its opposite, iho, in
the same sentence, by way of anti-
thesis or antiperistasis :
Taka iho, mate ake.
Patua iho, ka mate, kainga ake.
Haehaea iho, taona iho, kainga ake.
Ka mea iho ano a Ngatoro ki nga hoa,
“ Kaua e kai ake i muri nei, kia hoki
iho ra ano ahau.” Ka piki atu ia;
kiano i ata eke noa ka kai ake te hunga
o muri, a ka eke whakauaua noa tera.
XXVIII. Implying a following—in
the road, journey, &c. : Ho ake—“ Go
on and I will follow.”
Ka mea nga wahine nei kia haere ratou ki
te kainga. Ka mea atu te tangata nei,
“ Ae, ho atu.’7 Ka mea mai nga wahine
ra, “ Ae, haere ake.” . . . Haere ake
te hunga nei, okioki ake.—Myth. p. 138.
Ka mea iho ano te tangata nei, “ Haere
ake i muri nei; kia hohoro ake te haere.
—Id. p. 148.
Haere ake ki muri i a au.—2 Kings ix. 18,
19.
Piri tonu mai taku hoa i muri tata ake
oku.
XXIX. Implying the reason for
doing, acting, &c.:
Kai runga ko Hemi Tapeka, “ I tu ake ai
he mihi atu ki te kara.”
Ko Horomona Hapai, “ Ko te mea tenei
i tu ake ai, he mihi ake,” &c.
XXX. Implying a consequence :
Ka moe a Hotunui i te tuahine o Te Whatu,
kia puta ake ki waho ko Paka; ka moe
a Paka i te tamahine a Te Whatu, kia
puta ake tana ki waho ko Te Kahurere-
moa.
XXXI. Implying being passed by,
omitted, left; to go beyond for some-
thing else :
Ko nga korero o te po i tuhituhia ra e taua
komiti, mahue ake i a ratou.
A ka tae ki te tekoteko mahue ake, ka
mahue nga maliihi, &c.—Myth. p. 21.
XXXII. Implying something at
hand of expectation:
Me mau te pake mo te ua ake.
Ka mea atu ia, “ A, hei konei whakarongo
ake ai.”—Myth. p. 10.
Hei konei noho ake ai, whakarongo ake ai.
—Id. p. 15.
XXXIII. Used elliptically for to
ascend, climb, attain :
“ Tahi ake nei au te hiwi ki Parahaki ” =
“ Now I climb upon the ridge of Para-
haki.”
XXXIV. As the antiphrasis of iho
= downwards:
Ahu ake ahu iho = Up and down.
E te rupe, rupe iho rupe ake.
Kei tai, heke iho heke ake.—Poet. p. 362.
XXXV. Used euphemistically in
proverbial sayings, &c., instead of iho,
but correctly meaning that word,
understood, e.g. :
E rite ana ki te ruruhi, koia tenei tona ki,
“ Heoi ano ta te tangata e haere ake
ana, he harahara wai nga kanohi.” E
tata ana ia ki te mate, koia i kia ai, “ he
tangata e haere ake ana; kaore, e hoki
iho ana ki te mate,” &c.—Prov. p. 103.
In some few instances ake is used
colloquially for iho, and vice versd,
where either applies equally.
Ake, s. A small tree, having very
hard wood with dark veins, of which
the Maoris formerly made their chiefs’
carved staffs and defensive weapons.
{Dodonoea spathulata.) Syn. Akerau-
tangi ; which see.
[Obs. It is a curious fact that this
plant, which is dioecious, was well
known as such to the old Maoris.
The male one is properly the ake, and
from this only their war implements,


Ake
[31]
Aki
&c., were made. The female, was
called akeake.}
Akeake, $• 1- The female plant of the
foregoing, Ake.
2. A shrub (Olearia avicennifolia).
Akeake, ) adv. For ever; hence-
Akeakeake,) forth; evermore. Syn.
Aketonuatu. (Is. xxxii. 17.)
Akenei, part. Denoting 1. Nearness;
present time.
Ko te mea e whawhakia akenei e toku
ngakau.
Ka tikina atu e au, e takoto akenei.
Takoto akenei = what lies just before one,
or handy, in place, space, or time—both
objectively and subjectively.
2. Recently :
E tangi ra ki to matua kua ngaro akenei.
3. Henceforth; henceforward :
4. Denoting fewness; limiting, les-
sening number :
Ho mai ki au etahi, kia ruarua akenei.
Heoti ano nga mea i ora ko nga manu hia
hia akenei.
Akenei, Akenei, 1
Akenei, Akenei, Akenei,)
For some time to come. Syn. Ake,
ake, ake; but that grammatically
appears to be stronger. (Ex. iii. 15 ;
1 Ghron. xvii. 14: xxix. 18.)
Akepiro, 5. A small tree or large
shrub (Olearia for fur acea).
Akerautangi, s. 1. A small tree
(Dodonoea spathulata). The higher,
straight, and taller trees of this species.
Named from its harsh, dry, coriaceous
leaves emitting a stridulous sound
when agitated by the wind. Syn.
Ake, its common name.
2. A spear made of its wood :
“ Ko ta namata riri, he kahikatoa, he
paraoa, he akerazitangi.”—Poet. p. 212.
I|werohia pea ki te akerautangi-.—Id. p. 112.
Na te aha i tukituki te upoko no Turiri,
ki te kapuanga te akerautangi.—Id. p.
95.
3. (Fig.) for war, fighting :
Ko te wai raparapa te tohe atu ki te ake-
rautangz.—Old Song.
Aketauranga, $• A shrub.
Aketonuatu, adv. For ever. Syn.
Akeakeake.
Ko taku kupu tena ekore e motu i a au
aketonuatu.
Ko enei tangata hei taugaca tumau ki a
koe aketonuatu.—Is. ix. 7.
Akewharangi, s. A small tree
(Olearia cunninghamii).
Akengokengo, adv. To-night, when
dark (4.)
“ Akengokengo tatou tuku ai i te kupenga.”
Aki, v.p. -na; v.n. -nga.
1. To strike suddenly and violently;
to hit with a club, stick, axe, fist, &c. ;
to dash down.
Akina, e ta, te poaka ki te toki, kia kaha.
Nana I i akina taku taha ki te whenua,
koia i kore ai.
2. To beat, as waves against a cliff.
E aki kau ana te tai ki Ahuriri.—Poet. p.
87.
Whakarongo rawa atu, ko te tai anake e
aki ana.
Koia kau te aki a te moana ki te pari 1—
Myth. p. 93.
3. To beat, as a storm. (Is. xxv. 4 ;
Acts xxvii. 18, 20.)
Te maunga e tu noa mai ra i te akinga a
te hautonga.—Poet. cxi.
4. To beat, as a flood. (Job xl. 23.)
5. To be tossed, as by waves.
I akina ki waho ki te moana tu hohonu.—
Poet. p. 242.
6. To strike, as a vessel on rocks.
No waengarahi po, ka tino kuku, aki tonu.
7. To batter; break in a door,
fence, &c.
He mahi nui rawa ta raua ki te aki mai i
te tatau.—(2 Sam. xx. 15.)
8. To shut a gate, door, &c., vio-
lently ; to bring together suddenly and
with force; to bring close to, up to, or
against; to carry on, to extend a fence
to join on to another by junction or
intersection; to describe or lay out
boundaries of lands so as to meet other
bounds.
Akina te tatau.
[N.B.—Doors of Maori houses were
made to draw along in a groove on the
threshold and shut close up with a
bang against the side-post.]
Ka timata i Raruraru . . . ka aki ki
te tau o Te Puni, ka huri ki te Tuaraki,
ka aki ano ki te timatanga.
To bring together suddenly and
sharply with force; to bite with the
incisors, as a thread in two. [H.]
Ma te paroparo e aki.


Aki
[32]
Aki
9. To jerk, bolt, pull down on or
over, as a trap-door :
Titiro rawa atu, ka tango ki te pu wiwi, ka
rere iho taua wahine nei ki roto ki te
koruarua, akina iho taua pu wiwi nei,
ana I me te poko.—Myth. p. 13.
10. To flog, thrash violently with
green branches. (Judges viii. 7.)
11. To push with a thrust or blow;
to gore, to butt with horns. (Ezek.
xxxiv. 21; Dan. viii. 4.) Eib. Mod.
12. To shove or push along with
force; to launch, as a canoe from the
beach.
13. To run in; to thrust into with
force, as a ship or vessel into a creek
in a storm (Ac£s xxvii. 39) ; . as with
a sickle into a ripe standing crop (Bev.
xiv. 15-18). Eu. Mod.
14. To strike together, as the knees,
from fear'. (Dan. v. 6 ; Nahum ii. 10.)
Eu. .
15. To strike down, to beat, as the
rays of the sun. (Jonah iv. 8.) Eu.
16. To throw away with aversion ;
to cast aside, or to a distance: (a.) as
dirty things; (5.) as fear, &c. (Job
xv. 4.)
17. To throw stones at; to stone.
(Ex. viii. 26; 1 Sam. xxx. 6 ; Dan.
ii. 34.)
18. To beset; close in on, as in
fight. (1 Ghron. xix. 10.)
19. To drive, to rack, as clouds in
a gale.
20. To blaze, to burn furiously, as a
wooden house on fire. See Akinga,
Ex.
21. To ram down a ball or cartridge :
“ Taihoa, kia purua ano e ahau taku pu ” ;
—e akina iho ana e ia nga mata.
22. To be urged by hunger :
Me pehea hoki ? ka akina atu e te mate
kai.
23. To force one’s way through thick
bushes; to proceed, as through a
trackless country:
Ka haere tonu ma te tau ki Parekaroro,
ka aki tonu atu ki Maunga Kawa, ka
huri iho, haere iho.
24. To carry on an attack in words;
to persist:
Kataina atu ana I a, e akina mai ana.
25. To stir up anger; to agitate.
26. To churn, to dash in a vessel.
(Prov. xxx. 33.) Eu. Mod.
27. To vex with questions; to re-
proach :
Kei akina e te waha.—Poet. p. 11.
Kei hori, e te ngutu, kei tara e te rau, mo
aki kore.—Id. p. 202. (J°b 19, 3.)
28. To oppress ; ill-use :
He tini nga tangata i akina kautia.
A, i murua te tangata mokai, pahiatia ana
hoki, i akina kautia.
He tamaiti ahau hei akinga ma te riri.
29. To join on; to follow, in close
sequence, as seasons. (2 Sam. xxi. 1.)
Akiaki, vqj., -NA; v.n., -NGA. (In
part, a frequentative of the preceding
verb.)
1. To strike often ; to collide fre-
quently, as trees in a gale; to clash.
2. To excite, stir up, set on, en-
courage. (1 Kings xxi. 25 ; Bom. xii. 1):
Ka whakangahau kau atu te tokomaha ki
te akiaki, “ Kia kaha ! kia kaha !”
3. To hasten, stir up, rouse, in
travelling:
E akiaki mai ana.
Ka tae ano te hunga akiaki ki au 1
4. To urge vehemently ; to be urged;
to impel by words, &c. (Job xxxii. 18.)
5. To instigate; to incite. (Prov.
xvi. 26.)
6. To deceive. (Jer. xx. 7.)
7. To agitate.
8. To exact; to act rigorously with
respect to work. (Is. lviii. 3.)
9. To overdrive, as a flock. (Gen.
xxxiii. 13.)
10. To find fault with ; to.blame :
He aha te kupu ka tito mai ai ki ahau ?
Akiaki noa, akiaki noa; kii kore, kii
kore, ha !—Poet. p. 411.
Akiaki, adj. Rigorous; pressing;
vehement; urging; blaming.
Akiaki, 5. 1. Rigour.
2. Collision, clashing, urging, in-
citing, blaming.
3. A name for an old worn clothing-
mat :
“ Kanukanu, pakarukaru nei; ara, Tawhe-
tawhe nei; koia taua akiaki. ’


Akitu
[33]
Ako
4. A sea-bird, a species of Tern
(Sterna frontalis). Syn. Tara,
Akiaki, Kai-, s. Taskmaster; over-
seer of labour : oppressor; flock-driver.
(Ex. n. 6; Job xxxix. 7; Zech. x. 4.)
Mod.
Akiakinga, 5. Act, state, time, or
place of collision, clashing, urging,
blaming, oppressing, agitating, &c.
Akiko, adv. At a distance from home,
but in the neighbourhood.
Akiraho, s. A small shrubby tree.
Akiri, v. p., -tia; v.n., tanga.
1. To cast or throw with force; to
toss ; to project; to throw away. (Acts
xxvii. 18, 38; 2 Sam. xx. 21.)
Ko nga ika kikino i akiritia ki waho.
E akiri ana te tangata i nga riwai.
2. To sprinkle, throw up, as dust.
(2 Sam. xvi. 13; Job ii. 12; Acts xxii.
23.)
3. To divulge.
Ki te akiri au i aku korero katoa, ka mea
koutou.
Akiri, s. A casting, tossing, propelling,
throwing away.
Akirikiri, v. p., -tia; v.n. tanga.
(In part a frequentative of the pre-
ceding verb.)
To throw away, cast aside, continu-
ously ; to throw, to project, by hand-
fuls—piecemeal.
Tikina ana e raua, hura ana nga toetoe o
te whare, akirikiritia ana.
Akiritanga, s. Act, time, state, place
of casting, or throwing away, &c.
(See verb.)
Akitahaki, v. To throw on one side,
as branches, &c., in the path.
Akitanga, s. End or point of a stick,
&c.; peak, summit of a crag, hill, &c.
Syn. Akitu.
Akito, v. 1. To be slow, dilatory.
See Akuto.
2. To drag, draggle, behind, as a
loose, flowing garment.
Akitu, v. To close in to fight.
Akitu, 5. 1. The end, point of a stick.
2. Summit, peak of a hill, crag,
mountain.
3
Akitutanga, s. Base of a hill.
Ko te rohe ki te tonga, ko te akitutanga o te
Maunga-o-te-totara.
Akinga, 5. Act, state, time, or place
of smashing, breaking, dashing, strik-
ing violently, &c. (Matt. vii. 25.) (See
verb.)
— time, state of hunger :
I te akinga ano a te hemokai.—Lam.
v. 10.
— of storm :
Te maunga e tu noa mai ra i te akinga a te
hau tonga.—Poet. p. cxi.
— of illusage, oppression :
He tamaiti ahau hei akinga ma te riri.
— of fire in a house :
Ka horo iho hoki te tahuhu o te whare ki
raro i te akinga a te mura o te ahi.
Ako, v .p., -na ; v.n., -ranga. [R. Tng.
H. ao. S. a’o.J
1. To teach; to instruct; to com-
municate ; to inform; to give direc-
tions, intelligence, &c.
Ka akona e tona tupuna ki nga karakia.—
Myth. p. 57.
I akona ki te wai o Turuahine.—Poet. p.
248.
E hoki koe ki to wahine, kei ako mai ki te
hae. (2 Sam. xviii. 5 ; Ps. xxv. 9, xc. 12 ;
Jer. vi. 8 ; Matt. v. 19; Lztke xii. 12 ;
John vii. 35.)
2. To direct; to command. (Is.
n. 6.)
3. To recommend how to act.
Ka mea atu taua hunga, “E haka!” A
pera atu ana me nga kupu a Tama-te-
kapua i ako iho ra.—Myth. p. 65.
4. To teach, or prompt, what to say
or do.
Tenei aku kupu, katahi ano au ka whai
korero; ko era kupu he kupu noa, he
kupu ako.
5. To show how to do anything.
6. To intrust; to charge; to com-
mission for a specific purpose. (Gen.
xxviii. 6; Ex. iv. 28.)
7. To learn ; to teach one’s self.
E ako ana i a au ki te tuhituhi.
E karakia ana nga tohunga ra, e akona
tonutia atu ana e Rata i konei, ka
mohio atu ia.—Myth. p. 56.
8. To try, to learn—i.e., to cohabit
before marriage. [H.J
Kua ako ki te mahi, kite rawa i te huhi e!
—Poet. p. 164.
Ako keu iti, te taha i a te koha. Ako
hihiri ai e roto ki te mahi.—Id. p. 120.
See Whakaako.


Akoko
[34]
Akua
Ako, adj. Taught, instructed, prompted,
dictated, shown.
Ako, s. [H.] 1. Teaching, instruction,
learning, charge. (Gen. xl. 4 ; Prov.
i. 2, 3, 7, 8.)
2. Counsel, warning, advice. [T.]
Ako, Kai-, s. Instructor, teacher,
prompter, instigator, encourager.
(More usually Kai-whakaako.}
Akoa, adv. (For Ahakoa, abbreviation.)
Akoa ra kei roto te tangata kei waenganui
o te pa.
Akoakenei, adv. Shortly, soon.
E haere ana aliau ki Ruamahanga akoa-
kenei.
Akoako, v. p., -na; v.n., -ranga. [H.
aoao. S. aoa’o.] To prompt, remind,
help the memory.
Akoako, s. 1. Time, place, manner,
or act of reminding, dictating, helping
the memory.
2. The way, the thing taught or
learned. [H.]
Akoako, adj. |H. aoao.] Prompt,
ready.
Akoako, v. To split readily; to part
asunder easily, as some woods—e.g.,
Bewareiva, Kahika, and Totara, for
shingles and laths, and posts, rails, and
pales for fencing.
Erangi tenei he rakau akoako ia.
He maro tena rakau, ekore e akoako.
Akoako, adj. Splitting easily, as some
woods.
Akoakoranga, s. Act, time, manner,
matter, or place of reminding, prompt-
ing, dictating, warning, &c.
Akohaere, v. To teach, instruct in
travelling. [H.]
To go about itinerant teaching,
preaching.
Akokorero, ) s. 1. The
Akokorerokauwhau,) teaching of
genealogical knowledge and recitations.
2. Instruction of what to say;
promptings.
Ko te tikanga tenei o tenei mahi o te ako-
korero.
Ko te tikanga o tenei mahi o te akokorero-
kauwhau.
Akona, adv. There, at a distance;
that place ; those parts.
Kan ore he korero o konei; engari pea
dkond e whai korero ana. (Ezek. v. 15;
xxix. 11.)
Taorotia dkond te pukepuke na, kia tika
atu ai.
Akonei, adv. Here; this place; these
parts.
Naku dkonei, neke atu i tenei wahi ki tera
vvahi; naku hoki dkonei e mahia e kou-
tou.
Tena pea e mahue dkonei i a au.
Mehemea i noho ture kore tenei kainga,
aianei ekore dkonei e nolioia.
Akoranga, S. Teaching; learning;
act, time, place, subject, manner of the
same. Things taught or learned.
Akoro, 5. Name for the moon on the
fifth day (with some; but see Okoro).
Akouru,
Akonga, S. . [Tng. S.] 1. A scholar,
student, disciple (Matt. ix. 14 ; x. 1,
&c.) ; one under instruction.
2. Matter or thing taught.
Katahi te pukupuka pai ma te tamaiti
Maori, he ngawari no nga kupu hei
akonga.
3. One learning, trying to teach
one’s self.
Taku akonga ake, tenei tonu ki te mahi.—
Poet, p 257.
Aku, pron.poss.pl. [Tng.] My, mine ;
of me, of mine.
E hine, dku, e tangi nei ki te kai.
1. A man’s own begetting.
Aku tamariki.
2. A man’s own saying, forming,
making, &c.
Aku hanga; dku mea; dku whare ; dku
rangatira ; dku withine, &c.
Ko dlvu, atua, ko dku, taniwha, dku, kara-
kia, ka rite ai ki ahau.—Poet. p. 412.
Inaianei, kahore dkib wehi; kua kahore
kau dku wehi.
Aku, v.p., -na; v.n., -ranga; -tanga.
To scrape off, as anything loosely
adhering to a dish or vessel.
Akuna iho te rihi.
Akuaku, V. p., -NA ; v.n., -RANGA.
1. To scrape out, to clean out, as
the refuse from any vessel, or from a
Maori earth-oven ; to scratch, to throw
up loose earth with the hands. [Tng.]
Akuakuna te ipu, kia pai.


Akuto
[35]
Amaru
2. To take the stones used in baking
out of an earth-oven.
Akuakuna nga kowhatu.
3. To pick or gather up fern-roots for
food in the field or plot where they are
being dug.
Teraka ke ia, e akziaktL ana i nga roi.
He ohu na Kahn, ka tu ; ko te iwi ano
nan a te ohu ki te ko i te aruhe; a ka
mutu, ka kii atu a Rakai, “ Kaati hoki
koe ; tuku iho hoki koe ki te akuaku.”
4. To be all gone or absent, as
people from a village.
Ka riro anake te iwi na, ka riro anake ; ka
rupeke, ka poto, akuaku ana.
Akuaku, s. A scraping out or cleaning
the inside of any vessel, &c.
Akuaku, Kai-, 5. One who gathers
up fern-roots when newly dug for food.
Akuakuranga, v; Act, time, manner,
or place of gathering up fern-roots for
food, &c. (See verb.)
Akuanei, adv. [T. H. auanei.}
1. To-day (future) ; presently,
shortly, directly, now. (JSos. x. 2, 3.)
Akuanei ano pea ka pakaru to maua
whare i te hau.
2. Hereafter.
Akuanei pea, e toru, e rua ranei, tau, ka
pakaru te Paremete.
Akuenei, adv. To-day (future) ;
shortly, &c. Syn. with preceding.
A, ka tokomaha ki te pera akuenei.
Akunei, adv. [H. aunei. R. akonei.]
To-day (futtvre); soon. Syn. Akicenei.
Ka rere ki runga karanga ai, “ Whaia, e
nga tane ; akunei te hanga kino o tenei
wahine ka matakitakina e era tangata.”
Akuku, v. To grate, as a canoe on a
shoal, bar, &c.
Akura, s. Part of a Hinaki—wicker
eel-pot or trap; the mouth of the
eel-pot that is introflexed ; the intro-
verted mouth of an ink-bottle.
Akurama.
Akuto, adj. 1. Dilatory; sluggish;
tardy; slow.
He kaipuke akuto taua rakaurua.
. He tangata akuto ano ia, na tona waewae
hape hoki akuto marie te haere.
2. Late, as a season.
He tau akuto tenei.
Akutotanga, s. Slowness ; tardiness
(spoken of old age).
Ka poro ra hoki taku akutotanga.—Poet.
p. 174.
Ama, s. 1. The stage or platform be-
tween two canoes joined together. See
Wakaunua.
“ Ka kapiria nga waka erua, ka koriritia
nga rakau nga kurupae, ka kaupapatia
arunga hei punga ika; koia ia te ama,
ko taua mea o waenganui o nga waka.”
2. The covered or decked fore-part
of a canoe.
Hei roto koe hei te ama o to taua waka.
Ka tomo ki roto, katahi ka pehia e Maui
te ama.—Myth. p. 26.
(So Rongouaroa saved his life from
the enemy by stowing himself snugly
away in the forehold of the war canoe
of the foe.—“ Trans. N.Z. Institute,”
vol. xiv., p. 10.)
3. The outrigger of a canoe.
[S., outrigger of a canoe. T., out-
rigger of a single canoe. H., longitu-
dinal stick of outrigger. Tng., larboard
side of a canoe.]
Amai, v. v.n, -tanga.
1. To rage, to toss, as the sea. (Is.
lvii. 20.)
2. To be giddy, light-headed, through
fear and looking down from a height;
as from the edge of a high, perpendicu-
lar cliff, or a tall tree.
Ka titiro iho ki raro, amai ake ana i te
teitei o te pari, o te rakau ranei.
A m A.i 3 adj; Tempestuous, stormy, as
the sea ; giddy, light-headed.
Amai, s. 1. Swell on the sea; stormy
waves; tempest.
Rere tonu ratou i te akau, a kite atu ano
ratou i te amai e whati ana i uta.
E rarunga ana i taku matenga nga amai.
2. Swimming of the head, light-
headiness, from fear.
3. Headache.
4. The back part of the head of a
Maori axe-helve, where bound round.
Amaitanga, 5. Tempest at. sea;
time, manner, &c., of the sea raging.
Amaru, s. 1- A creeping, climbing,
woody plant, a red-flowered species of
Metrosideros.
Ka kite mai i te Rata, i te Amaru t e
whero atu na i uta nei ?


Amiki
[36]
Amio
2. Having a severe or forbidding
countenance. Syn. Tztkumaru.
Amaru, v. 7?., -TIA. To be shaded, as
by a house or trees, at noon, &c.
Kua amarutia te wahi nei, kia haere tatou
ki ko noho ai.
Amaruru, (?) A bird.
Amata, adv. Formerly. Syn. Namata,
Anamata.
AYna.tia.fia, s. A small canoe with an
outrigger.
“ No nga motu tenei waka te amatiatia.”
(Strictly speaking, not truly Maori,
though seen by me in use sixty years
ago in the Bay of Islands.)
Amene, p-, -a, -tia ; v.n.,
1. To collect; to gather together ;
to prepare.
— as goods, property, kinds of food;
stores. (Gen. vi. 21; Job xxvii. 16;
Prov. xiii. 7 ; Eccl. ii. 8; Mic. i. 7.)
— as gloom of countenance. (Joel
ii. 6; Nahum ii. 10.)
Amengemenge, v. To be curly, as
the hair of some dogs.
Amengemenge ana nga huruhuru o te kuri
nei.
Syn. Koromengemenge.
Ami, 77., -a, -tia ; v.n., Syn. Amene.
1. To assemble.
2. To gather together, collect, store
up.
Katahi ka amitia nga tangata, nga kai,
nga whenua, rupeke katoa ka haere i te
heke ma runga waka.
Heoi, amitia mai ana e Hohepa he witi.—
Gen. xli. 49. See also 1 Kings x. 26;
Ps. xxxix. 6.
3. To keep covetously.
Ka ami i te moni mana.
Amiki, v.p., -tia, -a; v.n., -tanga.
1. To gather together, to collect;
to glean ; to dress a chief’s hair by
gathering it up into a top-knot on the
crown, and there fixing it with a large
dress-comb.
Amikia mai nga otaota hei whariki mo
tatou.
2. To assemble.
Kia amiki mai te tangata katoa.
3. To go round about.
Amiki, s. 1. A gathering together,
collecting, gleaning.
2. An assembling.
3. The hair gathered into a top-knot;
also, cut close behind; crop. [H. amu.]
4. A roundabout way.
He amiki tena ara. (Urewera tribes—
interior.)
5. A large stand-up dress-comb,
formerly worn by chiefs.
Amikij adj. Collected, gleaned.
He kupu amiki etahi o ana kupu.
Amikitanga, s. Act, time, place, or
manner of collecting, gathering up,
gleaning; assembling, &c.
Amiku, 'y- To go round about.
Amine, v. To assemble; to gather
together. Syn. Amene, Whakaemiemi.
“Kua tiro a Mea ? Kei te amine mai i
nga tangata.”
Amin v. p., -a, -tia ; v.n., -tanga. To
move in a circular or roundabout direc-
tion ; to circumambulate. [H. To
move silently to and fro.]
Haere ki tenei taha, amiotia mai.
Amioa, amioa, ko te rua o nga hokinga
mai.—Poet. p. 410.
Amio, 5. [Tng. Twisted ; crooked.]
1. A ceremony connected with the
dead, in which a branch of a shrub is
passed or waved from shoulder to
shoulder.
2. A going round, revolving. Syn.
Azvhiotvhio, Kopikopiko.
Amiomio, v. 1. To go round re-
peatedly.
Haere atu ki te amiomio i te nuku o te
whenua.—Poet. p. 268.
2. To circle in flying.
“ Karoro tangi amiomio rarunga o Tapu-
teranga.”—Prov.
3. To turn round and round, as the
wind, &c. [Tng. To change repeatedly,
as the wind] ; to whirl round.
Amiotanga, s. Act, time, manner, or
place of going in a roundabout way;
of starting together in company.
Puta kihea, puta kihea, te amiotanga nei I
Hei rangi amiotanga tenei apopo, ka
whakatika, ka rewa, ka haere.


Amo
[37]
Amoku
Amo, 5. 1. A framework on poles, on
which anything is carried horizontally
on the shoulders of men; a litter on
poles for weak, sick, or wounded
persons, to be borne on the shoulders
of the bearers ; a bier. (2 Sam. iii.
31.)
2. [S.J A pole, or long staff, for
carrying by over the shoulder. (Ex.
xxv. 13, 15.)
3. Sacred food carried in procession,
or by a tabooed messenger, to the
Ariki (chief priest) to be eaten. (Myth.
p. 107, 108.)
4. A priest who goes in the van of
the army to the fight.
5. A reconnoitring party, who pre-
cedes the main body to the fight.
[Tng.]
Amo, Kai-, The bearer of sacred
food to an Ariki t or chief priest.
— A bearer, carrier of a litter, &c.
Amo, adj. Bearing, carrying shoulder
poles, &c.
Amo, V. p., -HIA, -WHSA ; V.H., -HANGA.
[H. T.] 1. To bear or carry on poles
extending over the shoulders, as a
litter. [S.] (Ex. xxvii. 7; Josh. iii.
13, 14.)
2. To carry, as a pole, paddles, oars,
gun, &c., lengthwise over the shoulder.
Ka mau te tangata ki tana ko, ka amohia,
ka haere.
Amo ake, amo ake kura nonoi e; amo ake
au i nga ihi, &c.—Poet. p. 358.
Amo ake te toki nui a Tane.—Id. p. 374.
Amo ake au i taku hoe nei.— Myth. p. 111.
He mea amo te pu a Te Awheroa.
3. To carry sacred food to an Ariki
or principal chief.
4. To lead an attack, to charge the
foe, to rush to fight.
Ka amohia te iwi, ka tiketike ki runga.—
Poet. p. 10.
I amohia e au ki te tao.—Id. p. 80.
Ka oma whakarere nga tangata ki waho,
paku ana te amo.—Id. p. 161.
“ Ka paku te amo a te manu waitai, ka
whakatopa mai te Toroa,” &c. (Fable,
Battle of the Birds.)
5. To reconnoitre. [Tng.J
Mana e amo te ripa ki Aotea.
6. To groan, as from pain. (1.)
Ka rangona atu e ia nga reo e aue ana, e
amo ana.
Amoa, 5. The outermost coating of
thatch on a house.
“Ko te amoa o te whare, ara ko nga
maihi o waho o te utu o te whare.”
Amoamo, £>., -hia; v.n., -hanga.
To carry frequently lengthwise on the
shoulders, as poles, rafters, &c.
Amoamo i nga rakau i nga kaho ki te taha
o te papa o te whare putu ai.
Tana matire ko matire amoamo.—Poet.
p. 322.
Amoamohanga, s. Time, act, or
place of carrying on the shoulders.
See Huki.
Amoh.au, s. The tohunga (priest) who
carries tne hau before the army, in
going to fight.
“ He amo i te hau o te taua, kia toa ai ki
te riri.”
A lioki kau noa mai hoki a te amohau.—
Poet. p. 429.
Amohanga, s- a carrying on shoulder
poles ; a pole, paddle, spears, oars, &c.,
borne on shoulder.
Te amohanga matire.
— Act, time, place, manner of carrying.
— A thing to bear or carry by on the
shoulders. (Ex. xxx. 4.)
— The lower long beams of a zuhata or
food platform.
Amohia, vntj. Rush ! used in charging.
Amnhadv. From former times
down to the present.
Amohoa noa nei.
Amokapua, S- A priest who recites
before fighting.
“ Ma tana kupu ka toa ai te tangata ki te
riri.”
Amoko, s. The raupo (bulrush) thatch
placed on the lower layer of kakaho
(reeds) on the roof.
Amoko, ad/. Tattooed.
Ko to kiri amoko te tirohia mai na, ka
taka ki roto nei.—Poet. p. 133.
Amoko, V. p., -tia. To thatch; to
fasten on raupo (bulrushes) on the
sides of a house. Syn. Titpuni.
Haere mai ki te amoko nei i te whare.
Amokura, $• a bird (Phaeton rubri-
cauda).
E rite ana to haere ki te haere o te
amokura e rere mai ana i te moana.


Amua
[38]
Amuka
Amopo, s. Carrying secretly by night. '
“ He ingoa tenei no te kawenga tupapaku
ki te huna ki tona urupa kia ngaro.”
Amorangi, s. The priests, or sacred
persons, of the fighting party, who
form the van.
“ He ingoa tenei no te hapu tohunga, hapu
hatete, atua Maori.”
Te amorangi ki mua, te hapai 6 ki muri,—
Prov.
Amotai, $• 1- Swell on the sea.
2. Name of a certain spell, or
karakia.
Amowahie, 5. The arm above the
elbow.
Te amowaliie o te ringaringa.
Ko te iwi o te amowahie o te ringa i maru
rawa.
Amonga, S- The act, time, or manner
of carrying on the shoulders. [S.
burden.]
Nga mahi a te amonga o te kai nei a te
taniwha.—Myth. p. 155.
Ko te kete tuauri hei amonga mahau.
Hei amonga mahau ki te putake o nga
korero, e whakarewaia ra ki runga te
pakihiwi, he hikitanga he hapainga he
amonga.—Part of an ancient Charm.
Amu, 5. Scrap-eater: a term of re-
“ He kupu taunu tenei mo te tangata mate
kai, e hamuhamu ana.”
Amiia.j adv. [H. mua.] 1. Future;
the time to come. See Mua.
2. Hereafter. (Dan. ii. 45.)
— with akenei; shortly, soon.
Me huihui ano tatou amua akenei.
— with tonu atu ; for ever. (Ex. xix.
9-)
3. Before, in place, position.
E akina ana amua amuri ona.—1 Chron.
xix. 10.
Amua, 5. 1. The fore-part, front of a
place.
Kua taiepatia amua o toku kainga.
2. The fore-part, van, front, of a
travelling-party or army.
Ka eke amua ki Tikikimaurea.—Myth. p.
202.
3. People of old, former days.
He hanga whakama hoki ki amua te pitoto
ki te kai.
No taua tangata nga pepeha amua.—Poet.
p. viii.
See Amuri, and note difference.
Amuaniu, 5. Grumbling, murmur,
discontent; reviling; complaint; sulky
grumbling.
Amuamu, Kai-, s. A grumbler, a
discontented person.
Amuamu, v. p., -tia; v.n., -tanga.
[H. T.]
1. To grumble at; to murmur; to
be discontented.
Ka hoki mai a Maui ka noho, a roa rawa,
kei te noho noa iho ia i te kainga, me te
whakarongo ki te amuamu, ana wahine,
ana tamariki, ki tona mangere ki te huti
ika.—Myth. p. 20. (Ex. xvi. 7, 8; 1 Cor.
x. 10 ; Luke v. 30.)
2. To find fault.
Mehemea e amuamu ana etahi o nga
rangatira o te runanga ki taku korero e
pai ana.
Kahore he amuamu a Ngatipahoro.
Kaua aku hoa e kii, he amuamu taku ki
au ano.
3. To complain of food, treatment,
wages, &c.
E amuamu ana koe ki taku mahi me taku
utu ?—Matt. xx. 11.
4. To grudge.
5. To remind others of their obliga-
gations (from a superior), or of benefits
conferred.
Naku koe i ora ai (Saved, perhaps from
drowning).
Naku koe i whiwhi ai ki te taonga.
6. To ungenerously recall past
favours to mind.
Amufl.mil, adj. Grumbling, murmur-
ing, growling, discontented, complain-
ing ; reminding of benefits received,
&c.
Amuamua, adv. Shortly, soon ; time
to come; ere long; before long.
E kite ana ra ahau amuamua akenei.
Amuamutanga, s. Grumbling, mur-
muring, discontent; time or place of
such. (Ex. xvi. 7-12.)
Amuamunga, 5. Complaining, mur-
muring, discontent.
E waiho mai na e koe hei amuam/unga
mai mau ki au.—Numb. xi. 1.
Amukati, 5. A term of reproach.
Syn. Amu.
“Ko wai ra kei te mohio ki nga ra o
Amukati.”—A proverb.


Ana
[39]
Ana
[N.B.—Amukati is said to have been
a foreigner who visited New Zealand
before Cook.]
Amuri, adv. [S. am/udi. H. muli.
Tng. amui.]
1. Hereafter.
Kia mangu i roto kia ma i waho, amuri
kia mau ki te whakapono.
2. Henceforth. (Gen. xxxv. 10 ; Jer.
iii. 4.)
3. Afterwards. (Prov. xxix. 11.)
4. Behind, in place. (Is. 1. 7;
1 Chron. xix. 10.)
5. Behind, in garment.
Purehe ana to kahu, kahore i pai te tui,
amuri pukorukoru ana.
[N.B.—Note the difference between
these two adverbs of time: amua =
henceforth, and amuri = ditto. This
latter seems to be more definite, more
restricted; closely following some
person, doing, &c., or some event or
thing which has taken place, or will
shortly do so.]
Amuri, s. The hinder parts, posteriors.
(1 Kings vii. 25.)
Amuritanga, s. The time coming,
the coming time.
A, he ahakoa ka hinga te rakau, ka pihi
ake ano, ka tino tupu i te amii/ritanga.
Ana, verbal part. [H.]
I. Commonly and strictly used in
forming (1) the present, and also (2)
some of the past tenses of verbs, which
may be properly termed aorist or
indefinite, as :—
1. With e preceding the verb ; e.g.,
e haere ana; e oma ana—(he) walks,
(he) runs (lit. “ now walking, now
running”).
[O&s. (1.) The verb, with e preceding
and ana following, may always be
translated as a present participle. (2.)
Frequently the particle nei is used
instead of ana, and bears a similar
meaning; but nei and ana are never
used together.
2. Without e preceding the verb:
e.g., haere ana ; oma ana—(he) walked,
(he) ran (lit. walked, or was walking;
ran, or was running); used largely
and elegantly in narrating past events,
&c., to show that the action spoken of,
though now past, was then present to
the mind’s eye of the speaker.]
[N.B.—But one of their old legends
begins thus (it is that of the hero
Maui) : “E noho ana a Maui raua ko
tona papa ko Taranga ” : and in a
letter I received on a certain occasion,
a few years ago, this sentence occurs:
“Tenei au ka tuhi atu i te utu o to
reta i tuhi mai nei koe, e haere ana
koe ki to mahi.” These instances of
the usage of the present tense for the
past, though strictly correct, are, how-
ever, unusual.]
II. In many cases ana is the par-
ticipial termination of verbs, equal to
the English ing : as haere ana—walk-
ing, korero ana—talking, noho ana—
sitting ; but it is not joined to the verb,
and has several peculiarities. 1. It is
not joined to the verb because (1) the
particle nei may be used instead ; and
(2) because any qualifying word or
words, and also a verbal directive, may
come between, as : (a) “E hanga ana i
te whare,” or “E hanga whare ana,” or
“E hanga mai ana i te whare ”; (b) “E
haere riri ana," or “E haere riri attb
ana ”; (c)11 Ptbta nui tonu mai ana taua
ope.” This seems to be done to shorten
the sentence, a common and prominent
feature in the Polynesian language.
2. Some of the peculiarities attending
its usage are the following; it may be
used with past and perfect particles,
and in the future tense, e.g. :—
1. With perfect and pluperfect par-
ticle kua, and then denoting continu-
ance, abiding :
Kua piro ana nga Maori kakari tonu ki nga
pakeha. (Ps. Ixxix. 1.)
2. With the present particle ka,
denoting the same:
Ka whati kau ana te tai.
Ko tenei waka ka tau ana ki Whakatane ;
te waka o nga wahine ka u ana ko
Maketu.
Te ao ka rere mai na runga ana mai.—
Poet. p. 396.
Ka tuku atu ana ki roto Waikato.—Poet.
â–  p. 385-6.
He marama, e ! Ka rere ake ana i te pae.
—Myth. p. 159.
3. With the past particle i :
I tu ana te wairua ki te ao.
4. With reference to the future :
Ka hei ta raua, apopo au kite iho ana i a
raua.—Myth. p. 200.
Also, with other verbal and adverbial
particles, as kia, kei, tenei, &c,


Ana
[40]
Ana
5. With kia:
He aha i waiho ai te manuwhiri kia kara-
nga ana?—Myth. p. 168.
Ka noa e waiho kia whio ana mai.
Kia haere mai ana ahau. (Ex. xiv. 12 ;
xxiii. 11; Luke xiii. 35.)
6. With kei :
Kei hauora ana i te iwi ka ngaro e i
Kei toi ana te when u a e i I—Poet. p. 50.
Kei hine ana au.—Id. p. 195’.
Kore te mamae, kai kii noa ake ana.—Old
Song.
7. With tenei:
Tenei ana hoki, kei te tira i hoe i te waka,
&c.—Myth. p. 161.
Used also absolutely :
Ae ana ahau ki tena.
Amine ana ahau.
Another peculiar usage, but of
similar meaning, including totality :
Tahi mai ano i te ihu, a te noko atu ana;
tahi mai ano i te noko, a te ihu atu ana.
—Myth. p. 50.
Ka karangatia hoetia i runga i nga waka,
“ Ko te Kahu,” atu ano i waho nei, a
roto atu ana.—Id. p. 144.
And again :
Ko nga pakeha hoki o te tira a te Makarini
kaore ana e mohio ki te reo Maori; kai
te wliai noa kia kitea tetahi hei hoa
korero, kaore ana e kitea.
Ana, adv. 1. Verily, indeed, truly.
Katahi ka mohio taua ruahine nei, Ana,
he tinihanga ta tenei tangata.—Myth. p.
24 ; passim.
2. Own ; much like ake :
Kia korua e noho ana ki to korua ana kai-
nga.
Ka ara taua tokorua ki runga korero ai i
a raua ana moemoea.
3. As an intensitive; much as ra,
or raiua:
Kaore ana he auahi; ka pa he aumoana e
mate.—Prov.
Kaore ana!
4. Here, also:
“ Ka rongo tonu au ki a koe e whakahua
ana i o ratou ingoa, Ko Maui-taha, ko
Maui-roto, ko Maui-pae, ko Maui-waho ;
ana ko ahau, ko Maui-potiki ahau e noho
atu nei.”—Myth. p. 11.
5. And it came to pass ; now :
Ana, i a Houmaitawhiti, he whawhaita-
nga.—Myth. p. 63.
6. Then and there :
Ana ka mau te rongo.—Myth. p. 67.
Ana, kei te hanga i te taiepa oneone.—Id.
p. 19.
Ana, tae rawa atu hoki a Mahuika ki te
whare, kua mate noa iho i te ua.—Id.
p. 24.
7. There! there (it is) ! There (they
are)!
Ana ! kei raro kei Motutapu.
Ana ! te korero kei a Te Makarini.
Ana ! nga kai a Tamatahei.—Prov. p. 1.
8. Whenever ; at the time of ; when
(future).
Taku hara, ana hara au, me homai.
Ka maia koe, ana kite koe i te pae whaka-
kuta ?
Hei whakakaha i a ratou ana haere.
Ko to te Maori ritenga tawhito tenei ana
ka marenatia.—Myth. p. 134.
He pena ano hoki te ngakau o te Maori
ana toro i te arolia.
Kei te karangaranga i te hau, &c., kia puta
mai hei whakamate i nga mano o
Manaia ; ana te rongonga o Tawhirima-
tea ka tukua mai nga hau.—Myth. p. 93.
9. If it were so ? perhaps ; doubt-
less. (Generally used ironically.)
[Ana means “If,” past, in Samoan.]
Ana, no te tiriti i Waitangi ta koutou riri?
He riri tika ki a koutou tenei? Ana he
pai, te whakaputa hohoro i te riri.
Ana he ingoa nui atu i te Atua !
Ana no Roma anake nga kingi o nga tini
motu !
Anaano, adv. Certainly; then cer-
tain—indicating inference, sure result.
Ki te tohe koe, ko te poka ano tena e rere
ai koe, anaano to hoa e noho mai ra
(in prison).
I tenei wa kua motuhake ko tatou anake,
me enei ture e purutia nei e tatou,
e pohane tonu nei te ngakau ki te matau-
ranga, anaano he aha.
Ana, intj. And lo ! Behold !
Ana / tou kore na !
Ana ! ta te uaua paraoa !—Prov.
Ana ! ta te tangata tana riri!
Haere ana ki te tino parenga, a taka iho;
ana ! mate ake !
Tukua tonutia te hau me te ua, ana!
pouri kerekere te moana.
Ka whiua ki te moana, ana ! rere tonu I—
Myth. p. 21.
Tino whiua atu ana ki te whenua, ana!
tino kanga ; ana! to hoa I Ehara, ka
oma a Maui.—Id. p. 24.
Ana ! toia : a, a, a, toia.—Canoe Song.
Ana, s. [H. S. T. Tng.] 1. A cave,
cavern, den; hollow place in a cliff or
side of a hill; steep cliffs on sides of a
narrow river.
2. An excavation ; hollow in a tree.
3. The place in the west beneath
the horizon. Syn. Rua.
“ Ka rere te ra ki te ana.”—Song.
4. (Fig.) The dark hole of ignorance.
Ko au i kapea e te mano ki te ana o te
kuaretanga noho ai, a ko tenei kua pi-
watawata te kora o te mabara ki au.


Anaha
[41]
Anako
Anaana, adv. There ; there, in that
direction or place indicated.
Ka riro atu kai waho ; anaana kai kona.
E mea atu ana tetehi ki tetehi, Anaana,
kei konei, kei kona.
Anaana.
Ko tunutunu whenua, ko anaana whenua.
—Poet. p. 105.
Ana, pron. 1. Poss. pl. of Tana—his,
hers, its. [T. S. Tng.J
“ E tu ana rapea te hanga nei a te kai-
puke. Ananaa! . . . ana tima, ana
manuwao, ana rakaurua, ana rakau-
tahi!”—Meiha Ropata, in writing from
Melbourne.
2. 3rd p. sing. Of him, of her, of it,
with preposition a, of, prefixed and
coalescing [See A, of, belonging to] ;
better, perhaps, be written as pro-
nounced, aana, also in order to distin-
guish it from 1.
Ka haere mai a Tokomaru raua ko Aotea,
ka u a Tokomaru ki Mowhakatino me
ana kai ano ; ko Aotea i eke ki Patea
me ana kai ano, te kainga o Turi.—Old
Legend of Kumara.
3. Used absolutely — of children,
wives, sayings, doings, &c.
Heoi ano, ana.
Of children :
Ka puta ana ki waho (then enumerated);
— ana ko (ditto).—Myth. p. 114.
Of fish :
“ Kaore ano ana.”
Heoti ana.—Id. p. 117.
Ana, adv. 1. Yes; even so; truly;
it is so :
Ana, e tika ana.
2. Namely; viz.—that is to say :
Ka tatau mai to ratou whaea i ana tama,
ka mea, “ Ka tokowha ; ha ! nowhea to
koutou tokorima ?” Ka mea atu a Maui,
“ Nau ano au.” Ka tatau ano te
ruahine ra, “ Ana, Tokowha ano koutou ;
katahi hoki au ka kite i a koe.”—Myth.
p. 10.
Ki te Maori, ko te whenua o te karete, etna
ko te wharekura Maori.
adv. Yes; it is so. (4.)
Anae,(
Anae, adv. Only. Syn. Anake.
Ka tau anae ko te aroaro o te Atua.
Ua anae ! Ka pai; ka tau, ka rawe, anae /
Anaha. Syn. Anaana.
Anahau.
“ He ahuareka, he pai, he ngakau rawe.”
Anahe, adv. Only; barely; singly.
Syn. Anake.
Anaia, adv. Now ; here.
Anaianei, adv. [Tng. Anaiani.]
Now; present time; to-day. (Bttth
ii. 7; Prov. xii. 19; Ezek. vii. 3;
Mie. vii. 4.)
Anake, adv. [R. T.] 1. Only, barely,
merely, singly, simply.
2. All. [R.]
Ko matou katoa i rongo anake.
Ko nga tangata o te kainga i te moana
anake.
Ka noho, ko raua anake i to raua kainga,
ko te nuinga i Maketu anake.—Myth.
p. 92.
3. Alone ; single, solitary ; this and
no other.
Katahi ka karanga, “Ko ai koe?” He
rere anake a Maui ki runga ki te taki-
taki ; ko te hoa, rere ana ki roto ki te
wai.
Ka puhia; no te pakunga, he ohomauri
anake.
— Term used for extolling, excelling,
surpassing; beautiful; great, excellent;
with the adverb koia prefixed.
Koia anake! Ngatiterangi- koia -anake
(name of a tribe in Hawke’s Bay) ;
Kahura-a7ia/ce (the name of the highest
isolated hill there).
Anake, v. p., -tia ; v.n., -tanga.
To be alone ; to be only; to be once
seen, done, said, &c.
I kitea anaketia e ahau ki reira.
Ki a ia anake ai.
Anakeanake, adv. Intensitive of
anake—only.
Ko te ara o Hema turuturu ki te rangi
mau anakeanake.—Myth. p. 50. (Some-
times Nakenake.)
Anaketanga, s.
Ko to putanga anaketanga mai ki tenei ao.
Ko taku makanga anaketanga taku e
mahara ai.
Anakoa, adv. Yes; yes, indeed; even
so ; so it is.
“ He wahine ano ranei tau?” “ Anakoa.”
“ I pena te korero a o hoa ?” “ Anakoa.”
Anakohe.
Anakoia, adv. Yes ; it is so ; it is as
he (or they) say.
Anakowhatu, s. A cave in rocks and
stony precipices. (Myth. p. 159.)


Anatu
[42]
Anewa
Anaku, adv. Assent; sharp, half
reproachful, play on words.
Koia koe i kii ai, “ Nau ena tarutaru ; nau
anaku?” “ Ae ; naku.”
An am at. a., adv. 1. Hereafter.
2. Ancient. See Namata.
Ko anamata parekura hoki.
Tenei hoki te whakatau kii anamata.
3. Assent: Truly, just so; even as
you say. (6, 7.)
Anana, intj. 1. Here !
Ka mea te kai-hopu, “Tuaina ki te waiI”
ko etahi, “ Anana 1 ki uta.” “ Anand !
ki te wai; kei ora ia.”—Poet. p. vii.
2. How great! (Is. xiv. 4.)
I te ata ka pa te mate ; anand! Ehara i
te hanga tonamate.
Anand ! tana tahuritanga mai ki te riri
mai.
Anand! ano kei te wai e tawheta ana.—
Myth p. 22.
Ka titiro atu au whaka-Nepia; anand 1
ka puta ake toku ngakau aroha.
Ananahi, adv. [T. S.] Yesterday;
generally with i, or no, prefixed, instead
of a. See Nanahi.
Anao, ) adv. Yes ; just so : form of
Anaoa,) assent. (6.)
Ka mea etahi, "Anao! e tama, he aha
koa i kiia ai ? he rawe ake nei.”
Anarahoki, adv. Then ; then it was,
or it came to pass.
Anarahoki, ko Rihara atu ki a ia, “ E
hoa,” &c.
Anarea.
Ka papa te rangi, ko Ana ki te rangi, ko
Anarea te rangi.—Poet. p. 211.
Anaputarua, 5. 1. A cave with two
entrances.
2. A low term of reproach for a
lewd woman.
Anataetae. (Poet. p. 326.)
Anatatea.
Anatuatua, s. A cave, so called from
its kind of earth. See Onetuatua.
“ Te whai anatuatua, anataetae.” (Charm.)
—Poet. p. 326.
Anatutakina, 5. A small cave, made
to fasten up with a wooden door.
“ He koto rakau te tutaki.”
“ Kia u, kia mau, te tutakitaki.”—Poet.
p. 326.
Anau, adv. Assent, ironically given.
“ Nawai ra te mea nei?” “Naku, pea.”
Ka kii mai te Mea, nana te ui, “ Anau.”
Na taku wairua i anau kau.—Poet. p. 331.
Anaua.
Auaunau, Steep, precipitous, high.
“ He teitei, no te tirohanga ake.”
Anaura, 5. A red, or red-brown, or
glistening cave.
Anaunga. A place.
Anawawaro, 5. A resounding cavern J
rumbling.
Ko Anawawaro te Rangi.—Poet. p. 211.
Ananga, 5. The moon on the sixth
night. Syn. Mawetib, Tamateatutahi,
&c.
“ Tupu kerekere, tupu ananga.”—Tui's
Song, MS.
Ane. “ Kiri ane.”
“ Ane noa, ane noa, te kai a te parenga
koaa.”—Haka, song.
Anea. “Wai anea.”
Aneane, /w. To be sharp-pointed, as a
spear.
Aneane tonu te mata o te huata.
Aneha, See Anene.
Anehu, adj- Fine, small, as rain.
He ua pukohu, he ua tarariki, te ua anehu.
Anei, pron. pl. demonst. These.
Anei katoa kei au.
Syn. Enel. See Au a.
Anei, adv. [H. T. S.J 1. Here.
Tahuri ke ana, anei ra te korero.
2. To-day ; abbreviated.
Kati! anei koe te kara ka tu.
3. Sometimes for ranei [which usage
is also H. S.]
Aneke, adv. Only. Syn. Anake.
Katahi a Hinekura ka tu ki runga ko te
tarakau aneke, ka whakahuatia te haka.
Anene, ) a. Pleasing, nice,
Anenenene,) sweet, to the taste.
“ He reka no te kai ki ton a pukorokoro.”
Anewa, v. [H.] 1. To be weak, in-
different, indolent, sleepy.
2. To look vacantly ; to stare about
without moving the head.
Haere noa ana nga kanohi ki tera wahi ki
tera wahi, anewa rawa ana; e rapa ana
nga mahara i roto i a ia.
3. To be giddy; to feel light-headed.
See Abohi.


Aniwa
[43]
Ano
Anewanewa, v. 1. To enter easily,
as a parcel or package into a box or
case.
Anewanewa ana te urunga o te mea nei ki
roto i te pouaka.
2. To be beautiful. Syn. Neioanewa.
Anewanewa, adj. Beautiful, hand-
some. Giddy.
Ani.
Anikohu. (?) See Anukohu.
Ko au tamoea ra e te anikohu, te mahea-
tanga ko wairere.
Aninanina, v. p., -tia.
Kua aninaninatia te mahunga ki enei tu
korero.
Anini. 5. Headache.
Anini, v. v.n., -tanga. To ache
in the head; to have a headache.
[To be giddy ; to reel, R.]
Unuhia atu ra te taniwha i te rua ; tere
anini ana ki roto Mapere.—Poet. p. 341.
Anininini, s. Headache.
Anininini, v. To stumble, to
reel. (Ps. cvii. 27.)
Aniu, v. v.n., -tanga. To feel
shame.
Haere mai ki te kai I aniu ke ana.
Ka nui taku amcitanga i muri i a koe.
Aniuaru, s. The name of an ancient
legendary canoe.
Katahi ka taraia tona rakau hei waka, ka
huaina te ingoa Aniuaru.—Legend of
Wahieroa.
Aniutanga, 5. Shame; time, place,
or feelings of shame.
Aniwa, v. and adj. To enter with
difficulty, as anything into a box;
hard, difficult.
He aniwa te uru noa o te mea nei i roto
i te pouaka.
Aniwa, Bark, heavy, thick clouds;
thunder-cloud.
“ He pouri kerekere, titiwha ana, he wha-
titiri.”
Wai aniwa.
Rangi aniwa.—Poet. p. 116.
Aniwaniwa, S- 1- The rainbow. [H.
Anuanua.]
2. A variety of potato (from its
coloured appearance).
3. A whirlwind.
Aniwaniwa,
Whaia te whai kia aniwaniwa.—Poet. p.
286.
Taku kainga, kihai turia e au ki te^aniwa-
niwa.—Id. p. 388.
Aniwaniwa, adj. Dark-coloured, as
heavy, cumulus clouds in summer, in-
dicating coming storm with rain. See
Whakaaniwaniwa.
Aniwatanga, s. Difficulty; hard-
ness.
He pono ano ra taku aniwatanga ki te
kai a Tiki.—Poet. p. 19.
Ano, verbal and adverbial particle. An
important word, in general use, and
rather difficult clearly to explain
briefly in all its many meanings;
radically it seems to carry with it
through all its various shades of mean-
ing the equivalents of existence, cer-
tainty, possession, and intensity; of
being, of doing, of possessing, and of
remaining. It can be judiciously used
as an auxiliary to indicate several of
the significations of the English verbs
be, do, and have. See examples.
1. To be, &c.:
Ko ahau ano—I am. Ko koe ano—Thou
art. Ko ia ano—He is. Ko matou ano
—We are. Ko ahau ano i reira—I was
there. I tae ano ahau ki reira-—I have
been there. I a ia ano ahau e noho ana
—I was dwelling with him. “ E Hoani,
kei hea koe?” “ Tenei ano ahau”—
John, where art thou ? Here am I.
(Ex. iii. 14 ; John iv. 26; Rev. i. 18.)
2. Still; denoting continuation, ex-
istence (implying was and is remaining).
E noho nei ano—Still dwelling (there). [H.J
“ I pai mai ranei a Hoani?” “ I pai ano.
—Was John agreeable (to the offer
made) ? He was and is agreeable.
Nei ano—Still here.
“ I kite koe i tetahi tangata e haere atu
ana?” “I kite ano ”—Did’st thou see
any person going away, or forwards ?
—Saw (and he) was still (going on).—
(Rev. xxii. 11.)
Ka hinga te rakau pai, a he rakau pai ano:
ka hinga te rakau kino, a he rakau kino
ano.
“ Kahore oti he tangata ki tena kainga?”
“ He tangata ano.”
E rere ana te waka rara, e kitea atu ana
ano.
Erangi, me waiho ano ki a koe ano to
kingi, ki runga ki tou whenua ano;
hua iho ana ona hua ki kona ano.
Na, he kii atu tenei naku ki a koe, Ka kore
ano te taewa; heoi ano, engari me ho-
mai he raihi.
3. Yet; implying to be done, &c.,
hereafter (commonly following a nega-
tive adverb):


Ano
[44]
Ano
“Kua kai koe?” “ Kahore ano”—Hast
thou eaten (had thy meal) ? Not yet.
“ Kua riro atu ranei a Hoani ?” “ Kahore
ano.”—Has John gone away ? Not yet.
“ Kua hoki mai ranei a Hoani ?” “ Kahore,
ano.”—Has John returned hither? Not
yet.
“ Kua pari ranei te tai ?” “ Kahore ano.”
—Has the tide begun to flow ? Not yet.
4. Again:
Ka riri ano koe ki au !—Thou art again
angry with me.
Kei tutu ano koe.—Be not thou disobedient
again.
Korerotia ano e koe, kia rangona e te toko-
maha.—Let it be again told by thee, that
it be heard by the many.
Kua hoki mai ano! — Again returned
hither !
Engari; tonoa mai ano koe e te Kuini, kia
hoki mai.—Maori chiefs, to Sir G. Grey,
1861.
Heoi ra, ka titiro te hunga ; a, roa noa iho,
ka titiro ano.
5. Also, therefore, consequently.
(1 Sam. xix. 21, 24.)
Kotikoti tonu atu taua mango hei maunu,
e 5 matau i te haerenga, e 5 ano ika.
6. Until, even until (something to
be done or to take place, expressed or
understood):
“E pehea?” “E whawhai ano rapea;
ano ka kahore noa he manawa.”
Kia tae ra ano ia.—Until he arrives.
Ka timata i te Rongotuawa o Patiki, ka
rere . . . Hapenui, rere ki Patiki ano.
“ Ki te haere ahau, ka tuhi atu ahau ; ki
te noho iho ano, ka tuhi atu ano.”
7. Own:
Mana ano.—For himself.
Ki tona kainga ano.—Josh. xxiv. 28.
Naku ano taku; nana ano tana.—Mine is
my own ; his is his own.
Kotahi ano taku.—My own is (but) one.
8. Self; selves :
Me titiro koe ki a koe ano.
Nana ano ia i hinga ai.
Ka mea, kia patu raua i a raua ano.
Ko to tungane; kia kanga iho ano korua ;
kanga iho ano ki a korua ano.
9. The same as, representing another,
absent.
Ko Ruta ano ko koe.
Ko au ano taku iwi.
10. As if; like as if. (7s. xi. 9;
Rev. i. 14, 15, bon.)
Ano me kahore i patua I
Ano, e koe, tau katoa te wehi nui ki roto ki
ahau.
Ka tu te tangata, ka tirotiro, ano e hoki
atu ana.
He unahi kau te hiako, ano he ika.
Ano ra, he boa, me te ra e whiti iho nei te
whakaaro o Pikiao.
Te tino whakatikanga o Hatupatu ano ka
oria e te hau ; e wha nga tikitiki o te
lama, ano te raukura, kei te au o Karewa
e noho ana.—Myth. p. 101.
11. And when :
Ano ka tae a Hoani ki te whare.—And when
John came to the house.
Ano ka tae mai ia ki taua wahi kino.
Ano ka pahure atu taua tangata, ka titiro
atu ahau ki tona tuara.
A ka haere ratou, ano ka tae noa ki te
puke.
12. And then ; thereupon. (2 Sam.
i. 4, 5, 8, 14; 2 Kings ii. 9; iv. 43;
Is. vi. 8.)
13. Definitive :
Ko on a ra ano korua kokoti ai.
Kia to ano te ra, ana! ka oho, ka tutu.
Hei reira ano koe kite ai.
E hara nga kupu nei i te mea ako mai na
te Kawanatanga ki a matou ; te Kawana-
tanga ano te Kawanatanga, matou ano
matou.
Kei te taniwha ranei, kei te tangata ano
ranei.—Myth. p. 156.
Ngaparepare ano Ngaparepare, Ruatema-
hue ano Ruatemahue, Tautepaoa ano
Tautepaoa.
14. Different:
He tangata ano tena.—Lit. A man truly is
that (one spoken of); implying, but not
the man meant.
He mahi ano ta te tawa uho, he mahi ano
ta te tawa para.—Prov.
He tangata ano i tohea i te wa e ora ana;
he tangata ano he mea whangai ki te
waipiro; he tangata ano i a ia e takoto
mate ana; he tangata ano kahore ano
kia rite noa nga tau ; he tangata ano ka
6 nga tau, &c.
15. Intensitive; confirmatory:
E tika ana ano tana korero.
Koia ano, e hoa. Ko nga poaka ano nga
poaka.
“ E kii ana koe, Naku ? Nana ano.”
Ko taua ano taua, ko raua ano raua.
E kii ana te whakataukii, “ Mua ano mua,
muri ano muri.”
Ka mea mai nga tama, “ He aha tau e
kata?” Ka mea atu ia, “Kao; he
kata noa ano.” Ka mea mai ano nga
tama, “He aha ano tau e kata?” Ka
mea atu ano ia, &c.—Myth. p. 199.
16. In the sense of only :
Kahore i nui aua hoia, kotahi ano rau.
Kotahi ano te ra i haere ai te tutu, pokai
katoa nga wahi o Taupo.
17. In the sense of all:
“ Na, ko taku kupu tenei, Kahore te
whenua i hanga noatia e te Atua mo te
tangata kotahi; i hanga te whenua mo
te tangata ano.”—Te Tirarau.


Anu
[45]
Anuhe
Tenei te haere nei, kia kite; a, kua kite
ano; a, kia kite ; kua rongo ano, a, kia
rongo, &c.
18. Immediately: “ there and then,”
as we say :
“ Kua kai a Mea ma ?” “ I kai ano, haere
ai.”
Te putanga ake ano i te pae, kua aho noa
te marama. (Mark i. 12 ; Libke xix. 11;
xxii. 60 ; Acts xii. 23 ; Rev. iv. 2.)
19. Aclv. Nevertheless; notwith-
standing; allowing all that. (Gen.
xviii. 30.)
Ano ra, whakarongo mai.
20. Adv. Moreover; furthermore;
yet again:
Ano pa, te tangata nei hei hoa haere.
(Often with ra; sometimes, ra hoki.)
(Matt. xi. 8, 9 ; Luke vii. 25, 26.)
21. Adv. Since; inasmuch; seeing;
seeing that (usually with hoki) :
Koia ranei tehea ko te ara tika ? ano hoki
e tika tahi ana.
Ano hoki, kihai i he te nohinohi rawa.
22. How! as an exclamation. (2
Sam. i. 25, 27; Job vi. 25.)
How great!—Ano te nui o te kaipuke !
Hpw good I—Anc te pai o te koheka I
How terrible I—Ano taua atua te wliaka-
mataku I
How glad !—Ano, e koe, te hari o toku
ngakau I
Ano ano, v. 1. To cock up, present
posteriors in defiance, &c.
Anoano ana te kumu ; ka puano to kumu.
“Rupe te anoano.”—Poet. p. 415.
“ He kupu whakatoi tenei mo te tou.”
2. (Undefinable.)
“ Anoano, maharahara ; awangawanga.”
Meaning : Insult seen ! to be remem-
bered and repaid with interest.
Anonokia, v. To be very distant,
nearly out of sight.
“ Kua tawliiti rawa atu, i te tirohanga atu.”
Anu, s. [H. T.] 1. Sharp, cutting,
keen, cold air.
Ka tokia to kiri e te anu matao.—Poet. p.
315.
Kawea te tamaiti ki te wliare, kei mate 1 te
anu.
Kati pea, ka hauhau koe i te anu o waho.—
Myth. p. 66.
Ka tongia e te anu matao, e tahu e I
2. Sharp, cold air, indicative of
frost; having a peculiar feel, from off
the snow.
Ka puta mai te anu o Tongariro ka matao
te whenua.
Kei pehia koe e te anu, o te hukarere.—
Poet. p. 171.
“ Whai anu, whai anu, te puna,” &c.—Poet.
p. 430—Charm for burns, scalds, &c.
3. Disagreeableness of cold weather,
or of offensive smells.
Kei te anu o te paroro i hu nui mai nei na.
— Poet. p. 45.
— A complaint of the eyes.
Anu, adj. Cold, keen, cutting, as winds
in winter; sharp; disagreeable.
“ Whai anu, whai anu, te puna.—Poet. p.
430.
Anuanu, v. p., v.n., -tanga.
1. To stink; to emit an offensive
smell.
A, he kino nga whare, he anuanu pu hoki
no aua whare.
2. To loathe.
Kei te anuanu au ki te wai rorotapu.—
Poet. p. 401. (Ex. vii. 8 ; Ezek. vi. 9.)
3. To be disagreeable to the feelings,
as cold was to the half-naked Maoris.
[H. T.]
4. To feel sick, with strong inclina-
tion to vomit.
Ka anuanu noa ahau, morikarika rawa ;
kua whakapaitukiake a roto ki te ruaki.
Anuanu, adj. Disgusting ; offensive ;
abominable. (Jer. xvi. 18 ; Ezek. n. 11.)
Anuanu, S. Cold, chilly air, vapour,
mist.
Takoto mai ra i te anuanu i te matao.—
Poet. p. 83.
Taonga tuku atu ki te anuanu.—Id. p. 225.
Aua te ngaro kia anuanu, aua te ngaro kia
anuhea.—Id. p. 280.
Anuanua, s. [H. T.] The rainbow.
Anuanutanga, s. The chilly, cold,
disagreeable time or season of the year.
Haere, e kui, i te anuanutanga o nga tau
e I—Poet. p. 164.
Anuhe, s. [H. S.] 1. A large cater-
pillar which feeds on ktcmara leaves.
Syn. Amtiohe, AwJieto, ELotete.
2. The regular dark markings and
spots on the large caterpillar ; also on
the mackerel fish.
Ano te kiri ! me te anuhe tawatawa nga
mahi a te kauri 1—Myth. p. 30.
3. A smart, active, forward young
fellow. Syn. Nauhea.
Anuhea, 5. 1. Surfeit, sickness, from
eating fat food, &c.
2. Cold. [Tng.]
“He matao te anuhea.”


Ao
[46]
Ao
Anuhea, v. To be cold, chilled, be-
numbed.
Kua anuhea aroto i au.
Ka anuhea koe te papa i Hawaiki.
Ka mataotao puta noa puta noa te anuhea
i roto i a au ; pupuhi ana nga kanohi,
tetere ana nga ngutu, i te karinga a te
tonga; ka hangai atu ra hoki ki te aro-
aro.
Anui, Name of the Maori alphabet,
from its first letter. (Mod.)
Anukawerawera, 5. Warm airs,
breezes, indicative of summer.
Anukohu, s. Cold vapour proceeding
from a fog.
Anumahana, 5. Same as Anukawe-
RAWERA.
Anumatao, 5. Cold air, cold vapour.
Anumate, s. Very cold, damp air and
vapour.
Anupouri, s. Cold wind or vapour at
night.
Ko te matoke e puta mai ana i roto i te
pouri.
Ka tangi ake te anu, te matao, te hokiwai
o te awa nei, me te pouri; ko ia te
anupoiiri.
Amiran gi, s. A variety of kumara,
with a dark-coloured skin.
Anutai, s. Same as Anurangi.
Anuwhakarere, 5. Very cold air or
vapour.
Anuwhakatoro, s. Creeping, in-
creasing cold airs.
Ao, 5. [H. T. Tng. aho.] 1. Dawn;
clearness of sky, opposed to darkness
(Po) ; light; daylight. [S.]
Te Po te Po, te Ao te Ao.—Myth. p. 3.
Kahore ano hoki i whai ao noa, e pouri
ana ano ki te Maori.—Id.
2. Day. [R.]
Ngau te po, ngau te ao.
Ka wliiti au ki te ao haere ana.—Poet. p.
171.
Na, ka ao i te ata ka arahina ratou.
He ao ka tau.— Poet. p. 27.
Ao noa, po noa.
3. White, fleecy, broken, bright
clouds. [T.]
E rere, e te ao, ko koe hei karere.—Poet. p.
384.
Te ao e rere ana.
4. Clouds in general. [H. S. Tng.]
Whakaamohia te ao ki uta, whakanga-
waritia te ao ki tai.
He ao te rangi ka uhia.—Prov.
5. (a.) Dwellings of man (mostly ao
mdrama) ; sometimes in the plural.
Ko te ao katoa hei nohoanga mo tenei
tamaiti.
Ko au, e waiho mo te ora, e whakaora mo
te ao.—Poet. p. 365.
“ Kati, ko koe mo te ao.”—Id. p. 398.
Titiro atu hoki iana ki tetehi motu o
tawahi i rapu nei i tetahi ritenga mona
kia puta ia ki te ao.
“ Mate rawa ake a Wahieroa, kua puta
tana tama ki te ao.”
Kei te ao nga korero e putaputa ana, me
kawe hoki elahi korero kihea kihea ?
Aku maioha mo te manuwhiri, koia tenei,
“ He kitenga tangata, he what ao, he ao
marama.”
Ka puta koe ki te whai ao, ki te ao mara-
ma.—Poet. p. 243.
(6.) Islands of New Zealand.
E hoa, e te Kawana, ki te mea e puta he
kino ki te ao, a te Maori a te Pakeha, he
titiro atu taku ; heoi ka moe aku whaka-
aro.
“ Tena koe, e te wahine rangatira e iri iho
nei, tutuki ana tou mana ki nga pito o te
ao.”—Maori chief’s salutation to the
Queen’s flag.
(c.) Parts of New Zealand.
Ma te ao o te uru e kononohi nei e kawe
mai te aroha na, i !
Ao, mauru e I tauhere mai ra.—Poet. p. 147.
Taku pa kai riri ki te ao o te tonga.
Tu mai i kona ma te ao tonga au e kawe.—
Poet. p. 118.
E kore matou e minamina ki te whawhai
a Wi Kingi; notemea hoki he ao kai
kona (Taranaki), he ao kei konei (Wai-
rarapa).
(d.) Other islands (myth.) spoken of
and handed down by tradition and
legend to Maoris.
Na Tinirau, te rangatira nui o te ao katoa.
6. Land, as opposed to sea.
Ka ora mai ia i nga hau o te ao, i nga oru
o te moana.
7. This present habitable world or
earth, (state of living,) as opposed to
other places of existence.
He mahi pai ta era iwi mo a ratou nei
tamariki, kai waiho he ake i te ao nei.
Aue kau atu ana au i te ao ! kei te ohonga
ake (from his dream), ara, he moe ia ;
ano kei te ao nei!
Kia hiahia noho korua ki te ao, ki te aha?
Are ! e noho mamae ana korua.
8. The source of all that is good and
pleasant.
Ko nga mea papai, nga wai marie, no te ao
era.—Poet. p. lxxxi.
9. Deliverance, preservation, help,
comfort, victory.


Ao
[47]
Ao
Tenei te po whanatu ra, te tuku atu kia koe.
Tenei te ao ka hara mai, ka hara mai ki
au. (Part of ancient Charm for deliver-
ance in battle.)—Poet. p. 428.
10. A better state.
Ho ake ki te ao, kei tawhiti ra koe.—Old
Song.
Te homai ai hei mihinga ake mo hine i te
ao.
Moe mai, e whae, i te ao o te muri!
11. The large swelling light- or
yellow-green immature flowers (alabas-
trus) of the Koiohai trees (Edioardsia,
sps.), on their largely protruding from
their dark-brown dry and harsh calyces
previous to unfolding into bright yellow
blossoms, indicating spring; whence
the ancient proverb, “I hea koe i te ao
o te KoiohaiV’—Where wert thou at
the time of the first appearance, or
change, of the Kowhai flower-bud?
(Used as a gentle reproof to a person
who was behind in his cultivations—
in planting edible roots and sowing
seeds ; that unfailing and great annual
change being Nature’s vernal sign to
them for beginning their cultivations).
[H.T.]
[O&s. This interesting relic of the
past, though small in itself, is worthy
an additional remark, as silently and
strongly attesting the unity of the
great Polynesian language. (1.) It is
the only instance known to me where
this peculiar meaning of the word (ao)
is preserved in the New Zealand
dialect. (2.) In the Hawaiian, the same
word is “applied to the light-green of
fresh leaves of plants or trees; the
green fresh buds; the new leaf of
plants, as ao to (sugar cane), ao kalo”
(taro, N.Z.) ; “ the light pale yellow-
green of the unfolded inner heart
leaves.” (3.) In the Tahitian, “ the
opening buds of trees, the white heart
of cabbage, taro, &c.” Moreover, to
is also the pure Maori term for the
sweet, succulent, edible stem of the
maize.]
12. The sky. See Aouri, &c.
13. (Fig.) Peaceful times, or good
health ; state of living.
Kia mahara i a koe i te ao nei.
E hoa ma, haere mai kia kite koutou i a
inatou, kei ao ana te ra.
te hunga e mahue i a koe i te ao.
14. Poet, for people.
Haere ra, e kui, mo nga kii o te ao.
15. The first generation after Po—
night, darkness.
16. The cry or howl of the ancient
New Zealand dog.
Ao! ao ! ao I—Myth. p. 27.
17. This world—the whole earth—
the globe. Eu. Mod.
Ao, adj. Bright, clear (used of the sky);
day.
He mahi ao ta te tangata, he mahi po ta te
kiore.
He whetu ao tenei ka tata mai.
Ao, ; v.n., -xga.. [H.] 1. To
be dawn, daylight; to break, to dawn,
as the day.
Ka ao mai, ka ao mai te ra ki tua.—Poet.
p. 61.
Ka ao i te ata ka heke atu ia.
2. To be rising, as the sun, before it
appears.
Kati ra, me whakaririka iho ki to mate, he
po hoki tenei, kia ao marire te ra ka
haere ai.
Na, ka ao te ra ka titiro ia ki tena wahi
kino.
Ko te kupu ki a Rimakaho, “ Ka ao te
rangi ” ; ko te kupu ki a Te Waru, re-
rekc, “ Ka ao te ra.”
3. To arrive at any place by daylight.
Kia ngawari tatou te haere, kia ao ai tatou
ki te kainga.
4. To cry or howl, as the New Zea-
land dog. [H. T.]
E ao haere ana te kuri i muri nei.
Ao, def. [T. B.] To be in good
health and comfortable; to be peace-
fully dwelling at ease, happy; to feel,
receive, or derive pleasure; to be
pleased; to be proper, suitable. [T. B.
happy, blessed. S. right, proper,
necessary.] See Eao.
Ekore ra e ao i toku mate.
Ekore ra e ao i te mataku.
Ekore ra e ao i te kawenga a te mate.
E ao ianei te mate nui.
E ao te tini atawhai.
[N.B. — This ancient Polynesian
word, now all but obsolete in Maori, is
worthy of an additional remark. It is
used by the missionaries in the Pacific
in their translation of the Scriptures
as above noted, especially for the
beatitudes (Matt. v. and Luke vi.), and
in the Psalms (as i. and xxxii.), and
generally, for “ blessed.” As far as I
know its use is wholly confined to the


Aoake
[48]
Aoao
Northern Maori tribes, and even by
them sixty years ago was not com-
monly used.]
Ao, v. p., -HIA, -WHIA; V.H., -HANGA,
WHANGA.
1. To take up small things, as
cockles, potatoes, gravel, &c., in the
hollow of both hands joined together,
to put them into baskets.
Aowhia mai nga pipi ki te kete.
E ao ana ahau i nga taewa ki te peeke.
He tangi kai tou ? . . . koa, he nui
mo te tangata ki te ao mai.—Poet. 49.
2. To collect, to gather together.
Kei te ao kakahi.
Tona whakataukii mo era kai, “ Nga kai a
Matariki, nana i ao ake ki runga.” See
Matariki, and Aokai.
Kua aohia katoatia tatou ki runga o te
maramatanga haere ai.
3. To eat, or gobble up, by double
handfuls, as the berries of the Matai,
Kahika, &c.
4. To gush forth in a thickish semi-
fluid mass, like brains from a fractured
skull.
Mehemea tonu ko ona roro e aohia ana ki
waho.
5. (Fig-) For to shed abundance of
tears.
Me te kai aowhia te roimata i au.—Poet.
p. 352.
Ao, adv. Rather; preferably. See Eao.
“ E ao ianei te mate nui.”
E ao koa hoki ianei te mea i rite ki te ika,
ta te mea no te wai ano tenei.—Myth,
p. 155.
Aoa, For Aohia.
“ Aoahia ki roto ki nga kete.”
Aoahi, s. Smoke from fire. . Syn.
Auahi.
Aoaka, v- To think on; reflect;, cogi-
tate. Ngaitah/it: Syn. Aoanga.
“ Aoaka noa te ngakau ki te tau ra e ! ka
ngaro ra ei1”
Aoake, adv. 1. The next day—used
largely in narration. (Acts xx. 15.)
[R.] Syn. Aongaake.
Kia aoake te ra.—Poet. p. 292.
2. Two days after to-morrow.
Aoakenui, adv. 1. The day after,
or immediately following, the day
already mentioned.
2. Three days after to-morrow.
Aoakenuiatu, | adv. 1. The day fol-
Aoakenoaatu,) lowing the preceding.
2. Four days after to-morrow.
3. Future indefinite time, but near;
within a few days.
Aoao, s. Clouds. (Fig.)
I te mea ra e ngaro tonu ana tenei Motu i
nga aoao nunui o te kino.—Great clouds
of evil.
Aoao, v. p., -hia, -whia; v.n., -hanga,
WHANGA.
1. To drink from a stream by raising
water in the palm of the hand.
2. To gather up small things by both
hands full together.
“ Ihea koe?” “I te aoao kirikiri; i te
ope kirikiri.”
Haere, aoaoliia te kete ra; tuhaina ; aoao-
hia ma Mea ma.
3. To seek, to feel with the hands,
among the meal of bruised hinau
berries for the stones or nuts. Syn.
JRapu.
4. To recollect, to call over in mind.
“ Aoao noa te aroha i roto nei.”
“Ho mai ra ki roto nei aoao noa ai ki
ra runga ki nga hiwi.” [H. “ To repeat
frequently.”]
5. To be the time of early dawn.
Ho mai ki roto nei, aoao noa ake ra runga
i nga hiwi.
Aoatea, S. Broad daylight; daytime
between sunrise and noon. [S.
“ Noon, not so late as 12.”]
Aue ! kia moea te aoatea ?
He aoatea i haerea ai taua wahi kino e
ratou.
Aoatea v-P-> V.n., -TANGA. To
be broad day. Syn. Aowatea ; Awatea.
A ka aoatea ka arahina ia ki runga ki te
tihi o te puke.
Kihai hoki nga hoariri haere po i tata
mai; ka aoatea hoki.
Aoateatanga, s. Broad daylight;
time of daylight.
Aoaowhanga, s. Time, place, manner
of searching ; feeling with the hands
among the meal of bruised hinau berries
for their small stones or nuts, pre-
paratory to the making it into bread.
Aoaonga, $• Spots in the sandy or
gravelly beach where shell-fish have
been dug up.


Aohu
[49]
Aoka
Kua pau nga pipi o konei, ina hoki
takoto ana te aoaonga; ara, te kohinga
pipi.
Aoawetera, v. To end quickly, soon
over, as night (lit. day-through-sun-
rising-early) ; a beautiful thought, as
in the whole sentence, hence I give it:
“ Moe mai ra, e tama, i roto te whaiekino,
ekore te po nei e cioatuetera; ka tu he
tatari ki te tira wano ki te muri, ki o
matua ra.”—Old Dirge, MS.
Aoanga, 5. A variegated variety of
New Zealand flax (Pliormium). Syn.
Aowanga, Aohanga, and Taniure.
Aohau, s. 1. A small solitary cloud
blown along by the wind in a clear
sky.
Te aohau e rere narunga ana mai o nga
kiwi ra ia.—Poet. p. 62.
Me poroaki atu ki te aohau e rere atu na.
“ He kapua iti nei, ka puta noa kaore atu
he kapua ko ia anake ; ko ia te aohazt.”
—Old Song, MS.
2. Figurative expression for uncer-
tainty.
Ko wai o tatou i kite he otinga tika?
Kaore pea ; tona ahua, “ E ai te Aohau
kahore he tuturutanga.”
Aohanga, s. 1. A handful. (Gen. xli. 47.)
Ka toru tahi aku aohanga puwha.
Kia kotahi aohanga ma Mea ma.
2. Time, act, manner, place of
gathering up with both hands together
by handfuls. (See verb, Ao, 1.) Syn.
Aoiohanga.
3. A variety of striped New Zealand
flax. Syn. Aoioanga, &c.
Aohiawe, $• Dark, obscure day ; day-
break, with narrow streaky clouds.
Aohinga, s- 1. Act or time of greatly
desiring, longing for. Syn. Ohia.
“ Kai te hiahia noa te ngakau, ki tena mea,
ki tena mea.”—Poet. p. 207.
2. Falling, waning daylight. (2.)
Aohoka, s. Heavy, dense, cumulus
clouds rising from the sea, betokening
a gale.
E hoka ana te kapua; ara, he tohu mara-
ngai, awha. “ Ko te ao kokiri ake i te
taha o te rangi.”
Aohuna, v. Secreted, hidden, over-
looked, through excess of light.
Na te ao i huna ai te mea, koia te
aohuna. (2.)
4
Aoinaake, 1
Aoiraake, J
adv. Day after to-morrow.
Aoka.
He aoka tahau kai; ko au, kai keukeu ;
me whakatu au hei pou rahui. “He
kamu kai.”
[N.B.—Aoka (H.), “to be crushed
or chewed finely for swallowing.”
This meaning seems to have close con-
nection with that of the above Maori
word.]
Aokahiwahiwa, s. Heavy, gloomy,
dark, lurid, much broken clouds.
(Myth. p. 5 ; see also p. 158.) Syn.
Okiwakiwa.
Aokai, s. 1. A star; the Pleiades. Said
by the ancient Maoris to be the boun-
teous giver or bringer of food, viz. :
of fish to the shore, in the summer
season. Syn. Matariki.
Ko Matariki anake te whetu, i kiia e te
Maori, te whetu aokai mai ki uta nga
kai o te moana.
2. A foraging party. (9.)
[(Tng.) Aokai, “ To beg food, provi-
sions.”]
Aokairau, s. Clouds blown wildly in
all directions.
“ He rere tonu te mahi a te hau, kei tenei
wahi, kei tenei wahi, o te rangi, i te
mahi a te hau ; koia te aokairau."
Aokaitu.
Aokaiwhitiangaterangi, s. Name
of a chief’s house in ancient times.
(Given here in connection with the
preceding word, which is almost
obsolete.)
“ E noho ana au i te roro o toku whare, o
te aokaiwhitiangaterangi.”—Old Kumara
Song, MS.
Aokanapanapa, s. Lurid' copper-
coloured clouds, reflecting changing
lights. (Myth. pp. 5, 158.)
Aokapua, s. Cloud.
Kokirikiri ai te aokapua e rere mai ra.—
Song, MS.
Aokapuarangi, 5. 1. A spread-out,
broad, cloud.
2. Name of the floor-mats of the
house Kaparapateuira in the sky, which
were dragged out of it by Tawhaki, on
his ascending to that region.—Old
Legend.


Aoma
[50]
Aonui
Aokapurangi, 5. 1. The horizon.
(1.) See Taiepaepatanga.
2.
“ Mo te tuwaewae.”
Aokatoa, s. A superior kind of fioor-
or sleeping-mat. (1.)
Aokehu. See Taikehu.
Aokoaiana, adv. Assent.
Aokokiri, s. Narrow, slender clouds,
blown along by a high wind (cirrus).
Aokoro, s- 1- Name of the fifth
lunar night of the new moon ; a lucky
day for fishing, &c.
2. A white ring or halo around the
moon.
“ Ka tikoro te marama ka porotakatia e te
kapua wai. Tae rawa ake ki te aoinata-
nga ake kua ua.”
Aoma, s- White clouds ; high clouds
(cirro-stratus).
Aomarama, 5. 1. Broad daylight;
clear light of day. Syn. Aoatea,
awatea.
2. Life, or state of life ; being, exist-
ence ; life, health, safety—as opposed
to death.
Katahi ka hoki ake te whakaaro o te
tangata ra ki te aomdrama. (Saved
from drowning.)
Kahore he putanga mona ki te aomdrama.
He hokinga atu ki te aomdrama i kore.
3. Inhabited country; earth, world.
Syn. Aoturoa.
Ka hari taku ngakau ki te ara hokinga
moku ki te aomdrama. (A man ship-
wrecked on a desert island.)
Ka whiua atu ki te moana, e hoki mai
hoki hei tangata ora ki te aomdrama ?—
Myth. p. 12.
Nana i homai ko te kai ki te aomdrama.
Ka puta mai te kupu a Manga, “ Haere e
hoki, e tae ki o matua, ko taku ki kei te
tahuhu o te aomdrama e iri ana : ko te
he, na te tangata nana ano tana he;
ahakoa tutaki akonei, e iri mai ana taku
kupu i te aomdrama.”—Poet. pp. 243,
356, 422-424.
Aomaori, 5. The Maori people : their
common weal.
Hei whakapuaki i te tini noa iho o nga
raruraru o te aomaori ki te Paremete.
Aomaorikaitangata, v. A name for
N ew Zealand. (Mod.)
Nohea tenei ingoa te Kingi ? me tenei
ingoa me Niu Tireni? Ko te ingoa o
tenei motu i mua, ko te Aomaorikaita-
ngata !
Aomataiwha-etia. See Aonui.
Aomataki, S- Clouds watched. (Also,
for the following.)
Aomatarahi, 5. A thin, spreading
cloud.
Aomatangi, Clouds presaging wind,
or bringing wind, or carried along by
the wind.
Aomauru, s. 1. Clouds gently wafted
along.
Aomauru e ! tauhere mai ra, na runga ana
mai te hiwi kei te Tawake.—Poet. p. 147.
2. Gentle, steady winds.
Mei whera, e aku mahara, me te aomauru,
mo te hau ata pa nei tenei kupu.—Poet.
p. 157.
Aomihij ) 5. (Fig. and Poet.) A
Aomihia, I white cloud wafted from
the place where a loved one is dwell-
ing towards the speaker. Spoken of
as active (causing sighs), or passive
(sighed over).
AoniOj s. 1- The white crest of a
billow.
“ Na te hau te moana i hapai ake ki runga,
koia ka huaina he aomo.”
2. The carrying of timber, wood,
&c., lengthwise on the shoulder. Syn.
Amo.
“Na te tangata i hapai ake te rakau ki
runga ki tona pokihiwi, ka huaina, he
aomo.”
Aomoana, Clouds from the sea.
Aoparoro, s. Heavy, dark, hanging
clouds, threatening rain and wind
(cumulus).
Aonini, Glowing, red - coloured
clouds.
Aonui, s. 1. The sky; the expanse
above.
Te Aonui, Te Aoroa.—Poet. pp. 155, 329,
iv.; Myth. p. 6.
“ Ka ki atu a Whaitiri ”—(the woman
who had descended from the sky, lived
with a man on earth named Kaitangata,
and bore him a child, who was the father
of the celebrated Tawhaki.) “ Ekore au
e horoi i te paru 0 ta taua tamaiti, e
tapu koa nge au no Aonui, no Aoroa,
no Aomataiwhaetia i te Rangi e tu iho
nei.”—Legend, MS.


Aopo
[51]
Aota
2. Dense clouds; big cloud.
Aonunui, s. Dense clouds. (Plural
of preceding, but brought here on
account of the following curious
ancient prayer or charm for sunshine,
from persons suffering from cold in
winter:)—
“ Tenei, tenei, to ahine te aitia nei e maua,
ko te aonunui, ko te aororoa; upoko,
upoko wliiti te ra.”
Aoori, 5- Bad weather clouds, be-
tokening a gale.
Aoorongo, $• The name of a chief in
the mythical waka Tainui.
Aootekowhai, 5. The flower-buds of
the Kowhai tree before expansion. A
proverbial saying, used to a person too
late in the season with his planting.
See Ao, 11.
“ Ihea koe i te aootekowhai?”
Aooterangi, s. 1. Light of the sky.
2. Very high clouds. 3. When a
single cloud only is seen in the sky.
Aootetonga, s. 1. Clouds from the
south.
2. (Fig.) Southern tribes, or people.
Aopakakina, s. Sultry clouds ; light
or heat from the sun striking strongly
down. (Myth. p. 5 ; Poet. p. iv.)
Aopakakmakina, Same as pre-
ceding, but with lessening power.
Aopakarea, $• Thunderstorm clouds.
(Myth. p. 5.)
Aopakurangi, s. Small, broken clouds.
Aopango, 1- Clear blue sky. Syn.
Aopouri, Kikorangi.
2. Dark, thick clouds. Syn. Aowhe-
kere.
Aopotako, s- I Gloomy, thick, lower-
Aopotango, S-J ing clouds (nimbus).
Aopouri, 5. Dark, lowering clouds.
(Myth. p. 5 ; Poet. p. iv.)
Ko te ngaherehere he mea taki mai i te ua
o te rangi me te wai o te aopoziri e rere
ana.
2. Clear, blue sky. Syn. Aopango,
Aouri.
Ko te aopango tata pu tenei.
3. The other unknown unseen world,
in opposition to aomarama.
4. Name of a tribe living near Cape
Maria Van Diemen.
Aopupururangi, 5. Thick clouds
covering the face of the sky (cumulus).
Aoraki, s. Northern clouds; clouds
coming from the north. (With South
Island Maoris the same as Aorangi.)
Aorangi, 5. 1. Light from the sky;
cloud of the sky.
2. The name of a pet lizard of the
olden time, said to have been let loose
on the mountain range inland, and to
be still there.
Katahi ka mauria te mokai, he ngarara;
ano ka kawea ano ki runga ki te maunga,
ko Aorangi te ingoa; e noho mai nei
ano.—Old Legend, MS.
3. The name of a celebrated floor-
mat of ancient times, from which an
inland district received its name.
Ka horahia nga whariki e toru, ko te ingoa
o tetahi ko Aorangi; e mau nei ano tona
ingoa ki tena wahi inaianei.—Old Legend,
MS.
Aoreiata.
Aorere, $• 1. Light scud; swiftly
passing clouds.
(Fig>) He aorere ka kitea, he huatau ekore
e kitea.—Prov.
2. The inner thin white rind of the
Ante shrub, formerly used in making
the best kind of cloth for dressing
chiefs’ hair.
3. Messenger; despatch courier.
“ Tenei tangata e haere mai nei he aorere.”
s. Light, thin, flying clouds;
slender, fleecy cirrus; mist. [T.
A or erev a.]
“ Ka manginoa au, e ai te aorewa.”—Old
Song.
Aoro.
Aoroa, s. [T.J The sky ; the expanse
above. Syn. Aonui, which see.
Aororoa, s. Plural of preceding. See
Aonunui.
Aoruru, v.
“ Aoruru ana te paanga ki roto.”
Aotahi, S. A star.


Aote
[52]
Aouri
Aotaiaroa, adj. Luscious, delicious,
gustable; as a rich fat fish, pig, &c.
He aotaiaroa te ika nei (te poaka ranei).
Aotaka, s.
Aotakaawe,s. 1. Swiftly flying clouds.
(Poet. p. iv.)
2. (Fig.) Love exciting to an absent
one.
Aotapairu, s. Chief or great; highest
clouds.
Aotawa, s. The light-coloured bursting
buds of the Tawa tree (Beilschmiedia
Tcciva.) See Ao, 11.
Aotanga.
Aotea, s. 1. A name of the Great
Barrier Island. (Myth. p. 143.)
2. A name of the North Island of
New Zealand. (Id. pp. 30, 121.)
Mod. Vamped up; so, below, Aotearoa.
3. The name of one of the early
(mythical) wakas of immigrants to
New Zealand, according to the West
Coast tribes. (Id. pp. 108, 109, &c.)
4. Name of a plant.
Kia awhitia koe ki te patiti ki te taru
aotea e tu ki te ngahere.—Poet. p. 291.
5. Name of a kind of stone called
“ false greenstone,” closely resembling
Pounamu; found in river-beds of
Westland.
Aoteahawaiki, s. Name of a mythi-
cal legendary island, where the inhabi-
tants lived on uncooked food.
“ Ka pae ki tetahi motu ke atu, ko Aotea-
hawaiki te ingoa; ehara ten a motu i te
motu e kai ana nga tangata i te kai
maoa nei, he ota tonu te kai.”
Aoteamua, First white cloud.
(Old Legend, MS.)
Aotearoa, S. A name of the North
Island of New Zealand. (Myth. pp.
68, 175; Poet., p. 430.)
Aoteautanganui, s. 1. A second
name for the (mythical) wakct Aotea,
according to some tribes.
2. A secondary place in the unseen
world, reinga, where the disembodied
dwell.
Aotekowhai, S- Spring season, time
of the Kozuhai flowering. Also, “A
o te Koiohai; ” “ Te iva o te Kowhai.''
Aoterangi, s. See Aorangi.
Aotootoo, Large massy clouds
slowly moving, as if drawn or dragged
along ; heavy cumuli. (Poet. p. 329.)
Aotore.
Aotonga, 5. Southern clouds ; clouds
coming from the south. (Poet. p. 157.)
Aotuaraki, s. Northerly clouds;
clouds coming from a northerly direc-
tion.
Aotuhirangi, s. Peculiar, narrow,
streaky, broken clouds ; long cirrus.
Aoturoa, S. 1. This place of existence ;
the habitable world. Syn. Aomdrama.
Ka tata te mate o te tupapaku, ka
maranga ake, ka poroporoaki, “Hei
konei ra i te aoturoa, ka haere tenei.”
E, nohou te wareware ki te hokinga ake o
to wairua ki te aoturoa, &c.—Poet. p. 244.
Kia oma ai a Whiro i! kia waiho ai te
aoturoa mo taua.—Id. p. 281.
2. The second generation of beings
from Po = Darkness or Night, according
to some.
AotUTU, s. A passing cloud.
Aotutahanga, An isolated clearly-
defined cloud (lit. '‘Cloud standing
naked”).
Aouri, s. [H.] 1. The clear blue sky.
Syn. Aopoitri, Aopango, &c.
2. The deep, dark-coloured water,
seen in looking down into clear deep
water ; the reflection of the blue sky
in the water (sometimes apparently
synonymous with Wheuri and Kanapa-
napa).
[N.B.—It is worthy of remark here
that this affix, uri, is purely and
largely Polynesian, and generally
meaning the same thing, e.g., Aouri=
“ the deep, clear, blue sky above”; uri
= “blue, cerulean blue”; poztri =
“ darkness, night ” (Hawaiian). Uri =
“blue,” uriuri= “ black,” moanauri=
lt deep blue sea,” vaiattri, “plain, clear
water,” aoaitri = “ nearly noon” (Sa-
moan). Moanahaauriuri = “ deep co-
loured sea,” uri = “ dark or blackish,”
pouri = ‘ ‘ darkness ’ ’ (Tahitian). Uli =
“dirty,” uhiuhi=“ dark blue,” as the
deep water of the sea (Tongan, no r
in their dialect). Just so, again, in


Aonga
[53]
Apai
Maori (in addition to the above)—Mo-
anauri, moanauriuri (Myth. p. 85),
moanapoibri = the deep, dark-coloured
sea (Poet. p. 338) ; pouri—darkness,
dark night; potuauriuri = very dark
night, &c.]
Aouru, s. 1. Westerly clouds; clouds
coming from the west.
2.
Katahi ano a Pou ka haere atu i runga i te
waka huruhuru parera, ka tae te aouru,
ka karangatia e ia a Pipiwhakaea ki te
warua nei o Tangaroa, ka eke ia ki runga
ki te tohora katahi ia ka haere.—Old
Legend (MSS.) of Pon fetching Kumara
from Hawaiki.
Ra te aouru whakahinga i Titere.—Old
Song, MS.
Aowatea, $• See Aoatea.
Aowanga, s. Variegated New Zealand
flax. Syn. Aoiohanga, Aohanga, &c.
Aowera, $• Hot, sultry, burning sky.
Aowhakakapuarangi, v. A dense
cloud, overspreading sky, or covering
it with clouds. (Poet. p. 329.)
Aowhatongatonga, 5. (Poet. p. iv.)
Aowhanga, s. 1. .A handful—viz.,
the two hands joined together and
filled with small things.
2. Time, place, act, manner of
taking up small things with hands
joined together. (See verb.)
3. Variegated New Zealand flax.
(Syn. Aohanga, &c.)
Aowhekere, s. Very dark scowling
thunder-clouds. Syn. Aopango.
“ Ko te ao tino pouri, he whatitiri kei roto.”
—Myth. p. 5.
[N.B.—Called “ Rangiwhekere.” —
Poet. p. 420.]
Aowhekerekere, s. Similar to pre-
ceding. (Poet. p. iv.)
“ Mo te pango o te kapua tenei ingoa.”
Aowhetuma, S- Very dark storm-
clouds. (Myth. p. 5 ; Poet. p. 263.)
■[N.B.—Called “ Rangiwhetuma.” —
Poet. p. 420.]
Aowheururangi, s.
Aonga, 8. Dawn, daybreak, daylight.
Aonga ake—The morrow morning.—Ex.
ix. 6.
Aonga o te ra—Sunrise.
No te aonga o te ra i te puaotanga o te ata,
ka pa te he.
I reira e tau ana te kaipuke i taua pd, ao
noa te ra, a i te aonga hore rawa he mea
i kitea.
Aongoringori.
Apa, s. 1. A conquered tribe; the
survivors allowed to remain on their
land, but made to be workmen, tribu-
taries, servants, of their conquerors.
(2 Sam. x. 19; Gen. xxv. 23.)
Ko era apa i noho atu ki Turanga.—Poet.
p. 46.
2. A body of workmen ; dependents.
3. Side or fold of a large garment
mat. See Aparua.
He aparua te kakahu.
4. One temporarily under the in-
fluence (imaginary or real) of the spirit
of a lately deceased relative.
Ka mate tetahi tangata, ko tona teina tua-
kana ranei i ora, ka hoki mai, ka tomo
ki te tangata ora te wairua, korero ai ;
rere ke te reo o te tangata ora ; a, he
apa ia. (While under its influence.)
Ko etahi he apa kai, he apa wahie ; tetahi
apa taipo.
Apa, v. p., -ia ; -kia. To work; to
carry burdens, as dependents, &c.
Kei te apa te kai.
Apa noa kaore i rupeke.
Apaia mai he maru mo tatou, ara he rau ;
kia ka ai te ahi.
Apakia au, he apa kai.
Apaapa.
Whakamau te titiro ki te apaapa tapu.—
Poet. p. 347.
Apaapatu.
Ka rewa kei runga i te apaapatu kei o tua-
kana.—Id. p. 124.
Apaha, adv. If; if indeed it were so;
if like. (Contraction for Kapaa, Pahaa,
&c.)
Ka korero koe i o korero, kaore he putake ;
ka kii atu ahau, “ Apdhd.” Ka korero
ano koe, ka kii atu ano ahau “ E hoa, he
pakjwaha koe.”
Apai, 8. 1. The outward finished part of
the roof of a house.
Nana koe i maka ki te apai o te whare.—
Poet. p. 66.
Kua kapi a waho o te whare i te tangata,
ka wahia e Rangi te apai o te whare, ka
pakaru te apai o te whare.—Old Legend,
MS.
2.
Te ai he turanga, te apai haere i a
Kawana.


Apar
[54]
Apiti
Apairangi.
Apakoko.
Apakura, 1- a poetical lament,
recited or sung for the dead ; a song
sung over the dead, and at a meeting
of mourners ; a dirge sung with crying.
(2 Sam. i. 17.)
2. A parting poetical lamentation,
recited or sung on a friend or relative
leaving for ever.
Ko ta matou apakura tenei ki a koe, note-
mea e haere ana koe ki tawahi, ka ma-
huematou.—Maorichiefs to the Governor
on his leaving.
Apakura, v. p., -tia ; v.n.,
1. To lament the dead with a long
mournful song and tears.
E apakura ana te kainga ra.
Ko wai tenei ope e apakuratia mai nei ?
2. To lament loudly and feelingly
over an absent friend on receiving a
letter from him.
Ka korerotia tana pukapuka mai ki a miiua»
ka nui ta maua tangi; whano iti maua
ka apakttra.
Apamaru. (Poet. p. 423.)
Apanoa, a.clv. Until.
E kore e tukua e ia te tira manuwhiri kia
haere ana, apanoa kia takoto he hakari
mana ki ia tangata ki ia tangata o ratou.
Aparakau, v. To carry posts, rails,
&c., for fencing purposes; also for
house-building.
Apaparangi.
Ngatihaua apaparangi.
Apapu.
Aparangi, 5. The multitude; lookers-
on ; crowd surrounding; strangers;
a party.
Mahora mai te kai ma raua, tuku tonu ake
ma te aparangi, kia ora te noho mai.—
Myth. p. 148.
Na te aparangi hihira na te aparangi ra-
rapa, tukia i wharerangi.
Aparia.
Aparua, 5. 1. A garment bordered on
both edges, as a paepaeroa—a chief’s
best flaxen dress mat.
2. A pair of blankets woven together
and uncut.
3. A double or extra thick steel face
to a flint and steel, gun, or musket.
4. A ditch - and - bank fortification.
Syn. Maioro. (9.)
Apata, «•
Ka pangaia te kura i te apata ki waho ki
te moana, ka u mai ki uta.
Apatahi, s. 1- a single blanket.
2. A single tying; band, fastening,
&c.
He apatahi te tui (ki roto) ; he apatahi te
tupuni 0 te whare nei.
Apataki.
Apatari, v. To bring, convey, carry
largely. See Whakatari.
Apatau. (Contraction for Kapatiiu.)
Apatau, ko te ara o te kuare, koia ia ko te
ara wharahi.
Apatu.
Apaturangi.
Ko kahu te turuturu, ko waho te apatu-
rangi. (Part of a karakia, used as a
charm in heavy labour of women.)
Apaurangi.
Ape, 1 s. A club-foot (ambiguous
Apeapej term). Syn. Hape.
Apehu.
Api.
Apipi, o. p., -tia. To add; to append.
E ora ana i tetahi, ahakoa kahore e apipi-
tia ki tetahi atu mea.
Apiapi, v.p. [Tng.] 1. To be very
near each other; to be close together,
as trees in a dense forest.
He ngahere ururua apiapi katoa kei aua
maunga.
He nui hoki nga manu kei taua whenua;
otira ehara i te mea waingohia te pupuhi
i te ururua me te apiapi o te ngaherehere.
Kia apiapi te haere.
Taku mokopuna e! ka riro pea koe ki te
kiki me te apiapi.—Poet. p. xcvii.
2. To be obstructed, as a pathway,
&c. [T. S.]
Apiapitanga, s. The contracted chan-
nel of a river.
Apiti, s. 1. An insult; a curse; a word
or phrase having an equivocal meaning,
one of them considered highly offensive.
Syn. Kcinga, Tttkutitku, Kohukohu.
2. Increase, augmentation, a small
addition ; union; something added to
make up a present, a promise, or the
amount of price, weight, &c. (See
verb, 3.)


Apiti
[55]
Apo
3. Two armies drawing near each
other; a closing to fight.
4. An act of retaliation (even to
killing a person) for injury received.
Ehara i te tino kohuru, engari he apiti, e
ai ta ratou, he urumaranga, he aha.
5. An equivalent.
6. The small bone of the arm (radiits).
7. A narrow pass, as through a
mountain range ; a defile, cleft in rocks
or cliffs—as M an aw at u Gorge, hence
named Te Apiti.
Haere tonu nga mano ra i te pd, taka tonu
atu ki roto ki te apiti, he whaititanga no
taua awa kahore e kitea iho.
8. A house with a high-pitched roof.
Ko te apiti i pena me te tuanui whare-
karakia te tu o runga.
Apiti, V. p., -A, -RIA, -TIA, -ngia; v.n.,
-tanga. Syn. Kapiti.
1. To insult; to curse; to use words
of equivocal, doubtful, or offensive
meaning.
Kua apititia nga kai ki au !
2. To add to; to make more in
number, or bulk, or power; to mix.
Syn. Tapiri.
Na te Kawanatanga i apiti taua moni hei
whakanui ake.
Ka kotia te makawe, ka apitia ki te aruhe,
ka tunua ki te ahi.
Me te kapia kauri hei apiti mo te Kapara.
He maha nga karakia mo te kanga kihai i
whakina mai, he tupato no nga tohunga
kei apitia ki te kai.—Myth. p. 89.
E hoa ma, te take i kore ai e apititia te
kumara ki te aruhe koia tenei.
3. To increase, or augment slightly,
by adding to.
Ka takoto te kai ma tetahi iwi, ka tukua,
ka kiia, “ Kia apitiria ” ; ka hoatu ki te
taha tonu ; ko te apiti tenei.
Apititia ki te poaka—Make it up equal to a
Pig-
4. To close in fight; to charge ; to
attack. (Myth. p. 101, bis.)
Ko te ua kau i maranga, ka te apiti ano
ka whati mai ano.
5. To take, or fall, together in fight.
Kihai tetehi i rere ko Manaia anake, ko ia
i rere ke te pa, apitiria tonutanga atu ko
te pa, ka horo.— Id. p. 91.
6. To bring together, as the edges of
a wound, broken bone, &c.
Rangaranga te hono, e tu au kapiti, apitia
i hono,— Poet. p. 210,
7. To join; to unite; as persons,
parties, opinions. [T.]
Heoi ano te kupu, kia kotahi ture, kia
apitiria nga iwi e rua kia kotahi.
Aua e mea, Me wehe te kiri pango i te kiri
ma ; engari me apiti mai kia ora tahi ai
tatou.
Na, e takoto nei nga hoari hei apiti mo
te aroha o te Kuini ki nga tangata o
tenei motu.
Ko taku kupu tenei, Me apiti o tatou
whakaaro kia kotahi.
Ko Tuhourangi te iwi i hanga tuatahitia
ki te wahi hei tunga mo te kara, apiti
mai a Tamatea; muri iho i tena ko nga
iwi i karangatia nei.
Apiti, adj. 1. Additional.
2. Hand to hand fight between two.
He riri apiti; he patu apiti.—Poet. p. 10.
3. Confined ; narrow ; strait.
He whare apiti.
Apitipiti, v. [T.] 1. To collect, to
gather together many persons or
things.
2. To join, so as to go together in a
body, as of men; or a fleet, as canoes.
I te tatanga mai ki te taone katahi ka
apitipiti nga waka, me nga rau o Wha-
nganui i runga.
E hoa ma, kia apitipiti te haere.
3. To happen, befall, or come to
pass at the same time.
Ko raua i mahue atu i Tauranga, ka ta
kupenga ma raua, ka oti, katahi ka
whatuituia te kupenga, oti rawa te mahi
ka apitipitia ki te matenga o te whaea
o tetahi o Toi.—Old Legend.
4. A frequentative of Apiti.
Apititanga, s. 1. The act, time, or
manner of adding, putting, or placing
one thing to another, so as to go, or be
taken together.
2. Anything added to; an addition to.
Apititu, v- p., -TIA ; v.n., -TANGA. To
charge, to attack, to close with the foe
hand to hand, in fighting.
Ka karanga Taiha, “ Kia apititutia, kia
whana te hingahinga nga tupapaku.—
Taiha shouted out, “ Charge home at
once, that the dead may fall.”—Prov.
p. 36.
Apo, s. 1. Covetousness, greediness,
selfishness, avarice, avariciousness.
(Ex. xviii. 21.)
He apo no te hoko a nga tangata.
2. Shark oil, not properly rendered
down, thick.


Apok
[56]
Apu
Apo, V. p., -A, -HIA, -tia; v.n., -NGA,
-HANGA, -TANGA.
1. To collect together; to gather up;
to store up.
Me apo mai hoki te mata.
2. To be greedy, covetous, selfish.
Kaore e apohia o ratou “ piihi.”
3. To heap up, as earth around
stems of potatoes in the plantation.
“ ApoIlia te oneone ki nga kapana.”
4. To draw together, as men.
E apo ana ra koe te tangata, kia tokomaha.
5. To be frequent, as fightings, wars.
Na wai tenei hanga, he tatau apo tonu?
6. To eat berries greedily, by hand-
fuls.
Apoa tonutia te kai kua pau.
Ko Tiki tawhito, ko Tiki-i-ahua, ko Tiki-i-
apoa, ko Tiki whai ringaringa, &c.—Poet.
p. 423.
Apo, Covetous, greedy, selfish,
grasping, hard-dealing, rapacious.
He tangata apo ; he hunga apo. (Ps. x. 3 ;
1 Cor. v. 10, 11; vi. 10; Eph. v. 5.)
Apo, adv. Eagerly, covetously, avari-
ciously, greedingly, graspin gly, rapa-
ciously.
Apoapo, P-, -hia, -ngia; v.n.,
-HANGA, -NGA.
1. To gather up, to collect small
things.
Kei te apoapo nga tohunga i nga toto o te
tupapaku, ahakoa kua maroke nga toto.
—Poet. p. lxxxiii.
I apoapohia nga mea noa o te ao e te tina-
na ; ko nga mea pai kihai i apohia.
2. To put up into small piles or
heaps. (Ex. viii. 14.)
3. To store up largely, lay up covet-
ously. (Lztke xvi. 14.)
4. To hill or bank up growing culti-
vated plants, roots, &c., in a plantation.
Ho atu tatou ki te apoapo kaanga kei
hinga i te hau.
5. To be enwrapped, entangled, or
rolled-up in.
“A, he mea apoapo ahau e te rimu, ta;
kai atu takai mai, a na te apuhau au i
whakahoki mai ki uta nei.”—Myth, p-
11; Poet. p. xxxix.
Apohanga, S- Time, act, place, or
manner, of collecting and storing things
together.
Apokai, v. 1. To eat greedily.
2. To eat small berries by handfuls,
without chewing or rejecting the stones
or nuts—as Koroii, Mataii, &c.
Apopo, adv. [T. R. H. “ After to-
night.”]
1. To-morrow.
2. Future time, but near.
Apopo atu, ka tahuri mai ki te ngaki mate.
—Myth. p. 66.
Aponga, 1- Collecting, gathering
together, assembling.
Ki te ahunga i tai, ki te aponga i tai.—
Myth. p. 85; Poet. p. 329.
Ka tu ki te ahunga mai i Hawaiki; ka tu
ki te aponga mai i Hawaiki.—Poet. p. 353.
Te ahunga oneone, te aponga ki runga ra,
ka revva o toto ki te rangi.—Id. p. 127.
2. Time, act, place, manner, of put-
ting into little heaps ; also, of eating
berries by handfuls.
3. A little heap, as of berries.
“I hea koe?” “I ko.” “I te aha?”
“I te kaikai Kahika; aponga tonutia e
au, e rua ano aku aponga kua pau.”
Apu, $• 1- A company of labourers,
workmen, for work in a plantation of
edible roots. Syn. Ohib.
2. A flock or flight of birds.
3. A gathering together of winds ;
a squall. See Aputai.
[N.B.— Winds and squalls were
always personified, all of them (and
they were many) being children of
Tawhirimatea, the god or father of
squalls, storms, and gales.]
He apzi hau, he apu tangata.— Prov.
Nonaianei te apu mo te mara a Mea.
He kai ten a ma te apu.
Apu, v. p., -A, -tia ; v.n.,
1. To assemble, as a body of la-
bourers in a plantation, to work at
planting edible roots, &c.
[N.B.—Here it may be properly
stated, that, on such occasions, both
chief and slave worked together steadily
and in ranks, keeping time beautifully.]
E apu ana i te mara a Mea.
Ka ki a Kapene, “Maranga, taua, e eke
ki nga poti.” Ano ka haere a apu ana
tini pakeha.
2. To be, to fly in a flock, as birds.
E rere apzi ana nga kuaka rara.
3. To eat greedily; to swallow
whole ; to bolt down, as a fish, sea-
bird, &c. [H.]


Apu
[57]
Aput
Kia kai apu te ika i te moana.—Poet. pp.
22, 33.
Ka puta te rangai o te aua, ka apua e te
kaliawai.
He toroa apib kai.
Kihai nei i ruia e te hunga e apu ana.
4. To bury itself, sink deep into
sand, mud, &c., as an anchor, a
flounder, &c.
Kua aputia te punga ki te paru.
He patiki apu one, tangohia ake, waiho
ana hei tohu taua.—Poet. p. 277.
5. To gobble in the mud, as a duck.
He parera apib paru.—Prov.
6. To gather together, to collect, as
scraps, small herbs, &c., for food.
Kahore i ara he kai ma raro, me apu noa
iho ki te oneone.—Poet. p. 247 (a proverb).
7. To lay by, set aside, &c.
Ka apzta atu te pouaka.
Ka apua mai he mea maku ; ara, takaia
mai ki tahi pakaru kahu, na.
ApuapUj To gobble up; to swallow
hastily.
Naku i apuapu, nga puwha.
Apuapu, cb. Dirty, soiled; dishevelled,
rumpled; displeasing.
“ Paru rawa nga kahu, hanga apuapu ana.”
Apuhau, 5. 1. A fierce squall of wind ;
a gust; a sudden rushing wind. (Poet.
p. 132.)
Ko te haerenga o ta maua poti, ko te
tukunga mai o te apuhau, a, kua tahuri!
Te tino putanga mai o te hau ! ko hau nui,
ko hau roa, ko apuhau.
2. (Fig.) Comparison for the velocity
and rushing of a railway train.
Katahi ka rere taua tawhiti rerewe nei!
Anana ! me te apuhau; a tae noa ki te
taone.—Meiha Ropata, in lit.
Apumatangi, s. A squall of wind;
storms; gales. (Myth. pp. 4, 11, 17,
24.)
A au, e haere nei, e tuia e te apuhau, e te
apumatangi.—Poet. p. 132.
Maku e'ueue te pu o te whenua, a rewa ki
runga ra he apzbmatangi.—Poet. p. 181.
Apurangai, S. A company of children
keeping on moving about together, and
not sitting down.
Ehara i te hanga! tenei apurangai tama-
riki nei ! ahu haere tonu koutou, te tau
ki raro te aha !
Apure, 5. 1. A small, isolated patch
of ground, as a clear, grassy, or ferny
spot in a forest.
He apure parae kei waenganui o te ngahere
taua aimre e korotiwha ana.
2. A small piece of land unsold; a
bit remaining.
He apu/re te wahi oneone paku nei i toe i te
hoko.
Apurewa, A collection of white
wood ashes, used in obtaining fire by
friction.
Ka hika, ka hika, ka rua whakaruinga,
kaore i tru; ka tikina he apu/rewa, ka tae
mai, ka whakaruia, ka ringitia kua tu te
ahi.
Apuroa.
Apurorohau, ) s L Whirlwind.
Apurorowhio,)
He hau tenei, ka haria nga otaota katoa
ki te wahi kotahi piupiua ai, pena me te
rakau e tu ana.—Ps. lviii. 9; Is. v. 28.
2. Fig. for a multitude of evils, dis-
agreeables, coming or happening to-
gether.
Haere ra, e pa ma, i te a}yibrorowhio, o ruhi,
o ngenge, o te makino, kino tonu i !—
Poet. p. 197.
Apuru, v.p., -a, -tia.
1. To be closely crowded or crammed
together, as in a small house, in a
ship, &c.
He tokomaha i mate i runga kaipuke i te
noho apuru i te pumahu.
2. To stifle ; to conceal, as words, &c.
Apuru tonu mai, te tukua atu, kotero tonu
atu ana korero ki roto ki tona waha.
3. To be smothered in blood, as by
murder through surprise of the enemy
by night.
Kia hiwa, e 1 kia hiwa e ! whakahiwia te
ngakau o tenei pa, kei apurua koe ki te
toto.—Poet. p. 108.
E ara, e ara, e tenei pa, e tera pa, kei apzb-
rzba koe ki te toto.—Poet. p. 61.
[N.B.—These last two examples are
from the watch-songs at night of
watchmen in a besieged pa or fort, on
the look-out for the enemy.]
Apurunga, s. Act, time, place, or
manner of crowding together ; cram-
ming, in a sitting or lying posture;
smothering, &c.
Aputa, a. Infrequent; occasional;
now and then.
Ka haere i te aputa hou ka tika mai i
Tawhara.
He Hokioi i runga, hu ! kei te aputa koe,
na, o te rangi e noho ana.—Poet. p. 32.


Ara
[58]
Ara
Kaore he ua ki Wairau, koia i whakatau-
kiitia ai, “Ko te aputa ki Wairau.”
Aputahiapawa, 5. The name of
the wind that destroyed Manaia’s fleet,
sent specially for that purpose. (Myth.
p. 93.)
Aputai, s. 1. A sudden violent squall
at sea.
Na te aputai koe i tukituki ki roto o Hau-
raki.
Taihoa rawa e tuku, kia hori rawa te
ai^utai nei ; hei te mutu rawa ka tuku
ai. Te horinga ano o te apu ka puta te
mutu, ka karanga, “ Tukua !”
2. Breakers on or near a shoal, &c.
He ngaru moana, 20, 30, ranei, aua tai i te
haerenga kotahi; he apibtai tenei.
Aputaputa, Here and there;
rare, not common.
Aputauaki, s. A term for an animal
large with young.
Mo te hapu tenei kupu ; ka tino tautau;
he tangata ranei, he kararehe ranei, he
aha ranei.
Aputerewa.
Apunga, s. 1. The spot in the sandy
shoals where rays, &c., have been
rooting and feeding on shell-fish ; also,
their resting place.
He moenga whai, e takoto ana te apitnga
ki te one.
Na, tetahi apunga, ka kitea, e pu ana nga
anga pipi.
“ E pu ana i ro wai ; a, na whai raua ko
te parore tenei apunga.”
2. Marks left on beach from drag-
ging a canoe.
Ko te apunga o Tainui (A canoe).
Ara, 5. [H. T. R. S.] 1. A road, way,
highway, street, lane, passage.
2. Means of access; course of a
ship, &c.
“Ko te ara ia i karangatia e nga mapi.”
(Mod.)
3. Means of travelling, moving—as a
canoe.
Ka toia mai a Aotea, hei ara mai mo Turi.
—Myth. p. 110.
Ka tau te ara ki te moana.—Poet. p. 334.
Ka kii atua Ngae, “ Ho mai he ara moku.”
Ho mai ana he tohora.— Old Legend.
4. A journey.
Ka tika to ara.—Myth. p. 83.
5. Channel of a river, &c.; the
urinary passages.
Ma te ara wai tae noa.
“ Te ara mianga atu.”
6. Direction of motion.
7. Act of rising from sitting or
reclining.
8. Rising of the moon, &c.
9. Descent of relatives, ancestors.
Heoi, mana e rapu atu ona rerenga, ona
ara; heoi maku ko te kauru.
He ara taniwha tenei ara, muri iho ko te
Rangituama, &c.
10. Medium, method.
He ara hunahuna ekore nei e kitea.—Poet.
p. 273.
Ko te ara ki nga paura kia whakatuwhera-
tia ki nga hoa, ara ki a matou; ki te
hunga riri me tutaki ki a ratou.
Te hoaia atu, Whakamaru to kawa hei ara
mou, e !—Poet. p. xcix.
Kati nei ki au, ko te ara maikuku e
whakangoto iho.—Old Song, MS.
11. Reason, cause, matter, ground.
[R. S.]
Ka whai koutou kia liaere te ara o ta
koutou korero i runga i te mahi.
Kei hea he ara e tika ai te tukunga atu o
Mangakahia e Tauru ki a Tewha?
Heoi ano te ara e kitea ai e matou inaia-
nei, he whakakite atu i to matou mate.
Na to matou rongonga ki to whakaaro,
koia te ara atu o a matou whakaaro ki a
koe.
12. Appliances, resources, means,
opportunities.
13. Manner of doing, course of
action.
14. Inclination.
Te ara o korua ngakau ki nga mahi.—Poet.
p. 289.
15. (Fig.} The way of the world.
Haere ra, e Pare, i te ara kohuru, i te ara
korero, i te ara kohimu e !—Poet. p. 315.
16. The secondary name of a god.
Ko Tunuiarangi . . . ko Te Ara. (He
karakia.)—Id. p. 342.
17. A charm, incantation, spell.
Ka kitea te ara mo te tangata e whanau ai.
Te ara o te manu i te ra. *
Ko wai ra te ara o te waka i haere ai koe ?
Te ara o tou tapu; e hoa e, tataia mai te
tatai o tou atua, kia mohiotia ai e matou
te ara o tou tapu.
18. (Fig.} Death.
Ehara i te mea na te ringa tangata ia i
patu, engari i haere i te ara o ana
tupuna.
19. A small fresh-water fish, said to
be the young of the Upokororo (Proto-
troctes oxyrhynchus}. Syn. Nehe.


Ara
[59]
Ara
Ara,/y. v.n.,-nga,-hanga. See
Wh AKA AR A.
1. To rise up from a sitting or re-
cumbent posture. [H.] (Mark v. 41;
Luke viii. 54.)
2. To rise to action ; to help. (Ps.
vii. 6; xxxv. 23 ; lix. 4.)
3. To arise, as war. [H.]
Mehemea ka ara te whawhai.
4. To raise, to build : as a house, as
forts. (Is. xxix. 3.)
Ka whano ka ara nga wliare.
5. To lift, as a club, spear, &c., in
fight.
Katahi a Horowhenua ka rere ki mua
. . . kua ara te patu.—Myth. p. 202.
Kei te kuhu taku hoari, kei te rori ka
maunU) kei te ruriwhenua ka ara;
inaianei kei te kuhu, taihoa ka ara.
(2 Sam. xxiii. 8, 18; 1 Chron. xi. 11, 20.)
6. To incite, stir up, raise up. [H.J
Ka hua hoki au kei te ata noho koe, kaore
i ara! kei te tutara koe i aku kino.
Kaore i ara he kai kino, i akona ki te wai
o Turuahine.
7. To be on the alert, watchful.
[T.]
E ara, e ara, e tenei pa, e tera pa.—Poet.
p. 61.
8. To be awake at nights, sitting up
and talking, planning, &c.
E moe ana te mata hii tuna, e ara ana te
mata hii taua.—Prov.
Te tangata hei tahu, he tangata mohio
rawa, kaha te ara; ka ara tonu taua
tangata ki te tiaki i te po.
E hoa, e Nahe, tenei hoki taku mo tau.
Ko koe anake te tangata nana i ara te
po i tae ai koe ki tenei tu korero ? Te
mahara ai, i ara katoa nga tangata i te
pd.
9. T’o awake from sleep. [H. T. S.J
10. To keep open the'eyes.
11. To lift up the eyes.
12. To raise the eyelids.
13. To lift up the head, hand, or
foot. (Litke xxiv. 50.) To regain
power, consequence. (Judges viii. 28.)
14. To raise, to lift up, as a shark
its tail.
Kua kite mai te Mako i te maunu, kua
tupou te upoko, kua ara te hiku ki runga.
15. To lift up, as waves. (Ps. xciii. 3.)
(Fig.) Commotion of people.
Hoki atu, e Tau, i te whaititanga.
Kei ara mai nga tai o Ngawhatu ra, i!—
Poet. p. 27.
16. To get up to dance the war
dance ; to rise, as a body of troops.
Ka ara tetahi taua.
Katahi ka whakakite te taua ra i tana
waewae, ka ara he matua ; ka ara he
matua.—Myth. p. 41.
17. To rise, as the gods, on being
invoked.
Torona te atua; whakaarahia; kia ara
Kahukura, kia ara Tohimaraeroa.—Poet.
p. 248.
18. To rise; to become great, &c.
(1 Kings iii. 12.)
19. To rise, as the moon.
Awhea ara ai te marama?—Myth. p. 54.
Whakaarahia mai ra te marama, kia ara
mai, e !—Poet. p. 229.
20. To reappear, as the moon.
Ko te marama kua ngaro, kua ara ano.—
Prov. p. 42.
21. To appear, as the rainbow.
Kei rangi whakaarahia mai; kia ara mai
me he aniwaniwa.—Poet. p. 273.
22. To project unnaturally upwards,
as the soles of the feet in falling dead.
(Myth. p. 32.)
23. To uplift the end of large timber-
24. To rise, to float, as a sunken
canoe.
Mahia ana e Rangiturona te tikoki hei
whiti, kia ara taua waka a Horouta ki
runga. Na, ka karakiatia e ia ; a, ka
mutu, kua ara te waka ra ki runga,
katahi ka toia ki uta, whaihanga ai i
ona pakaru.—Ancient Legend, MSS.
25. To be taken up, raised, as a crop
of potatoes, &c.
Kaore i ara he kai ma raro.—Poet. p. 247.
26. To raise, uplift the voice, as in
lamentation, wailing. (Judges ii. 4;
ix. 7 ; Job ii. 12; Jer. ix. 10.)
— As in address, prayer, invocation.
(Job xxxviii. 34 ; Is. xxxvii. 4.)
— As with gladness, hilarity, mirth.
(Is. xxiv. 14.)
27. To seek revenge for the dead ; to
resuscitate old grievances, losses, &c.
Ka mau koe ki te patiti, ka whakahau, ka
mea, “ Apopo nga narna takoto roa te
ara ai i a au !”
28. To rise from the dead. (Europ.)
Ara, adv. Yes.


Araa
[60]
Araa
Ara, adv. 1. That is to say; namely.
Ko tana mea hou i kitea ai hei taonga
mona; ara hei whakakite mana ki ia
tangata.—Myth. p. 178.
Ara, pea, ki a ia.
Kei wareware koe ki tetahi arai, ara tetahi
karo mo taua.
2. Such as.
He nuinga no te kai rangatira i a ia, ara
no te huahua, ara no te kiwi, ara no te
kiore, ara no te weka, &c.—Myth. p. 144.
(scepe.)
3. Then (often with hoki). (Myth.
pp. 65, 71, 152.)
Ka whakaaroaro ka mea, Ara kua tutaki
pea i te taua haere.—Myth. p. 149.
Ka whakatika katoa ki te titiro, Ara e noho
iho ana.
Kei te moe tahi raua, Ara hoki ko ana
matamua kei te korerorero.—Myth. p. 11.
4. Now.
Ara, ka rongo koe, e te Makarini, kahore
he ritenga ke atu.
5. And then.
Ara, ko ia atu. Ara, ka mea atu a Hoani.
6. Or this (with ranei).
Tena ra to iwi mahara kore ! Kai whea
ranei ona rangatira, te korero ai ki tona
hapu, ki tona hapu? Ara ranei, te kite,
e whakahe ana ratou ki ta te Kawana-
tanga mahi ?
Ara, intj. Lo, it was. And lo !
Ka moe ahau ka kite ahau i tou wairua;
kei te ohonga ake, ara ! he moe ia.
Ko te ohonga ake o te kuri ra, ara ! nga
niho tetea tonu I
— See, there ! (in sight).
Ara taku kupenga e in mai ra. (Myth. p.
79 ; Poet. p. 360.)
Sometimes expressive of approba-
bation : Right! true ! just so ! that’s
it!
Ara, pron. pl. Those ; they ; them;
others. Syn. Era.
Haere mai ko drd i te uru
Ekore ahau e hoki noa mai mo drd mate
nonohi.
Ka’ te wero i drd ki te reke taiaha.—Poet.
p. 180.
Piri ana i drd me he paua whare.—Id. p.
289.
Ko Enoka, ko Hoani, ko drd atu, ko drd
atu.
Araara, s. A sea-fish, about 18 in.
long, broad and flattish, with very large
scales, and its dorsal, caudal, and
ventral fins very scaly. (Caranx Georgi-
anus.) Syn. Raumarie.
Araara, a. Rumoured, reported, talked
of, disseminated.
Araara, intj- Denoting continuance
of what has just been said ; as we say,
“ Look, look ! There it goes ! There,
there ! ” Sometimes, as a repetition in
English: “nearer and nearer“higher
and higher.”
Ka tata haere mai, araara! no ka tae pu
mai ki a raua.
He mea whanga ia, noreira ano i whawhai-
tia tonutia ai, ara ara ara! no ka toti-
toti noa, ka tu hoki.
Ka haere, me te titiro atu, araara ! no ka
kite noa i tetahi tangata.
Araarahanga, s. Time, act, manner,
place of leading about; guiding from
place to place.
Araarahi, v.p., -na; v.n., -hanga.
To guide, conduct, lead from place
to place.
Ka araarahina haeretia ki tena wahi ki
tena wahi kia ora ai i te kai.
Araarai, v. p., -a ; v.n., -nga.
1. To defend; to protect; to pre-
serve from injury or attack. (Ex. ii.
17 ; Josh. ii. 13; Is. xxxi. 5 ; 1. 2.)
2. To counteract.
3. To deter, hinder.
4. To repress, keep down or under.
Tenei maua kei te araarai i ona whaka-
arotutu.
Araarai, Kai-, s. One who defends,
protects, hinders, &c. (Is. xiv. 6.)
Araarai, Small screens, of bushes,
&c., set up in a kumara plantation to
ward off strong winds, &c., from the
young plants.
Araawaka, 5. By water, as a means
of conveyance. *
“Ma hea ra tona hokinga?” “Ma te
araawaka.”
2. The channel or bed of a river.
Kei te kapi te araawaka i te aihe.
Araawhakawhiti, The sea, as a
means of travelling.
Tena ko te araaiohakawhiti ma te moni
tonu ka whiti.
Araawhata, S. 1. A notched pole or
piece of timber by which to ascend to
a platform on which food, &c., is
stored.
2. A pole or trunk of a tree laid as a


Arahi
[61]
Aral
bridge across a stream, chasm, narrow
gully, &c.
3. An open inclined plane of any
kind raised as an ascent to any place.
4. A ladder, flight of steps, stairs,
bridge. (Mod.)
Araawhata, v. p., -tia. To bridge.
Araauta, By land ; road, track, or
way, to or from a place—opposed to
the going by water.
Arahau, Draught of wind ; narrow
current of air, windy road.
Arahaukore, $• Sheltered or screened
way, course, road, or path.
Arahaura.
Arahanga, Time, act, manner, or
place of leading, conducting, guiding.
Araheke, S- 1 A downhill path, a
descent.
2. The road, track, or course by
which some had removed in a body to
another place.
Arahij v. p., -na; v.n., -hanga, -nga.
1. To guide, conduct, lead, escort,
show the way.
I te arahinga atu o nga pakeka tae noa ki
te moana. (Ps. v. 8; Is. xi. 6; Matt.
xvi. 14.)
2. To drive, as a charioteer, &c.
(2 Kings iv. 24.)
3. To guide to a knowledge of; to
direct, explain, point out, carry out—
as laws.
Ka whakaae matou kia moiri tetahi o
matou i a koe ki te whakanui, hei arahi
i nga ture.
Arahi, 5. 1. The act of leading, guid-
ing, conducting.
2. Guidance; indication; one who
goes first, a leader.
Arahi, adj. Leading, guiding, indicat-
ing, prompting.
Arahi, Kai-, 5. 1. Conductor, guide,
leader, indicator. (Acts xiii. 11.)
2. Leading idea, word; thread of
discourse.
3. The multiplier in arithmetic.
Arahirahi, v. p., -na ; v.n., -hanga.
To lead about, as a little child ; as a
sick horse, &c.
Arahoe, 5. A way by water, in canoe;
a paddled, or rowed, course.
Arahori, $• False or lying way. A
proverbial term, used figuratively for a
travelling party, or person, bringing
false reports to a village,
“ Korua pea ko to arahori i haere tahi
mai?”—Prov. p. 56.
Arahou, v. 1. A new road, or track,
by land.
2. A new course or way taken by a
ship at sea, owing to shoals, &c.
Arahura, S- Name of the West Coast,
Middle Island, where the greenstone
was found. (Myth. p. 68.)
Ko te wai i takoto ai te hanga nei te pou-
namu ko Arahura.
[N.B.—Literal meaning of name,
Aralvura —: revealing path or way; or,
as an intelligent old Maori informed
rue of its meaning, 11 Ka hitra haere, a
ka kitea”—to reveal in going on, and
at last seen, found. Perhaps worthy
of record as affecting the highly in-
teresting legend of the Pounamu=
greenstone. See Pounamu.]
Arahuta, Name of the daughter of
the ancient hero or demi-god Tawhaki
and Tangotango; the mother, a woman
who descended from the sky. (Myth.
p. 48; Poet. p. 193.) See Aonui,
Whaitiri.
Arai, S. 1. Obstruction, hindrance,
bar, barrier, obstacle, impediment;
defence, shield, screen, shade. [B.,
“ Veil,” “ mediator.”]
2. Anything as an obstacle, blocking-
up, hindering, &c.
3. A screen in the house, fire-screen,
curtain, blind, &c. (Eu. Mod.)
Arai, adj. Defensive, obstructive, &c.
Arai, v. p., -a, -tia; v.n., -nga,
-TANGA. [EL.]
1. To obstruct, block up, bar, hinder.
Aha hoki koa te wa moana nui nana i drai.
—Poet. p. 431.
E araitia ana e te tahuna i kino ai taua
kokorutanga.
2. To shield ; to cover ; to screen ;
to veil.
3. To counteract; to prevent; to
thwart; to oppose.


Arak
[62]
Aram
I te pakarutanga o te whawhai, e taea koia
te drai te kino o te tangata kua uru te
kino ki tona ngakau ?
4. To act on the defensive; to ward
off evils, dangers, sicknesses, &c.
Ma wai oti e drai te mea e pa ki a ia ?
Te Rata hei drai i nga turorotanga i aku
tamariki.
5. To cause separation, discord, &c.
Haere e lioki, ko koe ki te drai i a matou e
noho nei, tetahi i tetalii.
Arai, Kai-, s. 1- Defender.
2. {Fig-) Barrier, as the sea.
Ka titiro atu au ki te moana ki te kai-arai
moku.
Araiawa, s. A fire-screen — i.e., a
figurative expression for a person so
sitting before the fire as to keep others
from it. Syn. Tong amelia, which see ;
also, Areiaiva.
He kowhatu ki waenganui o te awa e tu
ana, koia ka kiia ai e te tangata, mo te
tangata tae hou mai, a, e arai ana i te
ahi, “ E mara, ko draiaioa koe ?”
Araihau, 5. A screen set up and fixed
against the wind. Syn. Whakaruruhau.
Araikanohi, 5. A veil. {Eu. Mod.)
Araioneone, s. Earthworks; earth-
bank ; earthen defences.
Araitanga, s. Act, time, manner, or
place of obstructing, defending, &c.
{See verb.)
Arai-te-uru, s. Name of dangerous
and large shoals off the west coast,
north of New Plymouth. {Lit. Barrier
against the westerly storms, &c.)
Used proverbially. {Prov. p. 90.)
Araiti, S- A by-path; a little-used
road ; a private road.
Arainga, s. 1. Endeavours to hinder,
stay, stop. Syn. Araitanga, which see.
Kihai i rongo a Te Wiremu ma ki tera
arainga mai a Ngatipikiao.
2. Hindrance ; barrier.
3. Boundary.
Kei waho tena kei te taha ki Hirauta, ko
te arainga tena ki Ngaitahuhu.
Arakahakaha, s. A by-way or as-
cent through the long-leaved, tussocky
plants Kahakaha {Astelia Solandr i); or
the pathway to where they commonly
grow in profusion on the dry slopes of
cliffy places, used when gathering the
leaves,formerly largely prepared, woven
or braided, for many domestic pur-
poses.
Arakai, s. Road or path to or from
food plantations, cultivations of edible
roots, &c. ; or for fetching or carrying
food.
Arakanehi, s. A winding pathway
on face of a cliff.
Arakarikari, s. 1. A cut zig-zag
pathway up the face of a steep cliff;
a pathway leading up a steep ascent, in
which holds for the feet are here and
there dug. See Karikari.
2. A notched tree, used as a kind of
rough ladder in ascending to any place.
Arakau, 5. 1. A disused road or path-
way.
2. A track made by large cattle-
{Mod.)
He ara nui te arakau i waerea kautia,
kaore i haerea e te tangata.
Arakawe, s. A common road for
horses and carts. {Mod.) Syn. Ara-
tookaata.
Ko nga pai o tenei huarahi, hei arakawe
i nga mea o nga “ paamu.”
Arakiore, 5. 1. A narrow road or
pathway.
Ehara tena i te tino ara, koia i whakatau-
kiitia ai, “ Me te arakiore.''
2. Hair of the head when cut
curiously, being thinned out very much
in a line running from base of the
skull to forehead.
Te waruhanga o te matenga, ka kiia ano
“ Me te arakiore."
Arakoa.
Arakohurihuri, s. A road or path
full of twistings and turnings.
Arakuri.
Aramahi3 s. 1. A new-made road,
affording work, employment, as our
highway roads.
Katahi nei ka tika te aramahi mana, me
tana kawe tonu.
2. A private road, leading to work in
the woods, &c.
Aramai, s. A call or invitation made
to a single person, or to children ; not
a hearty, exuberant welcome.
Mo te tangata kotahi, tamariki hoki, tenei
karanga ; he karanga htikore ake.


Arap
[63]
Arara
Aramaikuku, s. A pinch made with
the nails, given as a token for sexual
intercourse; also, to bind the receiver,
as by a promise, to keep faith with the
giver when solicited by another, saying,
“ Kati mai ki au ko te araviaikiiku.”
Kati nei ki au ko te araviaikuku e whaka-
ngoto iho.—Old Song, MS.
Aramaire,
Aramaka,
Aramata, adv. Even so; just so; that
will do ; enough said. (6. 7.)
Aramatua, v. [R.J Old road, or
street; principal way.
Aramianga, s. Urinary passages.
Aramiro, s. A straight path or road.
“ He kupu vvhakarite mo te takoto tika o
te huarahi.”
Aramoana, s. Course, direction, way,
by sea or lake.
Aranoa, s. [T.] Common roads, dis-
tinguished from tapu (sacred) and tdua
(war party) roads, &c.
Aranui, 5. Main, principal, or common
road.
Araongana, 5. The track, course, or
path of a fighting party. See Arataua.
Syn.
Arapaepae, $• a road or pathway on
side of a steep hill, &c., supported by
sticks and logs on the outside.
Arapaki, s. 1. Slender, ornamental
lattice-work of various patterns for the
interior of chiefs’ houses, made of
black, white, and red narrow laths,
and bound with narrow strips (all of
one regular width) of long, fibrous
leaves of various colours, as Kiekie
(Freycinetia banksii) for whitish or
pale green; Pingao (Demoschanus
spiralis) for bright yellow, &c.
2. A narrow mountain track.
“ He arapakitanga no te maunga.”
Arapawa, s. The Maori name for the
north end of the Middle Island.
Arapanga.
Arapeka, s. 1. Aside-way; a branch-
ing-off path.
2. (Fig.) A leaving the main subject
in consideration and taking up another;
an attempt to deceive in conversation
or address, &c.
Arapiki, S. [H.] An ascent.
Arap oka, 1. Course, path, or track
across country, or through forests,
swamps, &c. ; leaving the old track ; a
cut across.
Arapokatata, v. A short or nearer
cut across, &c. (see preceding).
Araporaka,
Arapoupou, s. A pathway up or
down a difficult ascent, face of a cliff,
&c., where short stakes are driven in to
hold on by.
He pikitanga tenei poupou tonu ; katahi ka
poupoua nga rakau, no te pu ano o te
pikitanga, a, eke noa ki runga, hei puri-
tanga mo nga ringa.
Arapouturu, v. Walking on stilts ;
the way or course of one walking on
stilts.
Arapukapuka, s. A communication
by letter. (Mod.)
Ebara i te taugata nana i korero mai ki a
matou, he arapukapuka i rongo ai matou.
Arapuni, s. A stopped or blocked
road.
Arapungawerewere, $. 1. An ex-
tended cobweb, a spider’s line or way
on his web.
2. A road or pathway little used.
3. (Fig.) To indicate the road or path
is not clear from obstructions—i.e., old
quarrels, &c., not made up.
4. Fig. for telegraph wire. (Mod.)
Te waea rirarirau kau ana nga mahi o
Heretaunga raua ko Akarana, e rere atu
ana ki kona ki konei, me te arapunga-
wereiuere.
5. A kindly term, used by parents for
their children who early show signs of
diligent activity in making little roads,
castles, &c., in the sands.
Mohio rawa te pungawerewere nei, te paku
nei, ki tana mahi arapungawereiuere !
Arara, intj. 1. Indicative: “There!
there!” (insight).
Arara! ka turua ko te popokorua.—Old
Fable.
2. Here, here ! I have it! (exulting).
Behold !
Katahi ka mau te ringa ki te upoko o Rau-
mati, e huna tonu ana ra i roto i a ia, ka
karanga, “ Arara ! kei au a Raumati!”
—Myth., p. 102.


Arat
[64]
Arat
3. Lo ! (in narration.)
Haere ana tana heke, ka rokohanga e te
po, haere tonu i te po; arara ! pouri
tonu, taka tonu atu ki roto ki te Apiti,
ka ngaro ki te mate.—Old Legend, MS.
Arar ahi, 5. Broad, wide, plain, com-
mon road.
Araranui, A track, course, or way,
passable in broad daylight.
Ararau, 5. 1. Having many roads,
paths, or tracks over level, open,
grassy country.
2. (Fig.) Many schemes, wiles,
stratagems, purposes.
“ Heretaunga ararau.”—Proverb.
Ararauta, s. Overland route, course,
way.
He ararduta ianei, e whakatika noa ake
ai!
Ararepi.
Ararewa.
Ar ar i mu, s. A way over tidal rocks
and seaweeds.
Araripeka, 5. 1. Cross or branching
roads.
2. Fig. for deception, deceit, &c.
Koe araripeka e rau mangangatanga o te
ngakau.—Poet. p. 376.
Araro, adv. 1. On the bottom, under-
neath ; below.
2. Lower down in the country.
(Ezek. xliii. 13.)
Na Ngatimaru a runga, ko te awa o Wai-
whakaurunga araro.
Ko te hapu nana i pupuri araro nei o
Taupo, ko Ngatirangita.
Araroa, s. [T.] A long road.
Arata, s. A pathway in a forest, or
through shrubs, partly cleared by
chopping, &c. See Aratanga.
Arataha, S. 1. A by-way; aside-path.
2. A path along the face of a cliff.
Aratai, s. A course or road by the
seaside.
Arataki, v. t?.,-na; v.n., [H.T.R.]
1. To guide, lead, conduct; to lead
gently; to escort (carts, &c.); to be
led into the way.
Ka aratakma a>no e taua Miromiro.—Myth.
p. 96. (Ex. xv. 13 ; Ps. cxxxix. 10 ; Sol.
Song viii. 2.)
2. To point out.
Mana e arataki te kauri i te wao.— Old
Song, MS.
Arataki, Kai-, s. A leader, conduc-
tor, guide. (1 Kings xxii. 34 ; 2 Ghron.
xviii. 33.)
Aratapu, s. A road or pathway for
particular, reserved, or sacred use only.
Aratata, s. A near road, path, course,
or direction.
Aratatai, s. 1. A road or course
measured by strides or steps; some-
times done bv eating new maize, grain
by grain, from its cob in walking along.
Mo te tatau i te hikoi a te tangata ina
haere.
2. A tracing, deducing, showing
relationship or genealogy.
Kaua te tangata kihai nei i tika tona ara
tatai kia take ia ki te whenua.
Aratau.
Arataua, s. A new course, track, or
direction travelled by a tdua or war
party.
[N.B.—A tdua, or war party, took
good care not to travel over roads, or
used paths and tracks, fearing defeat
through their so doing; as the people
about to be attacked, and knowing it,
would bury a kimara tuber in each of
those paths: to tread on or pass over
this would be the height of impiety.]
Arataukanihi. 1 s. A narrow,
Ar ataukanihinihi,) indistinct
track running along on the ridge of
hills.
“ He huarahi kei runga i te uaua, rahirahi
noa.”
Arataumaihi, s. Pathway to a
small but higher and stronger building
in a fortified village or pa; the keep, or
last resort, in a siege.
Arataura, s. 1. A rope to climb by;
a rope ladder, &c.
2. Pathway up and down the face of
a steep cliff, traversed by means of
ropes.
Aratauwaiti.
“ Ko te Rimu, ko te Totara, ko te Aratau-
waiti o Tane.—Old Legend,
Aratanga, s. A cleared opening, road,
or pathway in a wood—i.e., where the
small trees are chopped down.


Arau
[65]
Arawa
Tanga rakau; ara, ko te tanga ko te wahi
tapatapahanga.
Ko ta Karo ki, Me xvhakatakoto ki te
aratdnga, taki a takahia i te paekiri.
Aratango, s. A road or pathway
where bushes and shrubs have been
pulled up and thrown aside.
Aratiatia, s, A narrow pathway on a
cliff.
Timata atu i Tauhara ki te aratiatia i
Waikato, liaere i te au o Waikato, Otupo,
&c.
Haruru te ika ki te pu ma te kahu kei te
aratiatia kei te ara tongakengake.
Aratorona. See Toro.
Aratongakengake, s. The way in
and out from the bag of a fishing-net.
“Ko te ara o Tangaroa i haere ai ki te
mate.” (See Aratiatia.)
Aratu, 5. Wakefulness; want of sleep.
Moe dratu nga kanohi.
Aratua, s. [S.] A back road or path.
Aratuanui, s. A main or public road.
Ka maro atu i reira i runga i te aratuanui
e ahu atu ana.
Aratukutuku, S. 1. A way of de-
scent down a cliff by means of a rope.
Ka tukutukua te tangata i runga i te pari
ma te taura ki raro, koia te aratukzctziku.
2. Name of a famous woman of old,
said to have been the mother of a great
taniwha called Te Ihi. She was killed
by the Maoris of Taupo in revenge for
the death of a tohunga of theirs, and
on her death some villages were en-
gulphed!
Aratumahengi, S. Windy pathway.
Aratupuna, s. Scheme or pedigree of
genealogical descent.
Ko nga take enei; ko te aratupuna, ko te
rau-o-te-patn, ko te noho tonu.
Engari me taki tipuna kia pai ai te taunga.
Arau, P-, -tia. 1. To become en-
tangled, as lines in fishing.
Tana aho ka arauki ta Maui.-^-M?/£7i. p. 25.
“ Ka hutia ake tana alio, akuanei ka arau,
ke ki ta te tuakana.”
2. To seek for herbs, &c., for food,
but close at hand.
Haere ki te arazc kai ma tatou.
Arautia mai ki te puwha.
3. To take, to appropriate.
“Ki te pokanoa tetehi ki nga rawaa tetehi
Ka kiia ia, ‘ He tangata arau noa ’: ka
rite hoki ki te aho e arau ana i ta tetehi.”
Ka mea tera, “ Kapea mai hoki nga tane
o te kaainga arau ke atu ki te matamata
haere.”—Old Song, MS.
Araukuuku, 5. A slippery path or
road, from its peculiar soft, greasy
clay, a kind of steatite,
Arawa, S. 1. Name of one of the first
(mythical) wakas of immigrants to
New Zealand, from whom some Maori
tribes trace their descent. Tamateka-
pua was its principal chief, and Nga-
toroirangi its priest, &c. Their conduct
was so bad that it passed into prover-
bial sayings, as,—
“ Arazua mangai nui.”—Prov. p. 2.
“No te uri o te Arawa koe ?”
2. A ceremony performed at the
birth of a child.
Arawa, v. To heal, to close, as the
edges of a wound.
“ E mea ana, kia toro te kiko ora.”
“ Toro te kiko, arawa i o uaua ; tenei hoki
te tutaki, ka mau.”—Part of an old
Charm, See Poet, p. 357.
Arawaapu, 5. A bridge; a wooden
wharf or jetty on piles. (An old word,
but not pure Maori.)
Arawaere, 5. A cleared road or path
in a forest. Syn. Aratango,
Arawahi, S. A first formed track or
pathway.
Na wai tenei arazodhi ?
Arawai, 5. 1. Way or course of com-
munication by water.
I tata mai ratou ki Akarana, a ngawari
tonu te arawai, he moana hoki.
2. A cut drain ; a watercourse.
Arawaru, 1- Name of a worm, said
to be concealed in the earth, that occa-
sionally gives mysterious sounds.
2. Of the sound itself.
3. Of the same, or something similar,
heard at times, in the wind, in a water-
fall, and in the waves of the sea break-
ing on the shore.
Such sounds, however, were not
heard by all, but only (generally) by one,
who, on hearing them, would under-
stand them, and announce the name of
the person to whom they particularly


Aranga
[66]
Aranga
applied. Strange things were said of
the araioaru, but always unwillingly,
and with superstitious fear. Syn.
Awhenua.
Wawa te tai; kei te wawa te talieke ra e
tangi mai ra, he ar aw ar u, ina hoki e
tangi mai nei i roto i te taheke nei.
“ He reo wairua, i rangona e te tangata.”
Arawhakamoekoko, s. A small
track in a forest.
Arawhakapukapuka.
Arawhakatungangi, s. A stile. (1.)
Ka tae atu ki te arapeka i te arazuhakatzi-
ngangi.
Arawhata,s. [H.] 1. A stout, deeply-
notched, fixed pole, by which to ascend
to a raised house or platform.
2. A pole, or tree trunk, thrown
across a river, gulch, &c., as a means
of crossing it.
3. An open inclined plane of any
kind, raised as an ascent or way to
any place.
4. A bridge.
5. A flight of steps; a stairs.
6. A ladder. (Mod.)
Arawhetotara.
Arawhita, $• 1- Small or narrow
road.
2. The path by second fence of a
fortified village.
3. Name of the place where the
Poztnamu (greenstone) was formerly
found. #
4. Name of one of the wives of the
celebrated Tawhaki.
Arawhiti, s. 1. A convulsive throb in
breast or eyelid; a twitch ; a nervous
sign.
Tenei ra to wairua i matahiapo nei, na te
kamo i arawhiti, nau na, e te tau.—Old
Song, MS.
Ko te arazvhiti, he whiti, ara he toera, he
taha ; kei te poho tonu enei e rua, ara ko
te whiti, ko te toera; ko te taha kei te
pakihiwi maui.
2. A short cut across; or a course
from one place to another.
Aranga, S. 1. Time, act, or manner of
awaking from sleep.
2. Of rising up from a recumbent or
sitting posture.
3. Of arising to action, war, &c.
Ko te aranga tenei o te pakanga, ko te
peinga atu o nga Maori.
4. Exitation; excitement.
5. Of being awake, on the alert.
6. Watchfulness.
Ahakoa moe te tinana, he maha nga
aranga o te ngakau.
7. Of raising the legs in dancing.
Katahi ka whakaarahia te waewae, etoru
aranga o te waewae, ka iputu, ka moe.
8. Of the rising of the moon.
I waiho au hei tohu mo te aranga o te
marama.—Myth. p. 54.
9. Resurrection from the dead. (See
verb.) (Matt. xxii. 23, 28 ; Acts xvii.
18.) (Eu. Mod.)
Aranga, v. p., -tia ; v.n., -tanga.
1. To become honoured, celebrated,
notorious.
E aranga ana te ipu o Taraia ; e aranga
ana te mara a Tawao.—Is. xxiv. 20.
2. To be named from any circum-
stance or thing.
Koia i aranga ai tona ingoa ko Heretani-
wha.
Ka aranga i kona te rakau a Manaia, ko
Kihia, ko Rakea.—Myth. p. 123.
Ka tae ki te Wairoa ka taonga te mango;
aranga tonu iho te ingoa o tena wahi ko
Kaimango.
3. To rise out of water, as a man :
Ka whiua te wahine ra ki te wai, te aranga
ake o te wahine ra, ka mau ano ona
ringa ki te ihu o te waka.
— As a dog :
Ka haere atu te kuri ra, ka pokaia te wai
i runga i te tahuna, aranga tonu iho ko
Ruatangahangaha; whakawhiti tonu te
Umuroimata, ka pokaia te wai, aranga
tonu iho ko te Waiomahurangi.—Old
Legend of Tara and his Dog.
4. To rise, to appear : as mud, in sea
or brackish water.
Ko te aranga tonu nga hu o Te Parata.
[N.B.—Said to be caused by the
ingurgitation and regurgitation of the
great powerful sea-monster Parata;
the origin also of the tides.—See
11 Trans. N.Z. Inst.” vol. xx. p. 419.]
5. To rise continually in succession
in the mind.
Aranga te po, aranga te ao, puai nuku,
puai rangi.
Arangahau,
Arangahau iho te hoa nga kawe ora maku.


Areare
[67]
Arero
Arangaranga, v. v.n., -tanga.
To surmise; to think or imagine
imperfectly.
Arangarangatanga, $. Conception,
notion, half or imperfect imagination,
crude thought, surmise.
Kei te huri ano taku mahara, te pono -nga
arangarangatanga, te aha.
Arangatete. See Tete.
Arangi, a. Restless, fickle, unstable.
Syn. Harangi, Karangi, &c.
Are, adv. 1. Namely; that is to say.
Ka mea atu ia, “ Homai o moni”; a, te
hohoro ia te ho atu (are, kihai ia i pai
kia hoatu ana moni).
Ko ta Whanui taku e whakaputa, are, ta
matou me toku hapu katoa.
2. Indeed (intensitive).
Me ruku are au te reinga tupapaku ?
[Obs. This, however, may be in-
tended for ware, the w being omitted
by poetical license.]
Are, conj. Because; inasmuch as.
Are he mea noa ano te kupu a tona ranga-
tira ki a ia.
Are e matau ana hoki koe.
Kia hiahia noho korua ki te aomarama ki
te aha ? Are e noho mamae ana korua.
Are i kite pu hoki koe i te matenga o te pa,
ne ?
Are, intj. What! Ha ! Dost thou I
Darest! (By way of surprise or ques-
tion.)
Are ! ka tohe koe ki au ?
Are, 5. 1. A concavity ; an overhanging
place or hollow.
2. Vacant space.
Area, v. To be blown out, distended,
inflated, as loose clothing by the wind.
E hine, ka area to kahu i te hau.
Arearanga, s. Excavation.
Areare, s. a hollow or cavity in a
cliff or river-bank; a shelving bank
made by tide; an excavation; some
hollow part within the body, chest,
abdomen ; a hollow tree—Ti areare.
Areare, adj. 1. Open, vacant, gaping.
2. A lewd, libidinous woman.
He wahine kotore areare. (9.)
3. (Figi) Rash, hot-tempered, in
speech.
“ He waha kotore areare toku.” (9.)
Areare, v. 1. To be hollowed or ex-
cavated, as a cliff or river-bank by
action of water.
Areare ana te tahataha awa i te karinga a
te wai.
2. To be clear, free from obstruc-
tion, as the cavity of the ear.
Ka rokaro i te tahuri o to taringa kia
areare noa mo te whakarongo atu.
3. To be concave; to make or show
a concavity.
Wherahia i raro kia areare, na te aha koe i
makitaunu mai ai ?
[H. To be hollowed, overhanging,
as waves.]
4. To overhang, as the nose. Syn.
Tauio harew hare.
Areare ana te ihu o tangata ra.
Arearenga, s. A hollow place; con-
cavity ; the concave sky; the chest
within.
E huna nei ki roto i te arearenga o nga
poho o Rangi raua ko Papa.—Myth. p. 4.
Arehe, s. Having small, lean buttocks.
He kohoi te kumu o tamaiti nei, he korehe,
ara, he arehe.
Arei, 5. A screen, an obstruction.
Areiawa, S. 1. A proverbial saying for
a person coming late to the meal—“ E
ta, ko Areiawa koe ?”
2. A reef, shoal, or bank across a
navigable stream.
Ko Whakatane te awa, ko areiawa kei
waenganui o te awa, te tauarai o te
waitai o te waimaori.
Areira, adv. 1. There.
Ki te kiki areira i te utanga. (Is. vii. 1;
Rev. xxi. 23.)
2. It; that place.
(2 Kings xxiv. 11; xxv. 1; Jer. xxxix. 1;
Ezek. xlii. 20.)
Areka.
Areki.
Aremate, intj. Meaning assent to an
order or direction : “ Directly ’; “ Cer-
tainly ”; “ Presently.”
Arere.
Arereao, s- A term given to a good
walker.
“ He kupu whakarite mo te tangata tere
ki te haere.”
Arero, s. [H. T. E.J 1. The tongue.
(Jas. iii. 5, 6, 8, &c.)


An
[68]
Aria
2. The extreme carved top of a
chief’s walking - staff or defensive
weapon (taiaha, hani, or maipi) ; the
protruding carved tongue of the figure-
head of a war canoe.
E mutu iho ranei i te arero o taku patu ?
3. Flame.
He hanga arero kapekapetau te arero o te
ahi.
Whatero kau ana te arero o Mahuika
(Fig. flame).
4. A tenon.
(Ex. xxvi. 17.)
5. Talk; name only; shadow for
substance.
Ko nga moni i whaona ki o ratou pakete
kia ngaro ai; ko te arero ko te mea
mama i homai ki au.
[This word is also Samoan for the
tongue; but, curiously enough, it is
only used for cursing.]
Arero, v.p., -tia.
To be talked of, made the subject of
common talk, gossip, scandal, &c.
Ko te mate o tatou te arerotia.
Arerowero, S. {Fig.) A slanderous,
false tongue.
Arerowhero, s. A very red tongue.
Areto.
Aretopa, v. To soar without flapping
of wings.
Aretopa ana te rere a kereru.
Arewa.
Arenga, The sharpened pointed end
of a spear, rod, or stick ; a blade.
Ari, s. 1. The name of the eleventh
lunar night of the new moon, according
to old toh/u,ngas of Hawke’s Bay and of
Kaitaia and Hokianga North ; but with
some others (as of Taupo) it is only the
tenth. At this age of the moon the
tides were increasing and fish becoming
plentiful, especially their favourite
fresh-water fish Inanga (Galaxias at-
tenuqt/us).
“ Ko Te Hune, Ko Te Ari, ko Te Atua; na,
kei enei e toru nei, ka takoto nunui nga
tai, ka^ere te inanga i enei po.”
Eke, eke, kai" ari; ka uhi te taiki e!—Old
Song, MS.
2. A small shark, a kind of dog-
fish, common in Hawke’s Bay in
summer.
Ari, v. p-> -A. To be dimly or momen-
tarily seen ; confusedly heard, &c.
Kua art rawa te toki a tangata nei; kia
kore au te ara ake noa atu ra, kua wehe
noa atu.
Aria mai.
Aria kau to kupu, haere ana ngaro tonu
atu.
Ehara i te mea i tino tuturu tona kite atu
i a ia, i ari kau.
Aria, s. 1. A long, horizontal, deep
cleft, fissure, or gully in rocks, up
which the tide flows.
2. A deep hollow between two
shoals or banks at sea; a chasm.
3. A proverbial expression of going
to war and being beaten ; like cockles,
&c., washed out of their sandy habitat
and smashed up by the tide in the
aria.
“ Haere ana koe, nga pipi o te aria.”—
Prov. p. 9.
Aria, S. 1. Imagination, idea, notion;
feelings.
Heoi te milii nei mo te arid aroha nei ki a
koe.
Ka mihi te tangata ki te kai, ina te arid,
ina te konohi o te kai e e !
Ka mahue nga arid poua, me nga arid
kaumatua.
2. Significant sign of regard, respect,
remembrance.
Ka mate te tupapaku ka tikina he Koko-
muka, ka whakatakoto hei arid, ka kawea
ki mu a hei arid.
Ariari, adj. 1. The bare trunk of a
tree, without root or branches.
Takoto noa ana te rakau ariari.
2. Bare, unadorned, as a plain gar-
ment.
Kahu ariari ; Whatuma ariari, &c.—See
Poet. p. 315.
3. Sterile; destitute of vegetation.
Mei whakawhiti koe ki te rawahi whaka-
tonga o te wai ariari.—Poet. p. 270.
Ariaria, v. To resemble ; to be some-
what like.
Ehara i te mea i tino rite te ahua, i
ariaria kau.
Ariaria ana te tangata ra ki a Mea.
Ariariatanga, 5. Imagination, ideal
notion; supposition.
Te ariariatanga o te ngakau.
Ariaringa, S- The trunk of a tree,
with its branches lopped off.


Ariki
[69]
Arita
Ariaterangi.
Arihi, v- P-, -TIA. To chop ; to lop off;
to separate by chopping.
“ Arihitia rn&i tena wahi; tapahiamai taua
wahi ra.”
Arikerangi.
Mau ana te rongo a te Urewera na, e waru
tohetohe ki arikerangi tapaliia kau eho,
&c.—Song.
Ariki, 5. 1. The first-born male or
female child of a chief.
2. Title of heir, male or female.
[H.]
3. The principal male of a tribe by
birth.
4. A supreme person; priest; hus-
band. [S. T. R.j {Myth. p. 107.)
5. A superior title given to some of
their ancient great ones; powers;
natural productions, as kumara, sul-
phur, totara, &c. {Poet. pp. 175, 276,
307, 413.)
6. The master or owner of a dog.
He koa no te ngakau o te kuri ra, ka kite
ia i tona ariki.
7. Lord. {Eu. Bible, passim.)
Ariki, v. v.n., -tanga.
To bear, or possess, power, influence,
rule, sway.
I te rangi lioki ra i ariki ai te tangata.—
Poet. p. 50.
Hei ariki ko taku xvaka.—Id. p. 213.
Arikik apakapa.
Arikinoanoa, s. A name for edible
fern-root, Pteris esculenta. (Little, or
lesser, chief or lord.)
Te Kumara ko Rongomaraeroa ; te Aruhe
ko Arikinoanoa; he tamariki ran a no
Rangi raua ko Papa.
I tona haerenga mai i Hawaiki, kihai te
Kumara i apititia ki a Arikinoanoa.
Ko tera kai ko te Aruhe, ko Arikinoanoa,
he atua ano no Tumatauenga.
Arikinonoa, 5. As preceding. See
Kumara.
Arikirau, s. A term for a person who
has many masters.
Ka kiia tenei tangata he Arikirazi, notemea
he tokomaha ona rangatira.
“ Erua, e toru ranei rangatira o te pononga
kotahi, ka kiia, he arikirazc.”
Arikitaniwha. s. A term used for
those ancient mythical or legendary
personages, from whom the Maori chiefs
also traced their descent, who had lived
previous to the time of man—i.e., of
man as he is now.
Hapainga te aho o to tupuna, tama-wahine,
i ariki ai ki te taniwha.—Poet. p. 413.
He putanga wheao, he arikitaniiuha tena.
—Id. p. 193.
Arikitapairu. s. A chief, male dr
female, in regular lineal descent from
eldest lineal ancestor, eldest throughout
in unbroken continuity ; the highest
form of genealogical descent.
“ I whakahuatia ano e Wahanui tenei ingoa
te Arikitapairzc i tana whai korero ki te
Paramete ; he kupu whakanui tena i a te
Kuini.”—(Rawiri te Rangikaurua, in lit.
to the Government.)
“ Me ui koia te tipuna ?” “ Ko te uri au
o te Whakatapairuariki.”—Poet. p. 192 ;
also, Id. p. 78.
Arikitanga, s. Supremacy, power,
dominion; the period or time of pos-
sessing or using such power, &c.
Arikiwi, 5. A dress mat made of the
feathers of the Kiwi {Apteryx, sp.).
“ Me 0 ratou papa arikizui ano.”—Myth.
p. 19.
Arikura.
Arirau.
Aririmu.
Arita, s. Wrath, rage, anger. {Ps.
xxxvii. 8; lxix. 24.)
Arita, v. p. v.n., -tanga.
To rage; to be angry, wrathful.
{Ps. vi. 1; xxxviii. 1.)
Arita, adj. Angry, wrathful, choleric.
Aritahanga, v. To be unsettled, in-
disposed to work, irresolute.
Ko tana haere ki te mahi ehara i te haere
pono ; aritahanga noa; haere kau noa
atu ki waenga, hoki ana ki tahaki.
Aritahi, s. 1. A single tree, tall,
straight, standing alone.
2. A tall, straight, handsome Totara
tree, that splits easily. See Aweawe,
verb. >
Aritahi, adj. A totara tree having its
bark in small, pretty regular, cross-
barred fissures or divisions.
Tana kiri aritahi.—Poet. p. 347.
Ko te kiri o te totara aritahi he mata-
kupenga.
Aritarita, s. Passion, angry feelings,
heat of temper. {Job v. 2.)


Aro
[70]
Aroaro
Aritarita, adj. Passionate ; liot-tem-
pered ; angry. (Judges xviii. 25.)
Aritaritatanga, s. Passion, hot
temper, rage; act, time, place, manner
of showing the same. (Job xl. 11.)
Aritatanga, s. Act, time, place,
manner of being wrathful, angry, &c.
(Ps. xc. 7.)
Aro, s. [H.] 1. Inclination, disposi-
tion, tendency, leaning.
Me ruru tonu iho ki roto i taku aro mokai.
—Poet. pp. 333, 340.
2. Stomach, bowels ; the front of a
person. [T.]
Ka pa mai ki taku aro.—Poet. pp. 45, 228,
294.
[N.B.—With the Polynesians the
affections are seated in the stomach,
bowels. This term is given in Samoa
to “ a chief’s belly,” and to “ a chief’s
child.”; and probably it was also the
same formerly among the Maoris.]
3. The lard, of a pig; fat of belly;
fat of kidneys. Syn. Tao, Taitaro,
Taupa.
Aro,’’- -a, -ngia; v.n., -nga. See
W HAKA ARO.
1. To incline to. (Gen. iv. 4, 5.)
Ekore a Ereatara, e aro mai ki au.
Kua aro mai te whakaaro o nga tangata o
Taranaki ki a Kawana.
Rere ! taku i aro ai ki te pakeha.
Ko to te tangata aro tenei; korero noa atu
ana, koi aro mai, koi aha.
2. To delight in.
Ko tena tamaiti ekore e aroa iho ki au he*
whakangaro aroha moku. (2 Sam. xxiv-
3 ; Ps. cix. 17; Jer. vi. 10.)
3. To frame or dispose the mind
towards any person or thing.
Kua riro te aro o te ngakau o tena tangata,
ki ana kau, hipi, hoiho.
Ta te kuri whangai, kihai i tae te aro kia
patua hei kai.
Ki te aro rere atu ki te moan a, e eke katoa
aku taonga ki runga. (Luke vii. 7;
Jude 9.)
4. To turn towards; to face, to
front. [H.]
Kei te aro pea koe me tautohetohe.
Ko nga kanohi kau anake kia aro atu ; a,
kati ra, he mahi ma nga kanohi.
Aro tonu te manawa o te ahi ki te ate. (A
highly curious sentence.)
5. To attempt, to endeavour.
Pass. To be desired, longed for;
acceptable.
Ko te mea tenei e arongia ana.
E hoa, ehara te Mako i te ika e arongia ana
hei kai.
Aroa, v. To think, understand, believe.
Syn. Mohio.
Aroa noa iho 1 a au, naku tonu ; a, ka
tohe kau koe ?
He mea nei koutou, e aki ana i ahau i te
po aroa nei.
Aroa iho, e he ana, tohe tonu ki te haere.
Te aroa ake i a au, nau ; te mohio iho i a
au, nau.
Aroakapa, s. A line or row of
dancers. See Angiangi, verb, (2).
Mo te turanga i te aroakapa ki te haka.
E kore ia e pai kia rere kau ki mua o te
aroakapa o te haka.—Myth. p. 166.
Aroakapa, v. Syn.
Aroaro, 5. [R.] 1. The front of man
and of any animal.
To kahawai ngako nui, aroaro tahuri ke.—
Prov. p. 92.
Me he aroaro tamahine.—Id. p. 68.
Heoi, kua kite atu kua kite mai, kua ora
te ngakau mokemoke o te aroaro.
2. The presence; face to face ; the
countenance.
I te aroaro o te tokomaha. (Job iv. 15,16 ;
Lev. xxvi. 7, 8.)
Ko tenei, i lioki atu koe, e te Kawana, i te
aroaro o nga painga o nga rangatira o
Ngatiawa.
3. The place immediately before
anyone.
Whangai atu, whangai mai, ki te aroaro
o Murirangawhenua. (Part of Maui’s
spell, in his raising, or fishing up, the
North Island of New Zealand.)
4. The laying, or being, before any-
one : as land stretched out, more or
less distant. (Gen. xlvii. 6.)
5. The front of an army.
Ki te mate ia, ka takoto noa tona iwi i te
aroaro o te taua.
G. The plain, straightforward mean-
ing of words.
Kia tika te korero, kia rite ki te aroaro o
te kupu.
E riri ana ahau, ekore au e huna; ka
korero aroaro au ki a koe. Syn. Aronui.
7. The edge of an axe, canoe paddle,
knife, &c.
8. Before, in time, as the rising of a
star denoting the season of the year.
Haere i mua i te aroaro o Atutahi.—Prov.
pp. 10, 103.


Aroaro
[71]
Aroha
Pukai rawa atu i te aroaro o Matariki.—
Poet. p. 325.
— An adverbial expression in com-
mon use [R.], namely :—
“ I te aroaro o te tokomaha ” ; or, “ o te
katoa ” — Meaning openly, publicly,
before all: enplein jour. (Gen. xxiii. 12 ;
Ex. xiii. 22; Ps. c. 2 ; Acts xxvii. 35.)
Aroaro, adj- Open, plain, straight-
forward, public.
E riri ana ahau mo te inalii titahataha;
ekore au e huna ; ka korero aroaro ahau
ki a koe.
Aroaro, v. p., -tia. To present the
edge of an axe, paddle, knife, &c.,
towards any one—especially in a
threatening manner.
A ko te vvhiunga mai o te toki i aroarotia.
Aroaroa, v. To be alone.
Te aroaroa i a au i te kore tangata I
Aroaroa i a au, ko koe tonu hei haere i a au.
Aroaroa, adj. [T.J Lonely; walking
singly.
Aroarohaki, s. See Aroarowhaki.
Aroarohea, S- Pain in the stomach.
See Arohea.
Aroaromahana, s. 1. The spring
season of the year.
Ko te aroaromahana ka timata te korero a
nga manu ; ka puawai nga rakau o te
tau (season).
2. Name for the spring season. (1.)
Ko nga po nunui o te tau, e wlia; ko te
hotoke, ko te aroaromahana, ko te
raumati, ko te ngaburu.
Aroaromahanatanga, s. Time or
season of spring.
Me te riroriro hoki, e waiata nci i tana
waiata pai ina tae ki te aroaromahana-
tanga o te tau.
Aroarotea, s. A crested seabird:
“ Spotted Shag” (Phalacrocorajc punc-
tatus).
Aroarouri, s. Black front.
Aroarowhaki, v. 1. To flap the
wings, as a cock, duck, &c.
2. To slap the hands together with a
fierce, quivering motion, as in defying
the foe.
Ka inahi te ringaringa aroarowhaki taua!
—Prov. p. 39.
3. To shake an uplifted spear, &c.,
so as to cause it to quiver regularly, in
defiance.
4. To brandish weapQns.
Aroauhitiangiangi,
He muka ano taku i tipu ki te Aroauhitia-
ngiangi Matangi te whakarau o te rangi.
—Old Song, MS.
Aroha, s. [H. T. S. R. Tng., almost
universal.] Fellow-feeling, sympathy,
compassion, pity, affection, kindness;
great attachment, especially to an
absent one; feelings of respect, of
desire to save from contumely things
of old; grief; love (Mod.); divine
grace (Eu.).
Aroha, v. p., -INA, -HINA, -tia; v.n.,
NGA, -TANGA.
1. To have or show compassion for ;
to sympathise with ; to pity ; to have
mercy. [H.]
Engari, e te whanau, kei aroha tatou ki
tona auetanga.—Myth. p. 19. (Jer. xiii.
14 ; Mark viii. 2 ; ix. 22.)
2. To be kind; to have regard for
person or thing; to feel for any one,
or thing, in distress ; to help willingly.
Koia a Wi Tamihana i mea ai, “E aroha
ana ia ki nga tangata Maori, ki nga
pakeha.”
He maha nga karakia mo tenei hanga mo
te kanga kihai i whakina mai, he tupato
no nga tohunga, he aroha hoki ki nga
karakia o mua a nga matua.—Myth. p.
89.
Ko nga iwi i aroha ki a Tuhourangi, ko te
Tawera, ko, &c.
I aroha au ki nga taonga o te pakeba ka
maumau noa nei.
He aroha noa ake ki te hau auru. —Poet.
p. 274.
3. To be greatly affected by hearing
anything related.
E aroha ana au ki nga korero o Paora kua
korerotia nei.
Ka whakahuatia tenei waiata ka puta te
aroha ki to ratou whenua.
4. To regret; to think on one’s
home, or place, with home-sick feelings.
Ka ki atu te matua, “ E aroha ana koe ki
to taua kainga ? Kaore : ka aroha koe,
me hoki koe.”
Tera ahau e tangi marire ki te rakau o te
kainga aroha nui.
Te aroha i au ki taku whenua I e !
Ka aroha iho au ki taku kainga 1
5. To be pleased with, satisfied : as
for courageous conduct, &c.
Katahi ano. a Manaia ka mohio nana ano
taua tamaiti, (i toa,) na ka arohatia ia e
Manaia.—Myth. p. 119.


Arohi
[72]
Aronui
6. To love. (Mod. Eu.)
[N.B. — Not formerly used by
Maoris (and Polynesians) for sexual
love (desire), nor for craving after
riches—property, money, &c.: all such
usage is highly incongruous. See good
example of former in Grey’s “ Mytho-
logy and Traditions,” p. 39.]
Arolia, Kai", s. A sympathiser; a
helper ; a friend in need.
Arohaki, v. To encourage the paddlers
of a canoe.
He whakahau te arohahi i nga tangata kia
kaha te hoe.
Arohakino, $• [H.] Kind words only;
no real help or assistance in distress ;
assumed ; not real.
Arohata, s. A ladder ; climbing pole ;
a tree felled and laid across a stream
as a bridge. Syn. Aroiuhata.
Arohatanga, Time, act, place, or
manner, of showing fellow-feeling, &c.,
for another—man, beast, or thing;
— Compassion, pity, sympathy, mercies,
kindness, love. (Ps. cvi. 7.)
— Love between sexes. (Eu. Mod.)
Arohatia, adv, Kindly, friendly;
warily.
I korerotia arohatia atu e au ki a ia.
Arohau.
Ehara i te kaipuke nei I i arohau tomo ki
roto.
Arohanga. See Arohatanga.
Arohea.
Ka arohea noa nga kanohi ka mate.
No te kanohi ra te arohea i a au ; ko te
mamae o te puku, ko nga kanohi ka
whakakikiwa; ka mohiotia atu kai roto
te mate.
Ko te korapa, hinapo, arohea, he aitua.—
Poet. p. lxxx.
A plant that grows on Tararua
mountain range, said to be of service
in modern Maori medicine.
Aroheawhea.
Arohena.
Arohi, v. 1- To look unnaturally pale.
[H., “ To reflect brightness;” ‘‘to
shine.”]
Ka mate koe i te kai, kei te arohi noa o
kanohi, kei te koma o kanohi; he mate
tonu, inahoki te ahua.
2. To seek closely after ; to examine.
I a maua ano i reira i nui noa te arohi ki
tena wahi, a, kaore i kitea.
Arohirohi, 5.1. Particles of heat rising
upwards, glancing and quivering on a
hot summer’s day, from a dry, stony
beach, or the sheltered sunny end of
a wood.
Koia te arohirohi o te wahi nei!
2. Sultriness.
Arohirohi, v.
1. To quiver in the eyelids.
“ Arohirohi noa to wairua i runga i aku
kamo e 1 ”—Poet. p. 394.
2. To feel a quivering, throbbing
sensation.
Arohirohi noa, e Rangi, i a au, te ura o te
kiri.”—Id. p. 203.
3. To radiate, from heat of sun.
4. To be sultry, excessively hot,
from radiation of heat and little or no
wind.
5. To turn round ; to be giddy.
Arohirohitanga, s. Uncertain, qui-
vering, glancing motion, animal or
inorganic.
E, ko te arohirohitanga mai o te wairua
o te makau.—Poet. p. 81.
Aromea, 5. Anything taken away by
another.
“ He taonga riro i tetahi atu tangata.”
Te huia aromea.
He puaki aromea koia ?—Poet. p. 276.
Aronui, s. 1. A large, fine, Maori
clothing flax mat or dress, worn by
chiefs, ornamented with a single border
on one side only—similar to a paepae-
roa (but that has borders on three
sides).
2. A large stone axe. Syn. ELangai,
Arotahi.
Aronui, v. p., -tia; v.n., -TANGA.
1. To front; to set the face or front
fully; to confront, to face; to sit
towards, to be fronting of. (Gen. xxi.
16.)
Tahuri mai, kia aronui ai te korero.
2. To go boldly to work; to do a
thing openly.
Kaua e tama e haere numinumi ; aronui
te haere ki roto.—Poet. p. 323.


Arota
[73]
Arowh
3. To devote one’s self to anything;
to u turn-to with a will;” to follow
steadily.
A, ko tana hoki i aronui ai, he whakatupu
i te pai ki a ratou.
Kihai i aronuitia e ratou te liokohoko, na
reira i rawakore ai.
Kahore raia, e te iwi, aku aronui atu ki te
mahi.—Poet. p. 188.
4. To be over against. (1 Kings
xvii. 5.)
5. To present the full plain face of
anything.
Aropa, 1- To keep close together
in travelling.
Kia aropd te tu me te haere.
2. To salute intimately ; to sit along-
side in a friendly way.
He whetiko pea ahau ki a ia, kahore i
aropd, i aha.
Aropaaua, 5- a double net for small
fish.
Aropiri, v. p., -nga. To hug, as a
mother her child; to embrace closely.
Te aropiri mai ki taku tinana nei.—Poet.
p. 104.
Tu mai, Iratu, e ! kia aropiri mai ki roto
ra, e I—Id. p. 131.
Aropiringa,
Ka taiketia ra, te ai he aropiringa.
Arorangi, adv. Upwards in space;
towards heaven, or sky.
Moe iho au ki te pd, e rere arorangi ana
taku wairua.
Arore.
“ Rore kai, rore whakatoi ranei.”
Aroriri, s. Angry feelings.
Kahore he aroriri oku ki a ia.
Arorua, v. To be double-minded.
Ka arorua to mahi; kaore kia kotahi te
whakaaro mau; koia i kore ai.
Arorua, s. The place of meeting be-
tween the incoming wave or swell and
the receding surf.
“ Ko to waenganui ngaru ko ia te arorua."
Arotaetae, 5. The diaphragm.
“ Ae, riu taetae, arotaetae, he kawa no roto
no te riu o te tangata.”
Arotahi, v- 1. To have one’s mind
set on one thing.
Na, he tangata arotahi ia ki te whakakake
i tona ingoa.
2. To attend to in a body, or to-
gether.
Kia arotahi mai tatou ki te kupu patai nei.
Kia arotahi mai; ara, kia ririte te tu me
te haere.
Arotahi, s. A large stone axe. Syn.
Aronui.
Arotara, s. A variety of New Zealand
flax (Phormium).
Arotatae.
I te mea e arotatae ki te whawhai ki tehoa
riri.
Arotatai.
Arotau, v. p., -a.
1. To fully consider.
Ki te taea enei kupu te ata arotau marire
e te tangata Maori.
Ka pai ka arotau ki te titiro atu.
2. To take cognizance of; to recog-
nise.
Mehemea he take ia, e ahei te arotau atu
e te tangata.
3. To act straightforwardly, openly.
Ka whakaaturia mai, me arotazb pai ano e
toku whakaaro.
Kia huaina atu, e arotau ana mai.—Prov.
p. 62.
4. To follow up, to pursue, to seize.
Ka whakaputa te Kanae, ka arotaua e te
Mango.
Arotea, 5. A species of shag, with a
white front and belly. (7.)
Arotiatia, s. A way or mode of inter-
course from imaginary evil beings, or
demons, to man.
He ara no nga atua Maori o mua.
“ Kai te arotiatia, kai te ara tongakengake
uru.o Tangaroa ki te kara pinepine i
uta ra.”—Old Song.
Aroto, adv. 1. Within.
2. The inside (hollow).
He ana kowhatu, nohoia ana aroto e te
tangata.
Kua kohia aroto ki nga taonga o Maitai.
3. The inside (solid). (Rev. v. 1.)
Ma te kiri o tenei Kumara; mangu aroto.
He Mataii te rakau, he mea karo aroto.
Arouri.
Arowa, s. The name of the wife of
Ngatoroirangi, the famous tohunga of
the (mythical) wctka Arawa.
Arowhata. Syn. Araiuhata.
Arowhena.


Aruaru
[74]
Aruhe
Aronga, s. 1. Inclination.
2. Assistance, countenance, encou-
ragement, aid.
Ahuareka toku ngakau ki te aronga mai o
enei tangata pai.
Paku noa nga rangatira o te motu nei, ko
te aronga anake tenei o nga rangatira.
3. A leading onwards.
Ko te waka hoki whai tonu atu i muri i te
aronga kaunga atu o te kuri ra.— Myth.
p. 121.
4. The front; the place before any-
thing : as before the face, or door of a
house, a wall, fence, &c.
I te aronga o te whare.
I te aronga atu o te kuwaha. (2 Chron.
xxix. 19; Neh. viii. 3; xiii. 21; Dan.
iii. 3; Ezek. ix. 6; xli. 14, 25.)
Aru, -mia; v.n., -kanga, -manga,
-NGA.
1. [R.] To follow, to come after.
(Mark viii. 19 ; Luke ix. 57, 61 ; John x. 5 ;
xiii. 37.)
2. To pursue, to chase.
Ka mea raua kia arumia; heoi ra, ka
tangi te aru.
3. To observe; to gaze after, or
follow, with the eyes.
Kei reira tonu atu aku kanohi te aru iho
nei ki a Ruta.—Poet. p. 268.
4. To look out for and stop at stops
in reading (said to a learner).
Kaua koia pea e arumia ki te koma
(comma).
Aru,s. Following; pursuit, chase; act,
manner, or time of following, pursuit;
courtship, wooing, &c.
Arua.
Aru, Kai-, s. A pursuer.
Aruaru, p.» -MIA, -tia ; v.n., -manga,
-tanga, -nga.
1. [H.] To follow frequently; to
pursue steadily.
2. To listen to; to be favourably
inclined.
E aruaru ana i nga whakaaro.
Ki te korikori a Kahukura (the rainbow),
katahi ka mohiotia e aruaru ana i nga
whakaaro o nga tohunga.
3. To court, woo, make love; en-
deavour to gain by assiduous atten-
tion ; to solicit.
Na, ka aruaru tetahi tangata ki te wahine,
kihai i pai te wahine ki a ia.
Ka mate Te Tauhara, ka aruarumia e Te
Hau a Te Arai, whakatika ake te wahine
oma ana.
I mua, ka aruaru te tangata nei i tana
wahine, a kihai i moe tenei tangata.
Ko Miru ka aruaru, kihai i pai mai.
4. To chase, with intent to seize and
kill. [H. T. S. Tng.]
Ka puta iho te Tupua ra ki te aruaru i
nga tangata kc hei oranga mona.—Myth.
p. 156.
Nga uri o Punga aruaru kai.—Prov. p. 67.
Tokowha te hunga nei ekore e taea te
aruaru, he hunga kino.
5. To drive off; to expel.
Kua aruarumia e koutou nga pakeha.
6. To seek, or endeavour, to put a
stop to by perseverance.
Aruarutia kia mutu te turituri.
7. To interrupt (as a speaker), by
questioning.
Kia ata aruaru i te korero.
Ka tu te tangata ki te korero, ka ki ake
tetahi; ka karanga mai tetahi, “ Kaua e
aruarumia te korero ; kia maro tonu to
korero.”
Aruaru, Kai-, s. A follower; a
wooer. [T. aruaru, “ A huntsman, a
pursuer.”]
Aruaru, s. 1. Courtship; following
assiduously, &c.
2. A small hand-net for fishing.
Aruaru, adj. Closely following about,
as a child its mother.
He tamaiti tangi aruaru.
Aruarumanga,) s. Act, time, place,
Aruarunga, ) or manner of follow-
ing, chasing, pursuing, courting, &c.
Aruaruwahine, s. Courtship; woo-
ing ; solicitation.
Aruhe, S. 1. The general name for
edible fern-root (Pteris esculentd), of
which there are many varieties.
Among the best sorts are Kaita, Benga,
and Maliunga ; of the inferior, Tuakau,
Paka, Huirau, Pitopito, Pakupaku,
&c.
2. The place where the fern-root is
dug.
Ka hapainga ki runga aruhe kari ai; ka tu
ko te whanau a Ra, ki runga ki te
whakaroro.
Aruhemokopuna, s. A kind of
fern-root with few or no stringy
fibres ; soft, of best quality for food.


Ata
[75]
Ata
Aruhetakaka, s. Fern specially re-
served by toliibngas for their imaginary
gods (nga atua).
“ He rarauhe; he mea karakia na nga
tohunga Maori, liai rakau ma ona atua
Maori.”
Arukanga,
Arumanga,
Arunga,
(See verb).
s. Act, time, place, or
manner of following,
pursuing, courting, &c.
Aruru, 5. A sea-fish.
Arutunga, s. 1. The seeking a coveted
place, position, or post, of name,
honour, or importance with the tribe ;
ending in discomfiture.
Tana arutunga nei e !
2. A smashing, breaking up—as of
calabashes, wooden vessels, &c.
“ Ka rutua; ka taia, koia te arutiinga.”
Arunga, adv. 1. On the top.
E tamia ana arunga o nga maunga e te
kohu.
Ko to maua nei whare kua poki drunga
i te kakaho.
He mea pubipuhi drunga, me nga taha,
me raro.—Myth. p. 154.
2. The top. (G-en. xi. 4.)
Ko taku whare i ngaro i te waipuke, kihai
i purero drunga o nga whare, tae noa ki
te 22 o nga ra, katahi ka kitea arunga o
te rakau.
3. The surface.
Uhi rawa arunga o te tepu (table) ki te uhi
pai.
4. The apex, tip, or point of a leaf.
I keokeo tonu arunga te matamata o tenei
Korari.
5. The upper part of a bundle of
rods.
Me whitiki arunga o nga rakau kia pupu ai«
Ata, s. 1. The early morning. [Tng.,
“ morning light ” ; T. S., “ twilight.”]
(Eu. Mod. The whole morning, fore-
noon ; but this is not Maori.)
2. Reflected image in water; a look-
ing-glass, &c. [Tng. H.]
3. Likeness, resemblance, in outline
or colour. [H.]
Aue, aue, kimikimi noa ana; e kapo ki te
whetu, e kapo ki te marama, e kapo ki
te ata o to tane.—Poet. p. 431.
4. The shadow, or shade, of most
things. [H. T. S. Tng.]
He tangata makutu a Kiki. Ka whiti te
ra ekore a Kiki e haere i te wahi noa,
kei haere tona ata ki muri, kei tapu.—
Myth. p. 172.
Ho mai noa nga manu ma Hatupatu, ko te
ata kau e kawe huna iho.—Id. p. 95.
[N.B.—The shade of a tree, house,
&c., is maru ; so H.]
5. Reflected light, as from a grassy
plain into a house.
Ko te ata o te parae ka tau katoa ki te
whare nei.
— As from the sea, thrown on to a
dark, perpendicular eastern cliff about
sun-setting.
Ko te ata o te moana ka tau ki te pari rara I
6. The form, shape.
“Kei roto i taua whare” [menagerie]
“ nga kuri ngau tangata nei, te pea raua
ko te taika” [bear and tiger] ; “ te kino
o tona ata ki te titiro atu, mau ana te
wehi.”—(Meiha Rapata, in lit,)
7. Suspicion of guilt.
Ko te ata o te he kua tau ki a ia.
8. First stealthy approach, as of
feeling sleepy.
Ko te ata o te moe kua tau ke ki runga ki
a Ereatara.
9. A peculiar kind of apprehension,
amounting almost to a certainty, of the
approach of a war party.
Ko te ata o te taua tenei; i tawhiti noa
atu te taua e haere mai ana, ko te ata
noa kua tae mai ki te tangata whenua ;
a kua whitawhita te tangata, kua takatu ;
kua pawera hoki.
10. Representative, as members to
Parliament.
Tetahi: he ata ratou no o ratou iwi; he
tika kia ahua rangatira ratou me o ratou
whakaaro.
11. Name for paper-money. (Mod.)
Te ata o te moni anake i ho mai.
12. Promises of property, &c.
Te ata o te taonga.
13. Bare shadowy form, image, or
idea.
Ko te ata ko te ahua hoki o nga taonga i
riro i a ratou (fairies).—Myth. p. 181.
Homai te ata o te kai.—Poet. p. 320.
14. Remembrances of those departed.
Haere mai! te ata, he ata matua; ko au
tenei e mihi atu nei ki a koe.
Na te ata o nga mea nunui i whakangaro.
Ka tau ano koe te ata o Pohea.—Poet. p.
325.


Ata
[76]
Ataha
15. Beauty ; beautiful likeness or
resemblance.
To kiri whakaheke ki te ata kahurangi.—
Poet. p. 317.
Ka taia i te ata o Hinerauwharangi.—Id.
p. 59.
16. Words pronounced, in lieu of,
instead of (used in charms, &c.) Poet.
pp. 353, 361.
Koia tona he, whiua ake te mea pono,
hopu ke ki te ata.
17. The strength, power, influence
of a spell, religious ceremony, &c.
Haere, e te tau, i te ata o te tapu~ -
Mana, ma to tuahine, e ho mai Poutini,
e mau atu ai te ata o Whakatupu.
Ata, adj. Morning; matutinal; per-
taining to early morning.
Ata, adv. [H.] A particle prefixed to
many verbs, and, while of one radical
sense, possessing many delicately
differing shades of meaning; indicat-
ing:—
1. Gently, quietly, soberly, tem-
perately, dispassionately, gradually.
He tangata pai he tangata ata meamarire.
Katahi ka whakatika nga tangata ki runga
ki te korero i te maia, i te ata whaka-
haere, i te ata ngarahu, i te ata toro-
toro.—Myth. p. 150.
2. Almost, well-nigh, nearly.
3. Quite, entirely, fully, completely,
thoroughly.
Kihai i ata titiro ki te ara ka hinga ia.
Kahore te kai nei kia ata maoa.
4. Openly, unconcealedly. (Ex.
xxi. 19.)
Ha! ko tatou, ko te mea i ata tirohia iho
e ia, te ata whanautanga, me te ata tako-
toranga ki runga ki te takapau hora nui,
he aha ra te moetahi ai ki a ia ?—Myth.
p. 11.
5. Designedly, intentionally.
Nau pu ano ; ina hoki he mahi ata whaka-
takoto tau mahi ra !
Ata, adj. Clear, plain; in accordance
with; right; perceived. (Used mostly
by way of assent to something being
said or explained.)
“ He ata, he ata : ae.”
Ata, intj. Expressive of dislike, disgust,
vexation, dissatisfaction.
Ata / ina te kaki ka taretare noa.—Prov.
p. 2.
Ata 1 te piro.—Myth. p. 48.
Ataahua, s. Beauty; beautifulness,
pleasantness, agreeableness; fairness
of appearance.
(Gen. xxix. 17 ; Dent. xxi. 11; Acts iii. 2 ;
vii. 20.)
Ataahua, adj. 1. Beautiful, pretty,
pleasant, agreeable.
2. Fine, fair, as weather.
Haere, koi ataahua te rangi.
Ataahua, v. v.n.t -tanga.
1. Tobe pleasant; to be’ agreeable
to the feelings.
2. To be fair, beautiful, handsome,
well-formed; applied to both male
and female.
3. To be fine, as the weather.
Ataahuatanga, S- Pleasingness, agree-
ableness, beauty, fairness ; fineness, as
of weather.
— The state or manner of being so.
Ataao, 5. Early dawn; first blush of
morning. Syn. Ataiti.
Ataata, $• 1- Outlines, form, &c., of
anything seen indistinctly.
2. Dimness of sight; haziness;
cloudiness.
Ko te ataata anake e kitea aua e au.
3. Early morning.
Kei maru ataata au te whakama..Poet,
p. 180.
I te ataata ka haere.
4. A univalve shell-fish (Turbo sma-
ragdus). Syn. Koramct.
Ataata, adj. 1. Wary, as a bird.
2. Cheerful; serene; at ease; light-
some.
Pouri ake ; te ataata mai i a au.
Ataawatea, adv. Early morning after
sunrise; broad daylight.
I te ataawatea ka hurahia.
Atae. intj. Expressive of dislike, as-
tonishment. (Abbn. for Kdtae.)
Atae te hoi o tenei taurekareka I—Myth.
p. 168.
Ataenoa, adv. Until; referring to
place ; also time.
Atahaere, v. p., -nga; v.n., -tanga.
[H.]
1. To walk, to travel gently, lei-
surely.


Atahi
[77]
Ataki
2. To move gradually, to go slowly,
as the hands of a clock or watch ; to
go softly.
3. To speak or act considerately,
carefully, temperately, gently, mo-
derately. Syn. Atahanga.
4. To successfully pursue, or carry
out steadily.
5. To beware ; to be cautious.
Kia atahaere kei rangona mai tatou'.
Atahaere, s. Slow pace or movement.
Titiro ki tana atahaere.
Atahaere, Slow, careful, con-
siderate.
Atahaeretanga, s. 1. Manner of
careful action, speaking, &c.
2. The successful carrying-out or
accomplishment of any work, plan, or
thing.
Kua kitea te atahaeretanga o enei tikanga
ki tenei whenua.
Atahaeremarie, ) v. v.n., -tanga.
AtahaeremarireJ Same as Ata-
haere, but more strongly expressed
by the addition of the suffix marie =
gently, considerately, quietly, fully.
Atahapara, Dawn ; break of day.
See Ataiti.
Ka hinga te patunga i te atahapara.
E hika e, kei whea ra koe e ngaro nei te
atahapara ?—Poet. p. 253.
Atahanga, v.
1. To deal gently, carefully. (2 Sam.
xviii. 5.)
2. To speak or act moderately,
considerately—nothing in great haste
or hurry. (2 Kings v. 20.)
3. To spare : as in serving out, dis-
tributing food, when little; to be
economical. (Ps. xxxix. 13.)
4. To work steadily, quietly, well—
the opposite of hurry, haste, &c.
Tenei ra; me matakitaki atu, e atahanga,
ka toro atu taku ringa.
Atahanga, Well made or put
together.
Atahikoi, v. 1. To step warily,
daintily, delicately. (1 Sam. xv. 32.)
2. To move with measured slow
steps.
Atahira, adv. Day after to-morrow.
Atahu.
Atahua. Syn. Ataahua. (Poet. p.
310.)
Atahurumanu, s. Break of day.
(Affectionate poetical term.)
Kei liea koe, e tama, e ngaro whakaitu nei
i te atahzirumami?—Poet. p. 253.
Atai.
Haraliara aitu, harahara atai.—Poet, p. 40.
Te po i a Tauranga-i-ataia.—Id. p. 280.
Ataitai.
Hapara mai te ataitai o te moana ra, ko te
po roa o Whakikina.—Old Song, MS.
Hapara mai te ata i tai o te moana ra.—Id.
[N.B.—I have two versions of this
old song, and in each the above term
is written differently by intelligent,
skilled Maoris. I incline to this latter,
and I give them both here from their
connection with the verb hapara.]
Ataiti, s. Daybreak. Syn. Ataao.
I rere mai hold tera i te ataiti.
Muri mai o te ataiti ka whakatika, ka
whanake.
I te ataiti ka liuaki te ope ra ki te whare
o te tangata ra.
Atakai, v- 1- To be temperate in
eating and drinking.
2. To eat gently, gradually, slowly.
3. Fig. for passion, love, &c.
“Atakai mai Huirau i au!”—Old Song,
MS.
Atakai, adj. Temperate, as to food,
drink, &c. ; slow in eating, &c.
Atakamahina. See Atamahina.
Atakii, v. To speak, command, direct
gently. (Often used as a kind of
reproof.)
Atakiimarie, v. Same as preceding,
only a little stronger.
Atakite, v.p., -a; v.n., -nga.
1. To see clearly. (1 Sam. iii. 2.)
Kaore ia i atakite atu i Mokoia i te pouri o
te po.—Myth. p. 132.
Te atakitea atu te whetu o te rangi.—Poet.
p. 240.
2. To examine carefully.
I kite ano ra ahau, otira kahore ahau i
atakite.
3. To know fully, clearly; to per-
ceive.
Kei roto i te wai e noho ana, kei uta ranei;
kowai hoki e atakite ?—Myth. p. 154.


Atama
[78]
Atami
Atakore, a. Unfriendly; illiberal.
Atakorero, v. To speak cautiously,
advisedly, deliberately. [H.]
Atakorero, Considerate, mode-
rate ; of gentle speech; not hasty;
cautious.
Atakorero, s- Cautious, moderate,
gentle speech ; good advice.
Atamahara, v. To be mindful; to be
caring for; to recollect.
Te atamahara ki o potiki e Kahurangi nei.
—Old Song, MS.
Atama hi, v. To work with care,
attention, &c. Nearly Syn. with Ata-
hang a.
Atamahi, adj. Gradual; easy ; care-
ful ; by degrees ; opposed to haste.
Atamahina, S- Early light, clear light
of morning.
Haere i te atamahina.—Poet. p. 288.
Te ata rapa, te ata ka mahina, ka mahina
te ata i Hikurangi.—Old Song or Charm,
MS.
[N.B.—An old word, little used
now, and almost obsolete ; only found
(as far as I know) in ancient prayers,
charms, and songs (see examples).
Mahina is the proper Polynesian term
for the moon (H. S. T. Tng.), and
although such is not the case now in
Maori, yet I think that atamahina
formerly meant moonlight, much as
atamdrama does at present; it may
have meant moonlight in the early
hours or morning of the day. In
“ Poet,” p. 218, we have “ Mahina-i-te-
ata-ropa-nui ” as a proper name (and
a highly curious one), and in Grey’s
“ Mythoi, and Trads.,” p. 74, we have
also “ Mahina ” as the name of a very
early celebrated personage, the full
name being AZh/w^a-i-te-rangi.]
Atamai, Liberality, favour, conde-
scension, kindness.
Atamai, adj. Liberal, free, familiar,
condescending, kind.
Atamai, v. 1. To be liberal, generous,
free, kind.
2. To be observant, ready in reply;
to comprehend quickly. (H. T. S.
“ To be wise, skilled, ingenious.”)
Atamaiwaho, s- Calm outside.
Atamaingutu, s. Lip-praise ; silver-
tongue (meaning, however, the oppo-
site).
Ko te atamaingutti au a te tamaiti nei.—
Poet. p. 376.
Atamarama, «• Moonlight.
He taitoko ki te moana, he atamdrama ki
uta.—Prov.
He atamdrama ki uta, kaore e mate nga
Jtai o uta, ara o te ngahere, nga kiore, i
te marama o te marama.
AteSe,) adj- Quiet’ peacefuL
Atamarie,
Atamarire, I s. Quietness,
Atamarietanga, | peacefulness.
Atamariretanga,,
Atamea, 1 v. To speak or do
Atameamarie, J. anything consider-
ately, steadily, quietly, gradually, dis-
passionately.
Atamea, 1 adj. Easy, gentle,
AtameamarieJ moderate, without
haste, or passion.
Atamira, s. A stage or low platform
on which a dead chief is placed, in
some state, to be seen and mourned by
his tribe and visitors.
Ka noho mai tera (corpse) i runga i te
atamira.
Iri mai, e pa, i runga i te atamira.—Poet.
p. 69.
2. A small, raised stage; sitting-place,
rustic bower, arbour. {Myth. p. 130.)
3. A platform, a stage; raised seats,
dais.
Ko nga rangatira i noho katoa i runga i te
atamira, i te putake o te pou o te haki
(Union Jack : Queen’s flag).
4. Main-chains of a ship.
E tu ana taua heremana i te atamira i
waho atu o te niao o te kaipuke.—Meiha
Rapata, in lit.
5. Cross-trees of a ship.
I whati pororere te rewa i runga iti ake o
te tunga tangata, me te atamira nei te
rite.—Id.
6. Gallery, in churches.
Me runga o etahi whare-karakia teitei
rawa, i hangaia ki te atamira.—Id.
7. A hollowed tree, in the shape of a
canoe, attached to the paahu, where
the dead are deposited.
Atamiro. Syn. Atamira.


Atarau
[79]
Atara
Atamoe, V- To be at peace; to dwell
peaceably. (Lit. Sleep quietly, un-
disturbed.)
E hoa, tenei to iwi a Ngapuhi kei to
atamoe.
Atamounu, s. 1. Bait securely fas-
tened on to a hook and cast into the
sea.
2. Name given to a person sent to
cajole another to come away with him
to the sender ; also, to his flattery, &c.
Ka tae, ka korero, ka tibiro atu te tangata
mona nga korero, ka mea atu, “ He
atamounu, ano lioki koe i hara mai ai.”
Atanoho, S- 1- Peace, quietness.
Taku i pai ai, ko te tika, ko te rangimarie,
ko te atanoho. (Is. xxx. 15 ; xxxii. 17.)
2. Dwelling peacefully at home.
Te matua o nga atanoho.
3. A peaceful, quiet person; a
keeper at home. (2 Sam. xx. 19.)
Atanoho, v.
1. To be quiet; to be peaceable, as
land without broils. (Is. xiv. 7.)
2. To be domestic.
3. To be docile, tame, tractable—
used of a fierce beast.
E nui ana te inohio o taua Ngarara nei,
kei te taenga atu ki a ia o tona ranga-
tira o Tangaroa, he nui tana atanoho.—
Myth. p. 156.
Ataotemata,
Atapaa, v. 1. To blow gently, as a
light breeze.
2. To touch or handle gently.
Atapai, adj. Well disposed; favour-
able to ; moderate ; good.
Atapo, Morning twilight, before
daylight. (Luke xxiv. 1.)
Atapongipongi, s. The early dawn ;
morning twilight.
Atara.
Atarapa, s- Increasing dawn, daylight
advancing.
Ka tau te rangi, te atatuhi, te atarapa.—
Old Legend, MS.
Atararanga, v. To blow gently, as a
breeze. Syn. Angiangi.
Ka atararanga marie te hau nei. See
Atarangaranga.
Atarau, 5. 1. The moon. (Ezek.
xxxii. 7.)
E titi koia e te atarau, tiaho i runga ra.—
Poet. p. 119.
Kapohia e hine te atarau o te rangi.—Id.
p. 346.
E whi aku tatari ka whiti te atarau.—Id.
p. 396.
2. Moonlight.
Ka titi tonu te marama he atarazb hoki
nona.—Old Song.
I tetahi pd atarau ka haere a Rona ki te
utu wai.—Old Legend, MS.
[N.B.—The Hawaiian has ata for
the light of the moon before rising.]
3. Name of the mouthpiece of the
largest size eel-traps.
He atarau kei te powha tawiri hinaki
nei, ko te wahi kia tuwhera ai he atarau.
Atarauhanga, s. 1. Cunning, guile;
wiles, schemes, stratagems, devices.
Mokai e whae te atarauhanga i taku
hinenga.— Poet. p. 403.
2. Skill; excellence of work, mostly
used of small, neat manufactures.
Atarauhanga, adj. Wily, cunning;
full of devices, plans, stratagems, &c.;
skilled, able.
Ataraweke, 1. To work quickly,
regularly, and neatly, as in carving,
&c.; to manipulate skilfully; to ela-
borate work; to finish any manufac-
ture well. See Raweke.
2. To write swiftly and clearly.
(Mod.)
Atarangaranga, v. 1. To be nearly
calm, the surface of the sea slightly
rippling.
E atarangaranga ana te moana.
2. To commence a journey easily;
to get ready quietly without bustle;
to stir up the helpers, &c., gently.
Kia atarangaranga i a tatou.
Atarangi, s. 1. A shadow; a shade
with defined limits representing the
form or outlines of the object.
2. A disembodied spirit, during life.
(Such, according to the Maori, taking
place in dreams while asleep).
Na, hoki mai ana au ki te aomaori, hoki
mai ana taku atarangi ki au.
3. The shadows (generally in the
plural, or having a plural meaning) ;
the beautiful and pleasing; imagina-
tions ; pretty ideas.


Atata
[80]
Atatu
Ina hoki ra e marie nei, iri ana nga patu
! ki te whare, atatakoto ana te putea ki te
i whare, reka ana te kai, au ana te moe.
3. To be well-planned or executed.
Kei kore e dtatokoto a tatou nei mahi.—
Myth. p. 150.
• Atatakoto, s. Composure, composed-
ness ; safety.
Atatau, v- 1- To fix the eyes on; to
see clearly. Syn. Matatau.
A, ko uta kihai i atataiL te kite atu o te
kanohi, notemea e tamia ana e te kohu.
2. To set the heart, desires, or
mind on.
Mo nga painga e ahu mai ana, mo te
atatau hoki ki nga mea i uaratia i te
roki o te tau e nga tangata.
Atatangirea, 5. The name of a great
mythical female personage of old, one
of the many consorts of Tane (the god
or creator and preserver of plants and
forests).
“ Ka noho a Tane ki a Atatangirea, ka
puta ki waho te Maire raunui. (Olea
Cunninghamii, “ black maire ” of the
settlers.)
[N.B.—Note the literal meaning of
her name and its significance, “ Gently-
sorrowing - after - the - growth-of-vegeta-
tion,” or “ Gently-sorrowing-for-veget-
able growth.” Just so, in all their
ancient mythological names — highly
indicative of the true Maori ideal.]
Atatitiro, v. 1. To look well after
things belonging to the place; to
observe closely; to examine.
2. To keep a sharp look-out; to be
on the alert.
Ka mea atu te kai-arahi, “ Kia atatitiro ki
o koutou waewae, he kino hoki no tenei
huarahi.
Atatu, s. Break of day ; dawn ; early
morning.
Hei apopo, hei te dtatii, kia oho nga manu
kawainga o te ata. (Hos. vi. 4; Mark
xiii. 35.)
E tirotiro mai ana te marama, ano he
at atu.—Poet. p. 403.
Atatu, v. 1. To deliberate well; to
consider thoughtfully as to conse-
quences.
Ehoa, e Te Whare, haere ra, e tae ki tou
whenua; kia atatu ou whakaaro, kei
pangia tou iwi e te mate.
2. To stand still, steady.
E hine, tu mai koe ki konei, kia atatu koe.
[N.B.—In the Hawaiian this single
meaning of atarangi is given: as'
“ heavenly shadows ; splendid light.”]
Hei konei ra, e te atarangi, i Waikato!
Hei konei ra, e nga iwi!—Last tvords of
an old chief.
Ko te atarangi ka hui tata mai; naku ra ; ;
waitohu, te hoe a Wimata kai tahuri te
waka.
4. A shadowy representation of sub-
stance : as a flag, a writing, treaty,
deed, bond.
He pohiri ki te mana o te Kuini; “ Haere
mai, e te atarangi o te Atua! Haere
mai, e hine.”
Atarangi, V. 1- To cause or give a
light shadow.
2. To reflect a form, outline, like-
ness.
Atarangi, adj. Shadowy, not real.
Atarere, v. 1- To flow gently, as
some streams, (Ps. xxiii. 2.)
2. To fly, or run, or sail slowly.
Atarere, adj. Flowing gently, softly;
sailing slowly, &c.
Atarongo, v. 1- To hear clearly, dis-
tinctly.
2. To hear the whole of any story,
talk, report, &c.
Atarua, 5. Dim-sighted, as from age.
Atarua, v. To be dim-sighted; to see
obscurely, as old people generally.
(Gen. xxvii. 1.)
Atarua, adj. Dim-sighted. (Gen.
xlviii. 10; 1 Sam. iii. 2 ; Job xvii. 7.)
Ataruku, v- To dip or dive warily,
carefully, gently.
Atata, s. A small circular net made
around a frame of wicker-work, baited
with cuttle-fish, and sunk in the sea.
Atata. See Ataata.
Atatakoto, v. 1. To be secure, as
goods, tools, &c. (Luke xi. 21.)
2. To be untouched, remaining as
they were left. (Highly figurative of
peace and quiet, and of honesty.
Formerly doors were never barred;
indeed, most houses were without
doors.)


Atawh
[81]
Atawh
Atatuhi, s. I- Very early dawn;
gleams or first rays (“ stripes ”) of light
just appearing. See Atarapa.
2. The mythological name of a very
ancient female personage, one of the
very earliest origins.
“Ka noho Te Ranginui-e-tu-nei i a Te
Atatuhi, ka puta ki waho ko Te Marama;
ka noho i a Te Werowero, ka puta ki
waho ko Te Ra,” &c.—“The Great Sky
which we see ” dwelt with “ First-gleams-
of-morning,” of whom was born “ Light
she dwelt with “Prober,” or “Piercer,”
pl. (euphem. for penis} ; of her was born
the Sun.—Ancient Legend, MS.
See Atea, noun.
Atatuku, 1 V. To let down
Atatukumarie, ) carefully, as by a
rope ; to let go gently ; to liberate ; to
send away, to let go free — men,
animals, things.
Atatukumarie, adv. Deliberately;
carefully, gently, freely.
Atatupu, v. To grow slowly; applied
to man as well as to plants, &c.
AtatlTOU, adj. Short, small in stature ;
stunted.
Atatutuki, v- 1. To arrive at the
end of a journey ; to reach the place
fixed on.
Ka haere nga tira na te ara ki Okareka, ka
atatutuki atu ki Rotorua ; ki te mea ka
hoki mai ano ma Okareka, ka atatutuki
mai ano ki konei.—Myth. p. 157.
2. To become fully matured.
Me i waiho kia atatutuki, engari tena
maro tonu te tu.
3. To flow to the top of high water.
Kahore ano kia atatutuki te tai.
Atauira, $• Moderate summer light-
ning.
Ataunutai.
Ataura, s. A fiery-red sunrise.
“ Ka puta mai te ra i te ata ka ivra te ra,
ara ka tino whero.”
Atautu, v. To let down a calabash
carefully into the stream, &c., in
fetching water.
Atawatea, ) s porenoont
Ataawatea, I
Atawikura.
Atawhai, 5. Liberality, hospitality,
generosity, kindness, favour; watchful
care and attention, as from relatives
to orphans, &c.; attachment, goodwill.
(Grace, Eu.)
6
Ko te rangatiratanga o te wahine nei, he
atawhai ki nga tangata o tona iwi.—
Myth. p. 188.
Atawhai, adj. Generous, liberal, hos-
pitable, free in giving, bounteous, kind,
good-natured ; pleasant, agreeable.
“Taku manu atawhai i te rangi ra!”—
Old Song, MS.
Atawhai, v. p., -a, -tia ; v.n., -NGA,
-TANGA.
1. To be free in giving; to be good-
natured, liberal, bounteous.
2. To be hospitable; to entertain
guests well. (Acts xxviii. 7 ; Bom. xii.
13; Tit. i. 8.)
*3. To nourish, cherish, look well
after, as the children of others ; to do
well to, deal kindly with.
E tarm, haere mai, maua mai o tupuna
hei atawhai i enei o teina.
4. To be compassionate, pitiful,
kind. (Is. xxxii. 5 ; Matt. vi. 1-3.)
5. To spare one’s self, to take care
of or save one’s self. (Matt. xvi. 22.)
6. To forgive; to be lenient; to act
or deal kindly, mercifully.
E hoa, atawhai mai ki ahau, ina hoki
ehara to taua mate i te mate rapu.
7. To preserve, feed, rear, tame,
bring up, as animals.
He rua tahi nga manu, he mea atawhai
hoki nana ; ko te ingoa o tetahi ko Take-
reto, ko to tetahi ko Mumuhau, he tane,
he wahine.—Ancient Legend, MS.
8. To hatch and feed.
Waiho ana e ia tana hua i te ohanga o
taua manu, mana e atawhai, mana e
whangai.
9. To do a rough act or thing gently.
I te epanga kowhatu a tona papa, mei
waiho tonu, nohea e pa atawhaia ki tona
peke maui.—Myth. p. 16.
Atawhai, Kai", $• Benefactor (Luke
xxii. 25); kind host, giver, donor; one
that aids or helps or gives ; nourisher,
cherisher, feeder; kind nurse or keeper;
maintainer, comforter.
Atawhai, Matua-, s. Foster-father
or -mother; a kind bringer-up of
another’s children; a name for a hen
with a hatch of young ducks.
Atawhaikino, S- Harsh treatment,
unkindness, from relatives, friends, or
one’s own chief or tribe.


Atanga
[82]
Atea
Atawhairawakore, s. Charity, or
alms. (Matt. vi. 4.)
Atawhaitanga, ] 1. Act, time,
Atawhainga, ) manner, matter, or
place of giving, showing favour, mercy,
&c.
2. Favour, mercy. (Nehem. i. 11.)
3. Hospitality, entertainment of
guests.
4. Kindness, liberality, generosity.
5. Benefits; gifts. (Ps. cxvi. 12;
Matt. vi. 4.)
Atawhakaaro, -w. p., -hia; v.n.,
-HANGA.
1. To consider carefully.
Kia atawhakaaro marire iho e te ngakau,
ki tou pa horo kei te Arawi.— Poet. p.
283.
2. To fully enter into arrangements,
plans, &c.
3. To be mindful, thoughtful.
4. .To discuss.
5. To reflect over; to remember.
Katahi pea au ka atawhakaaro atu i nga
tikanga o te Kawanatanga.
Atawhakaaro, Thoughtfulness,
carefulness.
Atawhakaaro, adj. Thoughtful, care-
ful, prudent, considerate.
Atawhakairo, 5. A beautiful or
prized object, person, child, or thing
(lit. neatly aud carefully carved).
Taku kaliu tiepa, taku atawhakairo.—Poet.
p. 386.
Atawhakahaere, v. 1. To superin-
tend, direct, carry out works and
things carefully, properly.
2. To narrate consecutively, perspicu-
ously.
Akuauei me atawhakahaere kia rangona ai.
Atanga, v- To be seen quickly at first
glance.
Ko taua mea ra i roa ake i atanga ki
runga.
Ka pai tena ka atanga, ka rewa mai ki
runga; ka atanga ki te titiro atu i
tawhiti nei.
Atailga, a. Handsome, pretty, pleas-
ing.
Atangarahu, v. 1. To act or deal
circumspectly ; to behave wisely, dis-
creetly. (Ps. ci. 2.)
2. To act craftily; to be wily,
cunning. (Ps. lxxxiii. 3.)
Atangarahu, s. Wile, device, strata-
gem, scheme, artifice; prudence, dis-
cretion.
Atangarahu, adj- Wily, cunning,
crafty, skilful, scheming, contriving;
clever, cautious.
[N.B.—A word much used in the
olden times of a man skilful in devices
and stratagems of all kinds ; whether
for peace or war, for snaring rats or
birds, or catching fish, or outwitting
the enemy. Such a person was in
great repute. Their old legendary and
mythical tales abound in such stories.]
Ate, s. [H. T. S. R. Tng.] 1. The
liver of man, and of beasts, birds, and
fishes.
Whangai rawa atu ki te ate kahawai.
2. Fig. for a child; progeny. For a
very dear one.
Taku ate hoki ra.—Poet. p. 162.
Te tau o taku ate.
Ki konei taku ate tuki kau atu ai.—Old
Song.
Kia naomia mai te ate o te whenua.—Poet.
p. 36.
3. A variety of New Zealand flax
(Phormium.)
4. A dark, liver-coloured totara
timber.
Ate, intj. “ Ate, ata, atau !” see Poet.
p. 121. A mere humorous play on
words ; common usage.
Atea, s. 1. Clearness, openness, un-
obstruction in space. [T.] Syn. Watea.
2. Empty space.
Ka noho i te atea.
3. Freeness from labour, &c.
I te atea a te waru.—Poet. p. 124.
(Time of being free from labour,
early autumn.)
4. The name of a very ancient per-
sonification, Te Atea, wife of Houora
and mother of Te Po : “ Ko Houtupu,
ko Houora ka noho i a Te Atea, ka
puta ki waho ko Te Po ” = First, “New-
bud ” (or new-sprout, or -growth, or
-increase), then “ New-life ” (or state of
being) dwelt with “Clear Space,” of
whom was born “ Darkness.” Then
follows some generations of half-formed


Ateate
[83]
Ati
imps of darkness; these, however, are
all relegated to their origin. Then
comes, in due succession, the more
natural pairs, Sky and Morning Light,
&c. See Atatuhi.
Atea, adj. 1. Free from labour or
occupation ; clear ; unencumbered.
Maku e whakamau nga tai toru atea i te
wai!—Old Song.
Atea kau ana ko te turanga kau o Rehua.—
Id.
2. Free from obstruction; unob-
structed, unclouded. [H. S. R.]
3. Vacant, empty, as a house; void.
Atea, v.p., tia; v.n., -tanga.
1. To be clear, open, free from ob-
struction : as a view, prospect.
2. To be empty, void, evacuated.
3. To be unclouded.
Takiri mai te ata i runga o Piriaka, atea
kau ana.— Poet. p. 347.
4. To be free from labour, occupa-
tion, or uneasiness; at ease, unem-
ployed. (Prov. i. 33.)
Ko tehea mahi koia o Waikato i atea i te
raruraru ?
5. To be wary, cautious, careful, on
the look-out.
Kia atea kei kitea.
Atealliahi, adv. This evening (fat.)
Ateatanga, s. 1. Natural openness,
clearness of place, open view ; freeness
from obstruction.
2. Clearness of land from rough,
wild vegetation, trees obstructing pro-
spect, &c. ; of land being cleared.
3. The empty space above, around;
the lower sky.
4. Time or place of being free from
occupation ; easy, unemployed.
I whea koia koe i te ateatanga ?—Poet. p.
244.
5. Freeness of mind from care, vexa-
tion, &c.
He ateatanga i te nama, he ateatanga i te
ohooho.
Ateate, s. The calf of the leg. [Tng.
atewae; S. atevae.}
Ateatenga, 1- The hollow of the
thigh; the hollow under the knee.
2. A mythological hollow place or
concavity in both heaven and earth.
“ Piri ana mai a Tawhirimatea (the son) ;
i te ateatenga o Ranginui (the father).
Ko Tumatauenga (man) i tu tonu i te
ateatenga o tona whaea o Papa ” (the
mother). (Myth. p. 416.)—In the times
of dreadful fightings and commotion of
all the elements and living things.
Atera.
At ere.
Atetahira, adv. Day after to-morrow.
Atete, v. To push against any one
roughly; to shove away from; to
expel.
Kaati ra te atete mai ki a au, ka hinga au.
Ko tana atete i a koe, he pana, kia waiho
mona anake akonei.
Atewharowharo, s. The lungs. Syn.
Pukapuka.
Atewhatukuhu, S- The kidneys.
Syn. Whatukichu, and Takihi.
Atewheke, S. A variety of New Zea-
land flax (Phormium).
Atewheki, s. A species of tree-fern.
“ Kai te ngahere te atewheki e tu tahi ana
raua ko te Ponga ” (“Silver tree-fern”
of the settlers = Cyathea dealbata); “ me
te Mamaku ” (“Black tree-fern ” =
Cyathea medullaris); “he rakau tino
kaha te atewheki.” Syn. Wheki.
Ati, s. [T.] A patronymic prefix, point-
ing out the name of the progenitor, or
ancestor, of the tribe or family : a word
prefixed to the proper name or appella-
tive of a tribe; meaning children of,
descendants of. (Ngaati, which is the
more common prefix, is the same word
with the plural article added.) Syn.
Ngaati, Ngaai, Aitanga.
Ko to te .4/%-Awa rangatira tenei ko Tahua-
roa.—Prov. p. 99.
No te tini hold o te .Ata-Hapai tenei whare.
—Myth. p. 39.
Obs. I. F. Adi is a common preno-
men to ladies’ names, equivalent to
Madam, Miss, Lady, &c. Was such
anciently in use in New Zealand? See
following quotations and note :—
Te wahine Ati awa.—Poet. pp. 134, 169.
I te nui Ati hine. . . . Ka liari ra e te
wahine Ati hao.—Poet. p. 341.
Tenei ano nga kuha o te Ati e tuwhera atu
nei.^Old Legend. (Said by a lady I)
— An ancient name for a god or demon :


Atiati
[84]
Atiut
(See Kahukura’s invocation or charm at
Haiuaiki, made to obtain Kumar a; Te
whakarongonga atu, te ati tipua; te
wbakarongonga atu, te ati tahito.)
Haia te hau, haia te ati tupua, e tau, haia
te ati tawhito.—Old Charm.
Ka mau i reira to ika i te ati.—Poet. p.
260.
Kia rewa nga ngolii a te ati.—Poet. p. 197.
Obs. II. Ati, T., a haul of fishes.]
Ati, strong intj., denoting perplexity
with vexation; mainly used in asking
questions. [F. Aiti; T. “strait, trial,
difficulty”; R. “temptation.”]
“No te marangai?” “Kao.” “ Ati, no
te hau tonga?” “Kao.” “Ati, no te
hau koe,” &c.—Myth. p. 17.
Ka ki atu a Maui, “ E kore e rongo mai ki
tena karanga.” Ka ki atu te wahine,
“Ati, me pewhea te karanga?”—Myth.
p. 26.
Ka mea atu tana tane, “Ati ranei he
whakatina ano tou e mamae na koe ?
Ka mea mai a Rangiuru, “ Ae.” Ka
mea atu a Whakaue, “ Ati, nawai, e
whae Myth. p. 128.
Atiamiin s. Name of a wind; also,
Atimuri.
Atiati, 8. Threats, abuse, intimidation ;
harsh treatment, studied neglect;
thrusting, pushing, repelling, &c. (See
verb.) [T. A species of grass, bearing
a troublesome burr.]
Atiati, v. P-, -a ; v.n., -tanga. To drive
out, or away from ; to expel; to chase ;
to push back ; to repel; to urge by
force or threats; to treat harshly, or
with studied neglect—mostly used
with a frequentative or plural meaning.
I atiati ahau kia haere atu.
Hei huna riri, hei atiati riri, taua whenua.
—Old Song.
Wahi iti kua mate ia i runga i tana mahi
atiati nui atu tona kaha ki te atiati.
Ka peia atu no, ka atiatia atu hoki i tena
wahi. (Ex. ii. 17 ; Job xviii. 18.)
Atiati, Kai-, s. One who expels, re-
presses, treats harshly, &c.
Kahore he kai-atiati inaianei mo te kino.
Atiatihinga, 8. Name of a very an-
cient pole of Ngati-Porou, referred to
in genealogical recitals.
“ E hoa, tiro iho koa ki taku kumara a taku
tupuna e tupu nei ano ; me te Mapou
toko e tu mai nei ano ko Atiatihinga te
ingoa.”
Atiatitanga, Act, time, place, or
manner of expelling, repressing, &c.
Mo taku atiatitanga i riri ai.
Atihakona, s. A sea-fish. Syn. Atu-
hakona.
Ko nga ika tenei a Pawa, e rua ana ika ;
he Atirere tetahi, he Atihakona tetahi;
kai te moana.
Atihapai.
“ He kupu mo te riri.”
Atimana.
Atimaua, pron. dual. [Tng.] We
two, of the same tribe, family, or party ;
used by a person speaking concerning
himself and another (present or absent),
but not including the person addressed.
Atiraukawa, s. 1. A variety of New
Zealand flax (Phormium); “ leaf broad,
light-green, edges light-brown, apex
abrupt.”
2. “ He mea karaka te Atirazikawa.”
Atirere, 8. A sea fish. See Atihakona.
Atiru, s. Straggling clouds, a sign of
wind and rain.
“ Ka kitea taua mea i te rangi, ara he atiru,
ka mohiotia te hau me te ua.”
He kapua ke hoki to te atiru, to te atiru
i tau ki whea? I tau ki Maunganui.—
Poet. p. 294.
Syn. Purangi, and Titihau.
Atiti, v. To stray. See Kotiti.
Kei whea ra te kuri a taku hoa e atiti noa
atu ana? (Ex. xxiii. 4.)
Atiu, 8. A north-west wind. (2.)
Me te taenga mai o te Kawana Hopihona,
i te taha hau atiu ki Peowhairangi ki
Waitangi.
Atiu, 1- To circumambulate.
Atiu ana taku haere.
2. To feel giddy in walking; to
stumble.
“ Atiu ana taku haere, taku hinganga
ranei, penei me te haurangi waipiro.”
3. To skim in the air ; to glide, hover
circularly, as a hawk, &c. See Whaka-
angi.
Mo te rere a te manu, e atiu haere ana;
ara, e kimi kai ana ra u ana mana.
4. To seek diligently in order to kill.
Tahi ana te patu, atiu ana, poatinitini ana.
5. To knock down by a violent blow.
1 Ka motomoto raua, maka atu ano ki te rae,
a nana kua atiu noa kia hinga, a hinga
marire, noreira i atiu ai.
Atiuatiu, v. To wander.
Atiutiu, To wander about. (Prov.
xxvii. 8; Is. xvi. 3 ; Jude 13.)


Atu
[85]
Atu
Na nga pei, na nga whakatakatu, na te
atiutiu, kia ngakau kore, kia ware noa
ilio. (Te Hokioi.)
Me te manu kuare hoki e atiibtiu noa atu
ana i tona kowhanga.
I to ratou wbatinga, i a ratou e atiibtiu
noa atu ana.
Heoi, marara noa atu ana nga hipi i te
kore kai-tiaki ; atiibtiib noa atu ana i
runga i nga hiwi katoa, a, ngaro noa iho.
Atiutiu, s. Act, time, or place of wan-
dering.
— s. A univalve shell-fish.
Ato, v. p., -hia; v.n., -hanga. [S. T.
and Tng., Ato; H. Ako.] 1. To thatch
the roof of a house with toetoe (cutting-
grass, Arundo conspicua), wi/ioi (rush,
Juncus communis), or raupo (bulrush,
Typha angustifolia).
Ehara tena ; he purepure rere rawa ia nga
toetoe o taua whare. I muri iho ka
atohia ano, na, kua pai ano, kua ora ano
nga taonga o taua whare.
2. To fence slightly with reeds, as
ground near swamps, to keep out
waterfowl, &c.
“ He ato mara kumara kei pau i te kiore.”
— Fig. (Gross.)
Tenei, e tama, te whare i atohia, te kaka o
te waero.—Poet. p. 46.
Na mauhi kai-ato, &c.—Old Haka.
[Obs. Name of a disease of lewd
females.—H.]
Ato, Kai-, $• A thatcher ; a maker of
low, close fences.
Ato, s. The art of thatching: act,
time, or manner of thatching a house
with reeds, rushes, &c. (See verb.)
Atoru, s. Name of a man of old, cele-
brated for his skill in carving.
Na te Atoru i pokapoka.—Poet. p. 8.
Atorua.
Atu, part- [T. atu, adu ; H. akit; R.
adu; Tng. atu, but much more re-
stricted.] An adverbial, or verbal,
directive;—a particle of great power
and use, possessing several meanings ;
primarily implying motion, or tendency,
or space, away from the speaker or
place ; in opposition to mai.
[OZ?s. In the New Zealand language
the motion or action of verbs is
always supposed to be from the
speaker (atib), or towards him (mai),
or upwards, including sideways (ake),
or downwards (iho); and is, or should
be, always thus expressed.]
1. From ; away from; hence :
Tangohia atu enei mea.—“ Take away
these things.”
Karangatia atu a Wiremu.—“ Call William
from where you are ” (to come hither,
understood).
Tu atu!—“Stand away from: out of mv
way.”
Tukua atu au.—“Let me pass by (on, or
away).”
2. Away from ; out of:
He tono tenei naku, kia whakamaramatia
mai te ritenga marama e taea ai te tu
atu ki waho o enei kino i tenei wa.
3. From ; as going on from; on the
further side of:
Timata atib i te kohatu i te huarahi,—a pa
noa ki te timatanga atu.
Oma ana au ki tua atib o te taiepa piri ai.
4. Leading to; going onwards in
direction of (away from the speaker) :
0 Tarawera i te ara atu ki Ahuriri.
5. Further on; in the extreme dis-
tance ; unto :
Haere ana, a Taupo atu ano.
Kua riro ra ki raro, a te whenua o Nga-
puhi atu ano.
6. Forwards ; onward (in place):
Kia haere atu tatou.
Kei whea? Te haere a^u^nei kei muri i
taku tuara e haere atib nei.
Kiia atu ra ki nga tangata, Kia haere atu
ratou.
Muri iho ka tahuri ratou ki te Arawa ka
patu atu i te tahatika, ka whiu atu kia
haere ki uta.
7. Forth:
Ka puta atu tana kupu.
Pau te ki atu, “Nau mai, e noho.”—Poet.
p. 407.
8. Henceforth; onward, in time;
from this time forward :
No konei atu ano, ara no tenei ra haere
atu nei.
E kore ia e hoki mai ki a matou, e kore
hoki matou e kite atu i a. ia, kua whiti
atu ia ki te wahi ora.
9. Previously ; formerly ; before this
present time; (with verbal, perfect, or
past particles):
Kua riro atib: kua mutu noa atu :
Katahi ka rite ki tana i mea atu ai:
He uhunga i turia ki taua wahi i mua atu,
i etahi rangi atib.
Heoti ano ranei te kakahu ? i rau atu
rangi ehara i te pera tona kakahu.